Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutHVAC REPLACEMENT/CITY HALL NORTH COURT/2014HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT/CITY HALL NORTH COURT/ 2014 U `' �_ G Ir RC2 U Tl" CITY OF IOWA CITY PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 IOWA CITY, IOWA May 30, 2014 N G _ DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING DIVISION Fy .. 0 4o PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 IOWA CITY, IOWA May 30, 2014 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 00 0107 - SEALS & SIGNATURES DE #14006 SEALS AND SIGNATURES 0001 07-1 I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under ����rneucuar,., the laws of the State of Iowa. Sc N ;m= . � SCHUM SCNUMM m. 4ia 13694 ^ a_ Date Discipline: Mechanical Engineer, Iowa License No. 13694 License expires December 31, 2014 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Divisions 00, 01, 23, 26 END OF SECTION N -�� o yi y 73 �R CD kr:) SEALS AND SIGNATURES 0001 07-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Cel .L.mpQm.a{p., ..5. _ O �...rn rrw ye 1.... Yi T a y.� N SEALS AND SIGNATURES 0001 07-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 00 0110 -TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements 000107 Seals & Signatures 000110 Table of Contents 000120 List of Drawings NP -1 Notice of Public Hearing NTB-1 Notice to Bidders NB -1 Note to Bidders IB -1 Instruction to Bidders PS -1 Pre -Bid Substitutions FP -1 Form of Proposal BB -1 Bid Bond AG -1 Form of Agreement PB -1 Performance and Payment Bond CC -1 Contract Compliance (Anti -discrimination Requirements) GC -1 General Conditions N SC -1 Supplementary Conditions � 'n BS -1 Bidder Status Form ' s -C !� Cnn DIVISION 01 - General Requirements t 3 v cru 01 1000 Summary of Work w e 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 01 2900 Payment Procedures 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 01 5000 Temporary Facilities 01 7050 Contract Closeout 01 7200 Project Record Documents 01 7329 Cutting and Patching 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 7900 Demonstration and Training DIVISION 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning 230010 HVAC General Provisions 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230548 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 230700 HVAC Insulation 230900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 232123 Hydronic Pumps 232300 Refrigerant Piping 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories 237400 Packaged Outdoor HVAC Equipment 238126 Split System Air Conditioners DIVISION 26 - Electrical 260010 Electrical General Provisions 260500 Common Work Results for Electrical 260519 Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 262815 Motor and Service Disconnects 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 262923 Variable -Frequency Motor Controllers END OF SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110-2 DE #14006 ces v CDCl) .J —CJ a- r C � �a e; TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110-2 DE #14006 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 00 0120 - LIST OF DRAWINGS GENERAL T1.0 TITLE SHEET STRUCTURAL S1.0 STRUCTURAL PLAN HVAC HD1.0 LOWER LEVEL HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN HD1.1 FIRST FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN HD1.2 SECOND FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN HD1.3 THRID FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN HD1.4 ROOF HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN 1-11.0 LOWER LEVEL HVAC PLAN H1.1 FIRST FLOOR HVAC PLAN 1-11.2 SECOND FLOOR HVAC PLAN 1-11.3 THIRD FLOOR HVAC PLAN 1-11.4 ROOF HVAC PLAN H5.0 HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS H5.1 HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS H5.2 HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS N END OF SECTION 00 0120 ? r� D --s c'7 n : r 0 C rTi �� ca y; p LIST OF DRAWINGS 000120-1 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 in said City at 7 p.mon the 17th day of June, 2014, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK F 0 L� a 0 7 UK Lm pwe nq�rn asters\nph, d o c 9/99 N Q ZE52 t T )>_4 C --0 F ` 70 caa �a F 0 L� a 0 7 UK Lm NOTICE TO BIDDERS CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, before 2:30 P.M. on the 1& day of July, 2014. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 15th day of July, 2014, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the following: the removal and replacement of the City Hall North Court Trane HVAC unit serving areas of the City Hall facility. The work will involve provisions to address pressurization issues in the system and an installation of an open platform networked digital controls for all new equipment as well as upgrading the controls for all terminal boxes associated with the replaced HVAC units. There will be a recommended pre-bid meeting held on site, at City Hall, starting at 10:00 a.m. in the Helling Conference room at 410 East Washington Street, on Thursday, June 26, 2014. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Design Engineers, of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeitelp the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (1 C}galendy-days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the #at�thfyI p Orman qof the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions Xf 9�s notice apd.tne other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retaine(noA) p " d of no to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is mad?Other bid be=nds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the`8" Cgcil. Y 1 The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hua@? pe&rent (10J.) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved to ;, the C%rr and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless (% City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1 ) year(s) from and after its com- pletion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Substantial Completion Date: November 26, 2014 Specified Final Completion Date: December 19, 2014 Liquidated Damages: $1,117.00 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at Technigraphics, a division of Rapids Reproductions located at 415 Highland Ave, Suite 100, Iowa City, Iowa 52240, Phone: 319-354-5950 Fax:319-354-8973 Toll -Free 800-779-0093 by bona fide bidders. A $ 50.00 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Technigraphics The fee will be returned if the plans are returned in unmarked and reusable condition within 15 days of Council Award. A separate and nonrefundable1$ 5.00 shipping and handling fee will apply to plans that are sent through postal mail. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242-4721 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422. Bidders shall list on the Foran of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s) The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Pwenglm asters/noticetob idders.doe cx N i c7 LL C3 n C� NOTE TO BIDDERS 1. The successful bidder and all subcontractors are required to submit at least 4 days prior to award three references involving similar projects, including at least one municipal reference. Award of the bid or use of specific subcontractors may be denied if sufficient favorable references are not verified or may be denied based on past experience on projects with the City of Iowa City. 2. References shall be addressed to the City Engineer and include the name, address and phone number of the contact person, for City verification. 3. Bid submittals are: Envelope 1: Envelope 2: Bid Bond Form of Proposal NB -1 N cs c� -<r- �r M G:r � C7 ,la INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 -DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding documents include the bidding requirements and the contract documents. The bidding requirements include the Advertisement or Invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, other sample bidding and contract forms, and the Contract Forms including addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.2 The contract documents for the work consist of the Owner/Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications and all addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after execution of the Contract. 1.3 Definitions set forth in AIA document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", 2007 edition, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the bidding documents. A. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Dopments by addition, deflection, clarifications or correction. CDC B. A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the orZesigrlajg�d portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in asi pAarg with bidding documents. .._r- -a g iin C. The base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the BiddeRers6p peeefn the work described in the bidding documents as the Base, to v i+ch w& may be added, or from which work may be deducted for sums stated in alternat@ bids. D. An alternate bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the base bid if the corresponding change in the work, as described in bidding documents, is accepted. E. A unit price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the bidding documents or in the contract documents. A bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid. G. A sub -bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the work. ARTICLE 2 — BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The bidder by making a bid represents that the bidder has read and understands the bidding documents, and the bid is made in accordance with those documents. 2.2 The Bidder has read and understands the bidding documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the bid is submitted. IM 2.3 The bidder has visited the site, has become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated the bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the contract documents. 2.4 The bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the bidding documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 — BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 Copies A. Complete sets of the bidding documents may be obtained from the office of Office of Technigraphics, a division of Rapids Reproductions located at 415 Highland Ave. Suite 100Iowa City Iowa 52240 Phone: 319-354-5950 Fax 319-354-8973 Toll -Free 800-779-0093 by bona fide bidders, for the deposit sum as indicated. The deposit will be refunded to plan holders who return the bidding documents in good condition within 15 days after receipt of bids. A bidder receiving a contract award may retain the bidding documents, and his deposit will be refunded. Successful sub -bidders, including material suppliers, may retain their bidding documents, and their deposit will be refunded if the Architect receives written notification within the 30 calendar day period following receipt of bids. B. Bidders shall use complete sets of bidding documents in preparing bids. Neither the Owner nor the Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of bidding documents. No partial sets will be issued. C. In making copies of the bidding documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids for the N work, and do nor confer license or grant permission for any other use of the r°, :bedding documents. D.�dies of the reports and drawings that are not included with the Bidding o�cFC ments may be examined at Engineering Division at City Hall, Iowa City, z Foua(g during regular business hours, or may be obtained from the Owner at U .z: 9W�er's reproduction cost, plus handling charge. These reports and drawings are -not part of the contract documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which the bidder may rely as identified and established above. are incorporated therein by reference. 3.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents A. The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions. and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B. Bidders and sub -bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least nine days prior to the date for receipt of bids. M C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 Substitutions A. The materials, products and equipment described in the bidding documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. Refer to the Pre-bid Substitution Section of the Project Manual and form for substitution requirements. B. If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of bids, such approval will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.4 Addenda A. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Architect to have a complete set of bidding documents. B. Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection whereTA bidding documents are on file for that purpose. cow .+ ar C. No addenda will be issued later than four (4) days prior to the -fi foZjecei=f bids, except for any one or more of the following reasons: --4 C') C' 1. An addendum withdrawing the request for bids. 7< m -v M 2. An addendum which includes postponement of the date fid 3. of b d j 3. An addendum issued after receipt of bids and prior t6�cu$fbn of e o contract. D. Each bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a bid that he has received all addenda issued, and the bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the proper location on the bid form. ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 Form and Style of Bids A. A separate copy of the bid form is contained within the back cover of this document. B. Fill in all blanks on the bid form by typewriter or manually in ink. C. Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and numerals, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words will govern. D. Interlineations, alterations or erasures shall be initialed by the signer of the bid. E. All requested alternates shall be bid. If no change in the base bid is required, enter "No Change". M Where two or more bids for designated portions of the work have been requested, the bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of bids stipulated by the bidder. The bidder shall make no additional stipulation on the bid form, nor qualify the bid in any other manner. G. Each copy of the bid shall include the legal name of the bidder and a statement that the bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. A bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the bidder. H. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the date of opening. 4.2 Bid Security A. Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the amount of ten percent (10 %) of the base bid and in the form of surety bond pledging that the bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner on the items stated in his bid and will, if requested, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Should the bidder refuse to enter into such contract or fail to furnish such bond if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. A cashier's check, cash or certified check will not be an accepted bid bond. fJ B. ` ' $arety bond shall be written on enclosed "Bid Bond' form bound within the project 9U-1 rn, nual and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety s'lalbaffix to the bond a certified and current copy of power of attorney. Cl) >-Z3 C.tl"a�-'Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of bidders to whom an J41—t is being considered until either: 1. The contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished. 2. The specified time has elapsed so that the bids may be withdrawn. 3. All bids have been rejected. 4.3 Submission of Bids A. All copies of the bid, the bid security and other documents required to be submitted with the bid shall be enclosed in sealed opaque envelopes as instructed in Section NB – Note to Bidders. Both envelopes shall be addressed to the party receiving the bids (''City Clerk, City of Iowa City"), and shall be identified with the project name, the bidder's name and address, and the envelope's contents. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face of that envelope. B. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids. 1. Location: Office of City Clerk, City Hall, 410 East Washington Street, Z3! Iowa City, Iowa 52240 2. Time and Date: Before 2:30 p.m. on ThursdaVJuly'10, 2094. C. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. D. The bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of bids. E. Oral, telephonic, or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid A. A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled the bidder after the stipulated time and date designated for the receipt of bids, and each bidder so agrees in submitting his bid. B. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, a bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving bids at the place designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing, signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. If written notice is electronic, written confirmation from the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract shall also be mailed and p1btmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids, and it "ll be -so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original bid. A < C. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time des ignated�gfith�ecei�it of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with th ps"ctior s� Bidders. :X D. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the bid as rri'gdified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 — CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.1 Opening of Bids A. The properly identified bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. 5.2 Rejection of Bids A. The Owner will have the right to reject any or all bids, and to reject a bid not accompanied by the required bid security or by another data required by the bidding documents, or to reject a bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) A. It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest responsive responsible bidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents, and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner will have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a bid received, and to accept the bid which, in his judgment, is in his own best interest. B. The Owner will have the right to accept bid alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low bidder on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the accepted alternates. ARTICLE 6— POST -BID INFORMATION 6.1 Submittals A. The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract will be submitted within 24 hours of bid opening by the apparent lowest responsive, responsible bidder. B. The bidder shall, within seven (7) days of notification of selection for the award of a contract for the work, submit the following information to the Architect: 1. A designation of the work to be performed by the bidder with the bidder's own forces. 2. The proprietary names and the suppliers or principal items or system of materials and equipment proposed for the project. C. The bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the work described in the bidding documents. D. Prior to the award of the contract, the Architect will notify the bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. If the Owner or the Architect has c f reasonable objection to such proposed person or entity, the bidder may, at the i� bji der7s option: t...a n c c W. co y— Withdraw the bid. �- Submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in E Z3� the bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such q substitution. r., D. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or may disqualify the bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. ARTICLE 7 — PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR & MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 7.1 Bond Requirements M A. The bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Bonds may be secured through the bidder's usual sources. The cost of furnishing such bonds shall be included in the bid. B. If the Owner requires that bonds be obtained from other than the bidder's usual source, all change in cost will be adjusted as provided in contract documents. 7.2 The Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds A. The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three (3) days following the date of execution of the contract. If the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder shall, prior to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered. B. The bonds shall be written on the "Performance and Payment Bond" form bound within the project manual, or a copy thereof. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the contract sum. C. The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the contract. D. The bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix a current and certified copy of power of attorrgy. 23 ARTICLE 8 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE 8.1 Conference < -0 M A. Bidder is encouraged to attend a pre-bid conference on Thursd6y'yun�?26, 204 at 10:00 AM local time, starting in the Helling Conference Room in thk--City Hall Lobby in City Hall at 410 East Washington Street in Iowa City, Iowa. 8.2 Parking A. Limited metered parking is available neighboring City Hall. Otherwise a hourly pre- pay parking is available south of City Hall at Chauncey Swan Ramp or a hourly -fee parking is available in Tower Place, located west of City Hall at 335 East Iowa Avenue, the entrance is on the Iowa Avenue side of the ramp. 3IFNGWRCHIT-1\Protects\ClT HA-11P014CI-1\CITYHA-9CITVHA-I iFRONTE- IVB.Insnucllone to Bidders- City Hall Ner1t1 Court HVAC Replacement Projec12CI14.doc PRE-BID SUBSTITUTIONS ARTICLE 1 -GENERAL 1 1 Bidder's Options A. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select one of the products or manufacturers named which complies with the technical specifications. No substitutions will be allowed. C. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturer, and stating "or equivalent", "or equal", or "or Architect approved equivalent", or similar wording, submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named for review and approval. , 0 D. For products specified by naming only one product or manuf-oturer,-§ere 11110 option, and no substitution will be allowed. I � � -4, o 1.2 Substitutionsf- , M 3 A. Base Bid shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Substitutions for products may be made during thevd�ing period by submitting completed substitution request form and sub9tantiatirr9 product data/literature to the Architect a minimum of ten (10) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of bids. 2. The Architect will consider requests from the bidder utilizing this section for substitution of products or manufacturers in place of those specified. 3. Requests submitted at least ten (10) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of bids will be included in an addendum, if deemed acceptable. 4. Substitution requests may be submitted utilizing a facsimile machine (FAX) or as an e-mail attachment, if substitution request forms and substantiating data are included. B. Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in contract documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. - Manufacturer's literature, identifying: 1) Product description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. C. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation. 2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified, listing significant variations. 3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. PS -1 4. All effects of substitution on separate contracts. 5. List of changes required in other work or products. 6. Designation of required license fees or royalties. 7. Availability of maintenance services, and sources of replacement materials. C. Requests for substitution will not be considered for acceptance when: 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of contract documents. 2. In judgment of the Architect, adequate product data/literature necessary for complete evaluation was not submitted. D. The Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions. 1.3 Bidder's Representation A. The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B. Bidders and sub -bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least nine days prior to the date for receipt of bids. C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. 1.4 Architect's Duties A. Review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Issue an addendum to identify accepted substitutions. C. No verbal or written approvals other than by addendum will be valid. 1.5 Substitution Request Form A. The blank form is bound into this project manual. B. Substitutions will be considered only when the attached form, or a copy thereof, is completed and included with the substantiating data. LU 9 0 t� CD N PS -2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #94006 CITY HALL POLICE AND FIRE DEPARTMENT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 TO: Design Engineers CIO Tim Lentz 8801 Prairie View Lane SW Suite 200 Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 We hereby submit for your consideration the following product, instead of the specified item: DWG. NO. DRAWING TITLE SPEC. SECT. SECTION TITLE PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM CD s q �.py �! PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: -4n �� -0 f'a � Attach complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which pro aged scu9stitut will require for its proper installation. Submit with request necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance. The undersigned certifies that the function, appearance and quality are of equal performance and assumes liability for equal performance, equal design and compatibility with adjacent materials. Submitted By Signature Print Name Firm Address Title Date Telephone FAX Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval. For Use by Architect Recommended Recommended as Noted Not Recommended Received Late Insufficient Data Received By Date PS -3 For Use by Owner Recommended Recommended as Noted By Not Recommended _ Received Late Insufficient Data Received CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL POLICE AND FIRE DEPARTMENT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 Fill in Blanks Below: A. Does the substitution affect dimensions indicated on the Drawings? Yes _ No _ If yes, clearly indicate changes. DE #14006 B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? 17 E. Yes _ No _ If yes, fully explain: What effect does substitution have on other contracts or other trades? What effect does substitution have on construction schedule? Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different Explain: F. Reason for Request: G. 109 Itemized comparison of specified item(s) with the proposed substitution: list significant variations: De natior,�of maintenance services and sources: +lJn o (Attach additional sheets if required) i' Ga N PS -4 FORM OF PROPOSAL CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 CITY OF IOWA CITY BIDDERS PLEASE NOTE: PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder: BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: 2:30 PM local time on Thursday, July 10, 2014 N TO: City Clerk CD s City of Iowa City City Hall C:) �-- 410 East Washington Street �n Iowa City, Iowa 52240tm -0 M In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement- iti (I*traci g Requirements, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials arid equipment, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 in strict accordance with the Project Manual and the Drawings dated May 30, 2014, including Addenda numbered and , inclusive, prepared by Design Engineers, for the Base Bid Lump Sum of BASE BID Dollars The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Base Bid amount. BID ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: Remove existing hot water parallel with variable speed drives controlled differential pressure sensor for control of pumps ADD the Sum of: pump and controller. Install two new pumps in by the building automation system. Install new Dollars Alternate No. 2: Replace existing circuit setters, air vents, strainers and connecting piping for 36 VAVs. ADD the Sum of: FP -1 Dollars The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract will be submitted within 24 hours of bid opening by the apparent lowest responsive, responsible bidder. NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before November 26, 2014. Firm: Signature: Printed Name- ame: Title- Title: Address: Address: Phone: Contact: FP -2 Cn LJJCL «r��,) t o c>�- LL ys Z5 3�` Firm: Signature: Printed Name- ame: Title- Title: Address: Address: Phone: Contact: FP -2 9-T21=11 , as Principal, and as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars ($ ) to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated May 30 2014forCITY 0 HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 0 NOW, THEREFORE, C-) -=in o (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, =ern -0 M v� ca (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and�eliver•a contract in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for thorincipal's faithful performance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in full force and effect, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the amount of the obligation stated herein. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond, as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such time extension. The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this day of A.D., 20_ (Seal) Witness Principal By (Title) (Seal) Surety By Witness (Attorney-in-fact) Attach Power -of -Attorney Kim FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ("City"), and ("Contractor"). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the 30th day of May, 2014, for the CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 ('Project"), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED:' c'� r 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid cRerbL5 of Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. -=;n o M -o M M 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts whicFP_6 inrporl herein by reference: c3 a. Addenda Numbers b. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA DOC A201-2007, as amended, G. Plans, d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; e. Notice to Bidders; f. Note to Bidders; g. Performance and Payment Bond; h. Restriction on Non -Resident Bidding on Non -Federal -Aid Projects; Contract Compliance Program (Anti -Discrimination Requirements), Proposal and Bid Documents; and k. This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. AG -1 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are shown as "ATTACHMENT A." Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. 4. Project to be substantially complete by November 26, 2014 and final completion date is December 19, 2014. Liquidated damages are $1,117 per day. 5. Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. 6. The Project base bid submitted by form of proposal is in the amount of: and cents ($ .001. 7. DATED this 15'" day of July, 2014. [DATE BASED ON FORMAL COUNCIL MEETING AWARDING CONTRACT BY RESOLUTION NUMBER 1 (Signature) Matthew J. Hayek (Mayor) ATTEST o oveay: c:av� LL s City Attory's Office AG -2 Contractor (Signature) (Printed name) (Title) ATTEST: (Title) (Company Official) PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND as (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and (insert the legal title of the Surety) as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of Dollars ($ ) for the payment for which Contractor wd Surety r� hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors ancCssignVointld c - severally. 3>::4-- C-> -< <r m C) . WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of July 15. 2014, entered into a M n (date) v� Cz r° written Agreement with Owner for CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC` REPIiCEMENT PROJECT 2014; and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by Desiqn Engineers-, which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed-upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of one (1) years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. 20 SIGNED AND SEALED THIS IN THE PRESENCE OF: Witness DAY OF (Principal) (Title) (Surety) (Title) (Street) (City, State, Zip) (Phone) cam; c� U " o c3 r_ c-7 >- LL Witness DAY OF (Principal) (Title) (Surety) (Title) (Street) (City, State, Zip) (Phone) Compliance Program I t 1 CITY OF IOWA CITY o ' new C) -<r M !�'! Contract CD Compliance Program I t 1 CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION I -GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Iowa City to require equal employment opportunity in all City contract work. This policy prohibits discrimination by the City's contractors, consultants and vendors and requires them to ensure that applicants seeking employment with them and their employees are treated equally without regard to race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, gender identity, sexual orientation, disability, marital status, and age. It is the City's intention to assist employers, who are City contractors, vendors or consultants, in designing and implementing equal employment opportunity so that all citizens will be afforded equal accessibility and opportunity to gain and maintain employment. o PROVISIONS: r 1. All contractors, vendors, and consultants requesting to do business with the Qnugtycsulb Equal Opportunity Policy Statement before the execution of the contract. o MF -< -o ori 2. All City contractors, vendors, and consultants with contracts of $ o=ore-4w less) if required by another governmental agency) must abide by the requir_ eats gfithe C Contract Compliance Program. Emergency contracts may be exempt from this i at the discretion of the City. Regardless of the value of the contract, all contractors, vendors, and consultants are subject to the City's Human Rights Ordinance, which is codified at Article 2 of the City Code. 3. Contracting departments are responsible for assuring that City contractors, vendors, and consultants are made aware of the City's Contract Compliance Program reporting responsibilities and receive the appropriate reporting forms. A notification of requirements will be included in any request for proposal and notice of bids. 4. Prior to execution of the contract, the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (located on pages CC -2 and CC -3) or other required material must be received and approved by the City. 5. Contracting departments are responsible for answering questions about contractor, consultant and vendor compliance during the course of the contract with the City. 6. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must refrain from the use of any signs or designations which are sexist in nature, such as those which state "Men Working" or "Flagman Ahead;" and instead use gender neutral signs. 7. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must assure that their subcontractors abide by the City's Human Rights Ordinance. The City's protected classes are listed at Iowa City City Code section 2-3-1. CC -1 SECTION II -ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. PLEASE RETURN PAGES 2 THROUGH 3 OF THIS SECTION TO THE CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as follows: (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contractor shall include consultants and vendors.) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affirmative efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising: layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training. including apprenticeship. 2. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor; state that it is an equal opportunity employer. Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and the regulations (see generally 29 U.S C.§ 1608 et sea.) and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orders. ;. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity p o I i c y statement. Where is this statement posted? 4. What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal Employment Opportunity Officer? (Please print)--------------- ------ Phone number Address 5. The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site. all posters required by fedelal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide assistance in ob'tafning the necessary posters. CC_ - C -D O LL. ll pZ3ne" s n s+� CC -2 6. How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? The above responses to questions 1 through 6 are true and correctly reflect our Equal Employment Opportunity policies. Business Name 0 -�" Phone Number :n s xa. c's-t w Signature Title c� Name CC -3 2. KI IN SECTION III -SUGGESTED STEPS TO ASSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES COMPANY POLICY Determine your company's policy regarding equal employment opportunities. Document the policy and post it in a conspicuous place so that it is known to all your employees. Furthermore. disseminate the policy to all potential sources of employees and to your subcontractors asking their cooperation. The policy statement should recognize and accept your responsibility to provide equal employment opportunity in all your employment practices. In regard to dissemination of this policy, this can be done, for example, through the use of letters to all recruitment sources and subcontractors, personal contacts, employee meetings, web page postings, employee handbooks, and advertising. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY OFFICER Designate an equal employment opportunity officer or, at minimum, assign someone the responsibility of administering and promoting your company's Equal Employment Opportunity program. This person should have a position in your organization which emphasizes the importance of the program. INSTRUCT STAFF Your staff should be aware of and be required to abide by your Equal Employment Opportunity program. All employees authorized to hire, supervise, promote, or discharge employees or are involved in such actions should be trained and required to comply with your policy and the current equal employment opportunity laws. RECRUITMENT (a) Let potential employees know you are an equal opportunity employer. This can be done by identifying yourself on all recruitment advertising as "an equal opportunity employer". (b) Use recruitment sources that are likely to yield diverse applicant pools. Word-of-mouth recruitment will only perpetuate the current composition of your workforce. Send recruitment sources a letter annually which reaffirms your commitment to equal car employment opportunity and requests their assistance in helping you reach diverse 'I cant pools. raj (c) C R+3al ze and review your company's recruitment procedures to identify and eliminate d15 minatory barriers. (d)CX_ePfect and train persons involved in the employment process to use objective standards o an c support equal employment opportunity goals. U. (e) >_ Rev.e �w periodically job descriptions to make sure they accurately reflect major job ". ;1 a _,ons- Review education and experience requirements to make sure they accurately re%t the requirements for successful job performance. (f) Reviewthe job application to insure that only job related questions are asked. Ask yourself "Is this information necessary to judge an applicant's ability to perform the job applied for? " Only use job-related tests which do not adversely affect any particular group of people. (g) Monitor interviews carefully. Prepare interview questions in advance to assure that they are only job related. Train your interviewers on discrimination laws. Biased and subjective judgments in personal interviews can be a major source of discrimination. (h) Improve hiring and selection procedures and use non -biased promotion, transfer and training policies to increase and/or improve the diversity of your workforce representation. Companies must make sure procedures for selecting candidates for promotion, transfer and training are based upon a fair assessment of an employee's ability and work record. Furthermore.. all companies should post and otherwise publicize all job promotional opportunities and encourage all qualified employees to bid on them. CC -4 ► r 1 154 CITY OF IOWA CITY Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 - 3 - 1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment as well as a sample policy. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Federal or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing business with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisions of the local ordinance in conjunction with N your performance under a contract with the City. � r co '=- yac� o :'�� c� CC -5 SAMPLE: EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY POLICY To all employees This Company and its employees shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment based on his or her a g e , national origin, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital s t a t u s , ra ce , religion, sex, or sexual orientation. The anti- discrimination policy extends to decisions involving hiring, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training.. including apprenticeship. Further, this Com p a n y a n d its employees will provide a working environment free from such discrimination. All employees are encouraged to refer minority and women applicants and applicants with disabilitiesforemployment. The Equal EmploymentOpportunityOfficerfor-------------- is: Name: Address: -----------_..-- Telephone Number: ---------- NOTE: This is a SAMPLE ON LY. You may wish to confer with your EEO officer or legal counsel to formulate a policy which specifically meets the needs of your company. CC -6 6; N _ r ci e r 'a Lu A. ✓>"' ® Ca _Wj - n N CC -6 5terang uoalilers, Inc. 2-3-1: EMPLOYMENT; EXCEPTIONS: A. It shall be unlawful for any employer to refuse to hire, accept, register, classify, promote or refer for employment, or to otherwise discriminate in employment against any other person or to discharge any employee because of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 03-4105, 12-16-2003) B. Itshall be unlawful for any labor organization to refuse to admit to membership, apprenticeship or training an applicant, to expel any member, or to otherwise discriminate against any applicant for membership, apprenticeship or training or any member in the privileges, rights or benefits of such membership, apprenticeship ortraining because of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation of such applicant or member. C. It shall be unlawful for any employer, employment agency, labor organization or the employees or members thereof to directly or indirectly advertise or in any other manner indicate or publicize that individuals are unwelcome, objectionable or not solicited for employment or membership b=ause of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, rel8pn, seY or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7-1995) Vic? n-6 rw3 D. Employment policies relating to pregnancy and childbirth shall be governed by the fAVviw,inu M c; � t7 1.A written or unwritten employment policy or practice which excludes from employrCo&t aWlicantrtr employees because of the employee's pregnancy is a prima facie violation of thislitle. 2. Disabilities caused or contributed to bythe employee's pregnancy, miscarriage, childbirth and recovery therefrom are, for all job related purposes, temporary disabilities and shall be treated as such under any health or temporary disability insurance or sick leave plan available in connection with employment or any written or unwritten employment policies and practices involving terms and conditions of employment as applied to other temporary disabilities. It shall be unlawful for any person to solicit or require as a condition of employment of any employee or prospective employee a test for the presence of the antibody to the human immunodeficiency virus. An agreement between an employer, employment agency, labor organization or their employees, agents or members and an employee or prospective employee concerning employment, pay or benefits to an employee or prospective employee in return for taking a test for the presence of the antibody to the human immunodeficiency virus, is prohibited. The prohibitions of this subsection do not apply if the state epidemiologist determines and the director of public health declares through the utilization of guidelines established by the center for disease control of the United States department of health and human services, that a person with a condition related to acquired immune deficiency syndrome poses a significant risk of transmission of the human immunodeficiency virus to other persons in a specific occupation. F. The following are exempted from the provisions of this section: 1. Any bona fide religious institution or its educational facility, association, corporation or society with respect to any qualifications for employment based on religion when such qualifications are related CC -7 4/24/2013 �!cerung roamers, inc. to a bona fide religious purpose. A religious qualification for instructional personnel or an administrative officer, serving in a supervisory capacity of a bona fide religious educational facility or religious institution shall be presumed to be a bona fide occupational qualification. (Ord. 94-3647, 11 -8-1994) 2. An employer or employment agency which chooses to offer employment or advertise for employment to only the disabled or elderly. Any such employment or offer of employment shall not discriminate among the disabled or elderly on the basis of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7- 1995) 3. The employment of individuals for work within the home of the employer if the employer or members of the family reside therein during such employment. 4. The employment of individuals to render personal service to the person of the employer or members of the employer's family. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) 5. The employment on the basis of sex in those certain instances where sex is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 03-4105, 12- 16-2003) 6. A state or federal program designed to benefit a specific age classification which serves a bona fide public purpose. (Ord. 94-3647. 11-8-1994) 7. The employment on the basis of disability in those certain instances where presence of disability is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 03-4105, 12-16-2003) 8. Any employer who regularly employs less than four (4) individuals. For purposes of this section, individuals who are members of the employer's family shall not be counted as employees. (Ord. 08- 4312, 8-11-2008) CC -8 4/24/2013 cv 4� ca � C Ua.a.a a p CJ{ M f� .� L 1, r C3 N CC -8 4/24/2013 GENERAL CONDITIONS "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA DOC A201-2007 amended, shall apply except as amended in the Supplementary Conditions. N d .! O f �� ,<r- M. -D M -r t �Y7 CITY OF IOWA CITY SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION A. The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201-2007. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. B. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. C. Deletions from the AIA A201 are indicated as s'�" and additions to the AIA A201 are indicated as "bold italic". D. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Law or Regulations in respect to any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings A�a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitOi )q b&equir�ias to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Docts. �� ��(! E. Delete all references to mediation and arbitration in their entirety. __4n o o M 1.2 ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS c + w t A. Add the following paragraph 1.1.1.1 Contract Documents to read as follovds o 1.1.1.1 Any reference within the Contract Documents of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor should be substituted with of the Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement). The Form of Agreement is listed as AG in the project manual. B. Change paragraph 1.1.3 to read as follows: 1.1.3 The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, tools, materials, equipment, transportation, services, taxes, insurance and all other services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. The Contractor shall provide all work and materials which any part of the Contract Documents require him to provide. C. Add the fallowing paragraph 1.2 4, 1.2.4 Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements, govern the execution of all sections of the specifications. 1.3 ARTICLE 2- OWNER A. Change paragraph 2.4 to read as follows: 2.4 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies - In such case an apprel ate Change Ordep shall be issuied dedUGtIA9 the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -1 Owner may deduct from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable entire cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's and/or Consultant's additional services and expenses and heating, engineering, accounting, consulting services and attorneys' fees and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Owner's actions pursuant to this Subparagraph shall not operate as a release of any obligation of a surety. 1.4 ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACTOR A. Change paragraphs 3.2.2 to read as follows. 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work. carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the contractors review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents, The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knewingty failed to report it to the Architect. If the Contractor performs any construction activity k (4wipg— involving a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume apprepriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear An apprepriate ape, int of the attic h rtghle all "sts for correction, The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time rwithputContract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data :of Saiz pies for such portion of the Work. aanTia"ragraph 3.3.2 to read as follows: t3Y3.2>Ttab Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the ebntract0's employees. Subcontractors. Sub -subcontractors, vendors, materialmen and WuppWEg and their agents and employees.. and other persons performing portions of the Work 9der a contract with the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. ev C. Add the following 3.3.4: 3.3.4 Contractor shall maintain a qualified and responsible person available 24 hours per day, seven days per week to respond to emergencies which may occur after hours. Contractor shall provide to Owner and Architect the phone number and/or paging service of this individual. D. Change paragraph 3.4 .1 to read as follows. 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents; the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment. tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, storage, parking and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. Should the Contract Documents require work to be performed after regular working hours or should the Contractor elect to perform work after regular hours, the additional cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -2 E. Add the following paragraphs 3.4.4 through 3.4.6: 3.4.4 Whenever any provisions of the Contract conflict with any agreements or regulation of any kind in force among members of any trade association, unions or councils, which regulate what work shall be included in the work of particular trades, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile any such conflict without delay or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. 3.4.5 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in Section 0160 00 - Post Bid Substitutions. 3.4.6 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above, the Contractor., .1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. .2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified. .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become appal nt; and .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, makrtmg sucq�chan as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. - ezl C"') :93. .�.. .5 will adhere to the contract schedule F. Change paragraphs 3.5 to read as follows: 3.5 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that mat;PM arrM- eau nt furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the:79=raeJ.)Doc0rnents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Worliwill conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defect=s, except fortilin.���^* Work, materials or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. G. Change paragraph 3.6.1 to read as follows: The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certificate to purchase building materials, supplies, or equipment in the performance of the contract. The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. All such information for said certificates shall be submitted to the City/Owner together in one submission. H. Change paragraph 3.7.2 to read as follows: 3.7.2 The Contractor shall eomPly perform the Work in compliance with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. Change paragraph 3.7.3 to read as follows: 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume full aPPrepriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attr i:r r able-te the correct on and expenses of correcting or replacing such Work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -3 J. Change paragraph 3.7.4 to read as follows: 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are 1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or 2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than the next business day 2days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's costs of or time required for performance of any part of the work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. If other party d sp tes the Arch tept's detorm nat nn or reGommandat on that party pay earl a provided 'n AN'nlo 46 J. Change paragraph 3.11 to read as follows: 3.11 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner, one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and one copy 0 all approved Shop Drawings, MSDS Sheets, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. K. Change paragraph 3.13 to read as follows: 3.13 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. The Contractor acknowledges that the property on which the Project and Work are located may be occupied and in use by the Owner during the execution of the Work. The ,Contractor shall perform and coordinate its work in such a manner that the portions of t e property occupied and in use will not be encumbered or the use interfered with or g6terri4tted. fZ _ u LCL'rChangeparagraph 3.17 to read as follows: 3'-+17 `N1, Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or �laimor infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from Les daecount thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular 5ssign,aDcess or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the G3ntract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect and the Owner in writing. M. Change paragraphs 3.18.1 to read as follows: 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including, but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property mor th@R two Work tn,nrh tse;f), but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by intentional or negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -4 may be liable, regardless of whether Ar not r ph ninim, damage, less eF expense is caused R by art indemnified hereuRdeF. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. Nothing in the foregoing Paragraph 3.18.1 is intended or shall be deemed to constitute an indemnification by the Contractor against the negligence of any of the parties to be otherwise indemnified pursuant to Paragraph 3.18.1. N. Change paragraph 3.18.2 to read as follows: 3.18.2 Contractor is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an agent or employee of the City of Iowa City, Iowa. In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under worker's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. c r 1.5 ARTICLE 4 - ARCHITECTS A. Change paragraph 4.1.2 to read as follows: c> -C W 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architeeq®8 set fort the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without:Vnr4tgn conse f the Owner—,Cea#aster and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheT_d20- S""i 0 B. Change paragraph 4.2.1 to read as follows: 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be the Owner's representative as provided herein during construction and until the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment to the Contractor on the Project. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 4.2.3 to read as follows: 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner 1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and 2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect and the Owner will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect and the Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. D. Change paragraphs 4.2.5 through 4.2.6 to read as follows: 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and senify recommend to the Owner the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to recommend to the Owner to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5 2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -5 performing portions of the Work. E. Change paragraphs 4.2.10 through 4.2.12 to read as follows: 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. Thoma ties AR exh hit Ila hop Mat a the r t t n 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and make recommendations to the Owner regarding decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. if no agreement is made concerning the time within which recommendations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then the Architect shall furnish such recommendations within such reasonable time after the request is made that allow sufficient time in the professional judgment of the Architect for review. 4.2.12 Interpretations and recommendations dPGi-.;inas of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and recommendations degS:oas, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or recommendations deSd,An,; rendered in good faith. 1.6 ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS A. Delete paragraph 5.2.1 and add the following: 5.2.9 The CONTRACTOR shall provide, within 24 hours of the bid opening, a list those persons, firms, companies or other parties to whom it proposes/intends to enter into a subcontract regarding this project as required on the Bid Form and the Agreement. 9. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. B. Change paragraph 5.3 to read as follows: 5.3 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall ,L'gquire each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to 45e bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the t" dCpntr_.actdr all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents. assunti'os-toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and LU 'prote`cfjthe rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the 6orkct0'Tie performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such gi�hts�-Wd shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the LL stbc t?St agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the t ®ntractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate. the CDntractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with M -subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub -subcontractors. All warranties provided by the Subcontractors, including all express and implied warranties in the Contract Documents and the agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors and all warranties provided by law, shall run to and be for the benefit of the Owner, and the Owner shall have a direct right of action against the Subcontractors for any breach of said warranties. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -6 1.7 ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. Delete paragraph 6.1.4 in its entirety. Change paragraph 6.2.4 to read as follows: 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 1.8 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Change paragraph 7.2.1 to read as follows: 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Contractor and approved by the Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: o B. Add paragraph 7.2.2 as follows: c'n 7.2.2 A Change Order is conclusively presumed to include all adj mntiin C ct Time and Contract Sum necessary to complete the change to the Wrrrk4ndee atec�pmts of the Work. Try -v C. Add paragraph 7.2.3 as follows: 7.2.3 In all Change Orders or Construction Change Directives,-.,.,_ ah9wance for Overhead and profit to be included in the total cost to the Owner 5lihe all noCexceed the following amounts: .1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed directly by the Contractor's employees, not including oversight of such work performed by subcontractor, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Subcontractor. .3 For each Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by such contractor's own forces, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Sub -subcontractors, five percent (5%) of the amount due the Sub -subcontractor. .5 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. In no case will a change involving over $200.00 be approved without such itemization. .6 Unless otherwise agreed, costs to which overhead and profit are to be applied shall be those costs listed in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 1.9 ARTICLE 8 -TIME A. Change paragraph 8.2.3 to read as follows: 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract time. The Contractor shall bear all costs for overtime and all additional expense which may arise in order to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. B. Add paragraph 8.2.4 to read as follows: 8.2.4 If, upon the recommendation of the Architect, it becomes necessary at times during construction for the Owner to accelerate the work, each Contractor or subcontractor when ordered and directed by the Owner, shall cease work at any point and shall transfer his men to such points and execute such portion of his work as may be required to SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -7 enable others to properly engage in and carry on their work C. Change paragraph 8.3.1 to read as follows: 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in del ^ unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, Gr by delay ^ thorZG4 delay then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owner, with the advice of the Architect, may determine. Such delays shall not be a basis for damages. An extension of the Contract Time is the Contractor's sole remedy for such delay. D, Delete paragraph 8.3.3 in its entirety. Add paragraph 8.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES to read as follows: Since the actual monetary value of damages sustained by the Owner as a result of delayed completion of the Work is extremely difficult or impractical to assess, the Owner and Contractor agree as follows: Upon failure of the Contractor to achieve "Final Completion" of the Work in compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents: The Contractor shall pay as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the sum of amount as listed in the Notice to Bidders (or Instruction to Bidders) for each calendar day that "Final Completion" is delayed beyond the date written in the Agreement, subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided for in the Contract Documents. 2. The Owner shall give written notice to the Contractor of intent to assess liquidated damages pursuant to provisions of this Article. Calculation of the amount of liquidated damages shall commence on the date the Owner notifies the Contractor of this intent. 3. Liquidated damages assessed in accordance with these provisions are exclusive c of other monetary damages to which the Owner may be entitled as a direct result cv of the Contractor's failure to achieve final completion of the Work in accordance Width requirements of the Contract Documents. These liquidated damages are not c x@tended to be exclusive of Owner's right to terminate this Contract based on c "-'��ontractors' failure to comply with the terms and provisions of the Contract. -- oM 4?-Mitial performance of the Work of this Contract shall not relieve the Contractor �Y =fFem liability for liquidated damages. r� �i; 5. C'ontractor's liability for liquidated damages shall cease upon issuance of Final Completion Certificate for the Work of the Contract. 6. Notwithstanding anything in the Contract Documents to the contrary, amounts assessed to the Contractor as liquidated damages may be deducted by the Owner from any money payable to the Contractor pursuant to this Contract. The Owner shall notify the Contractor in writing of a claim for liquidated damages prior to the date the Owner deducts such sum from money payable to the Contractor. 1.10 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION A. Add the following paragraph 9.3.1.3. .3 The first payment application shall be accompanied by Contractor's partial waiver of SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -8 lien only, for the full amount of the payment. Each subsequent monthly payment application shall be accompanied by the Contractor's partial waiver and by the partial waivers of Subcontractors and Suppliers who were included in the immediately preceding payment application to the extent of that payment. Application for final payment shall be accompanied by final waivers of lien from the Contractor, Subcontractor and Suppliers who have not previously furnished such Final waivers. Change paragraph 9.4.1 to read as follows: 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. Nothing herein shall be construed as requiring the Architect to reduce the retainage to be applied to payment applications. All certifications and payments, including those pursuant to a pending claim, shall be tentative and conditional and it shall not be necessary for the Architect to make any statement to this effect. C. Add paragraph 9.4.2.1: 9.4.2.1 The Architect's determination as to the issuance of or withholding of or the amount of payment reflected on Certificates of Payment shall subjecR. � Arcfjitect-N- ro liability whatsoever to the Owner, Contractor, Surety, or any other perSar%r .< D. Change paragraph 9.6.1 to read as follows: 9.6.1 The Owner shall make partial payments to the Contractor with FA des afteNtite Owner has received a Certificate for Payment from the ArchitectVj insure per performance of the Contract, the Owner will retain 5% of each paymgfff amount or such larger amount as will insure that there always remains a sufficient 661ance 7,q complete the work, such retainage to be held until Final Acceptance of Work and shall so notify the Architect. Payment n the manpar and w thin the time prev ded ; the ContraGt DoGuments, hall so not f the Arnh'tact E. Change paragraph 9.8.4 to read as follows: When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. WaFFanties required ``, '.h_ Gontr^n' Add paragraph 9.10.6: 9.10.6 Notwithstanding any provision to the contraryin this Contract, final payment of the retainage due the Contractor will be made not earlier than 31 days from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa (2009), as amended. G. Add paragraph 9.10.7: 9.10.7 Warranties required by the Contract Documents, including those stated in the performance and payment bond, shall commence on the date of final, formal acceptance of the work by the City. 1.11 ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A Add paragraph 10.1 1: 1. The Contractor will provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all hazardous chemicals or materials that will be at the job site. The Material Safety Data Sheets will be SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -9 submitted to the Owner prior to the start of construction and supplemented as necessary throughout the project This data is being provided for informational purposes only and does not relieve the contractor of any obligations for compliance with applicable OSHA and State laws regarding hazardous chemicals and right -to -know. B. Change paragraph 10.2.4 to read as follows: 1. When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice and shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. C. Add paragraph 10.2.9: 10.2.9 When required by law or for the safety of the Work, the Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin and protect foundations and other portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work. The Contractor, before commencement of any part of the Work, shall give any notices required to be given to adjoining landowners or other parties. The Owner shall be notified once these notices have been served and before the work is performed. 1.12 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS A. Change paragraph 11.1.1 ,5 to read as follows: .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property. including explosion, collapse and damage to underground utilities and loss of use resulting therefrom, B. Change paragraph 11.1.2 to read as follows: 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11. 1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverage wtaetfrer shall be written on an occurrence or shims made basis and shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the contractor's completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 11.1.3 to read as follows: 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. The name, address and phone number of the insurance company and agent Must accompany the certificate. The liability limits required hereunder must apply to this Wcject_ jnly. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall eeti ii " ovision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to pxpirE.Dit it at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certifiee��i� evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed Per loots shall be submitted upon final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and 11.4erea#k�,u pon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by ctiom1T.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims gaid undR the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable ffM_mptness. Delete paragraph 11, 1.4 in its entirety and add the following paragraphs 11. 1.4 through 11.1.14: 11.1.4 Any policy or policies of insurance purchased by the Contractor to satisfy his/her responsibilities under this contract shall include contractual liability coverage, and shall be in the following type and minimum amounts: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -10 Tyne of Coverage Comprehensive General Liability Bodily injury & Property Damage* Automobile Liability Bodily Injury & Property Damage Excess Liability Employer's Liability Each Accident Each Employee Policy Limit Professional Liability (if applicable) Each Occurrence Aggregate $1,000,000 $2,000,000 Combined Single Limit $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $500,000 $500,000 $500,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 Worker's Compensation insurance as required by Chapter 85, Code of Iowa. Property Damage liability insurance must provide explosion, collapse and underground coverage. Comprehensive General Liability using Insurance Services Office CG0001 or equivalent, smell include Contractual, Premises & Operations, Products & Completed Operations, Independ7,t Conkractors, Personal & Advertising injury coverages, and Aggregate Limits of Insurance (Per � ef�e�t) "y-« }� endorsement ._.. C) t- 0 Automobile Liability shall include all owned, non -owned and hired autos and also covage for Contractual Liability. Excess Liability shall provide no less than following form coverage to the primary unaledying policies. Workers Compensation shall include the Alternative Employer and Waiver of Subrogation endorsements in favor of the Owner. Professional Liability, if applicable: Tthe Contractor shall procure and maintain, during the life of this Agreement, Professional Errors and Omissions Liability Insurance. The Contractor will notify the Owner if claims made erode the policy limits below those required above. All liability policies above, except for Workers Compensation and Professional Liability, shall include the Owner's Govemmental Immunities Endorsement. [See attached]. 11.1.5 The City requires that the Contractor's Insurance carrier be A rated or better by A.M. Best in addition, the Contractor shall be required to comply with the following provisions with respect to insurance coverage: 11.1.6 The entire amount of Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits, identified in the policy and in the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the policy, be available to pay damages for which the insured Contractor becomes liable, or for which the insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such coverage amount shall not be subject to reduction or set off by virtue of investigation or defense costs incurred by Contractor's insurer. 11.1.7 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the City. Contractor's Certificate of Insurance must set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self-insured retention. 11.1.8 If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -11 limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance and copies of such shall be attached thereto. 11.1.9 The Contractor shall include the City as additional insured on all policies except workers compensation. The Contractor shall include the Owner (City of Iowa City, including its employees, agents and assigns) as additional insured on all policies, except worker's compensation and professional liability. Such additional insured endorsement(s) shall make the Contractor's liability insurance primary to the Owner's and, furthermore, shall not be contributing with any other insurance or similar protection available to the Owner, whether such available protection be primary, contributing or excess. Owner shall be an Additional Insured with repect to all required aforementioned coverages, which shall be stated on all Certificates of Insurance. Such Certificates shall also state that the Governmental Immunities Endorsement (see attached) apply and said endorsements shall be attached thereto. The Contractor shall require any of its agents and subcontractors who perform work and/or services pursuant to the provisions of this Agreement to purchase and maintain the same types of insurance as are required of the Contractor. 11.1.10 The City prefers that Contractor provide it with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. If Contractor can only provide "claims -made" insurance coverage, then the Contractor must comply with the following requirements: A. If the Contractor changes insurance carriers, or if Contractor's insurance coverage is canceled, during the contract period or within two years after City's acceptance of the work, Contractor agrees to immediately notify the City of such event. B. If Contractor's insurance is canceled or is allowed to lapse during said period, Contractor shall be required to obtain replacement insurance coverage to fulfill its obligation hereunder. C. If, during said period, Contractor voluntarily changes insurance carriers or is required to obtain replacement coverage from another carrier, Contractor shall either (1) purchase "tail" coverage from its first carrier effective for a minimum of C\J two years after City Council acceptance of the work, or (2) purchase "prior acts" 3 ,y insurance coverage from its new carrier, covering prior acts during the period of this Contract from and after its inception. Lu "Tail" or 'prior acts" coverage so provided shall have the same coverage, with co >-c: the same limits, as the insurance specified in this Contract, and shall not be d subject to any further limitations or exclusions, or have a higher deductible or self-insured retention than the insurance which it replaces 511.1.11 The City reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. The City also reserves the right to reject Contractor's insurance if not in compliance with the requirements herein provided, and on that basis to either award the contract to the next low bidder, or declare a default and seek specific performance or termination, as the case may be. 11.1.12 In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, or in the event that Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -12 such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.13 in the event that any of the policies or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.14 Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible amounts; including but not limited to the owner's deductible on the owner's builder's risk. E. Delete paragraphs 11.3 in its entirety and add paragraphs 11.3 as follows: N c -a 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE r 11.3.1 OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon:A4QVorat the to in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such decAole a nous may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Law%aid Rgyula ons). This insurance shall: _CI- -rl M cI .1 include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcon?rabtorsp Ow 's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; .2 be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; .3 include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property; .4 include $100,000 for materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by OWNER; 5 allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER, include testing and startup; and be maintained in effect until final payment is made. .8 Such coverage shall not include coverage for loses or damage caused by the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor or Subcontractors, or for damage to material or equipment while under the control of or stored by Contractor prior to installation or prior to inclusion of such material or equipment in construction. Contractor shall maintain appropriate insurance for such risks or occurrences 11.3.2 OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance which SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -13 shall specifically cover such insured objects or additional property insurance as may be required by Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, OWNER's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. 11.3.3 All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions. 11.3.5 If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. Delete section 11.4 in its entirety and add paragraph 11.4 to read as follows: 11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond from a surety using the form included in the Contract Documents, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price. Cost of such Bonds shall be included in the base bid. Each alternative bid shall include the additional Bond cost. Contractor shall deliver the required Bonds to the Owner prior to the signing of the Agreement. .1 The Performance, Labor and Material Bond shall be executed in conformity with the American Institute of Architect's Document A-312 (1984 Edition), with coverage provided by a surety having a financial rating from A.M. Best of A, VIi or higher. .2 Whenever the Contractor shall be and is declared by the Owner to be in default under the Contract, the Surety and Contractor are each responsible to make full payment to the Owner for any and all additional services of the Architect as defined in the Owner/Architect Agreement which are required as a result of the Contractor's default and in protecting the Owner's right under the agreement with the Contractor to remedy the Contractor's default or honor the terms of the Performance Bond. r-) c These Bonds shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall remain in full force P -bad gb"ct until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. The Contractor agrees and UJwill Ea`04e the Surety to agree to be bound by each and every provision of all the Contract bocurLob;ts. �p O L.) i-- --- C� tMe Surety shall give written notice to Owner, within seven (7) days after receipt of [ de�&rr tion of default, of the Surety's election either to remedy the default or defaults ,Eromp�l-k or to perform the work promptly or to pay to Owner the penal sum of the bond, tine being of the essence. In said notice of election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to Owner immediately upon completion of (a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction of each omitted item of work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the work. The Surety shall not assert solvency of its Principal or its Principal's denial of default as justification for its failure to promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -14 1.13 .5 The Principal and Surety further agree as part of this obligation to pay all such damages of any kind to person or property that may result from a failure in any respect to perform and complete the Work including, but not limited to, all repair and replacement costs necessary to rectify construction error, architectural and engineering costs and fees, all consultant fees, all testing and laboratory fees, and all legal fees and litigation costs incurred by the Owner. .6 The Surety agrees that other than as is provided in the Bond it may not demand of the Owner that the Owner shall (a) perform any thing or act, (b) give any notice, (c) furnish any clerical assistance, (d) render any service, (e) furnish any papers or documents, or (i) take any other action of any nature or description which is not required of the Owner to be done under the Contract Documents. 11.4.2 Surety shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall be authorized to do business in the state of Iowa. ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS -q A Change paragraph 13.1 to read as follows: �C) o 13.1 The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Iowa .,to- 'he'��-,rje PP9J8Gt S located except that, if the p;4A Ps have seleGed a,.; f h . cD:� w .- B. Change paragraph 13.3.1 to read as follows: 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if rli�red at n sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. C. Change paragraph 13.5.1 to read as follows: 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect and Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect and Owner may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of 1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded and 2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor. Copies of all reports, data and other documents related to tests, inspections and approvals shall be provided to the Architect as soon as practicable. D, Delete paragraphs 13.7. E. Add the following Section 13.8: 13.8 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows: .1 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -15 layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination. .2 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance F. Add the following Section 13.9: 13.9 The Contractor shall maintain CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM (ANTI DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) for all contracts of $25,000 or more, the Contractor shalt abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program, which is included with these Specifications beginning on page CC -1. 1.14 ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT A. Add the following paragraph 14.2.1.5: .5 fails or refuses to provide insurance or proof of insurance as required by the Contract Documents. B. Change paragraph 14.2.4 to read as follows: 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work. including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker. upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract_ The Contractor shall bear all testing, engineering, accounting, and legal expenses made necessary as a result of termination of the Contract. 1.15 ARTICLE 15- CLAIMS AND DISPUTES A_ Change paragraphs 15 1.1 through 15.1.3 to read as follows: 15.1.1 Definition_ A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other similar relief with respect to the administration terms of the Contract during the performance of the Work. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. (`)Nothing in this Article is intended to limit claims by the Owner related to the performance of or quality of the Work. i 5_L', "Notice of Claims. Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written 2t the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect if the Krch= is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated ..o. >.withir2_4. days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the LL lairZa_�Vfirst recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. An additional -Claim gelating to the same subject matter made after the initial Claim has been Ptnplemenfed by Change Order will not be considered and is deemed waived by the Contractor. 15.1 3 Continuing Contract Performance, Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -16 payments for sums not in dispute in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker. B. Change paragraph 15.2.5 to read as follows' 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the claim. This initial decision shall 1) be in writing, 2) state the reasons therefore, and 3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect Is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The api GF Fejer N C? C. Delete paragraphs 15.2.6 and 15.2.6.1 in their entirety. r _ 3 zf D, Delete Section 15.3 MEDIATION in its entirety. '>--i �-< o E. Delete Section 15.4 ARBITRATION in its entirety. <rM F. Add the following paragraph 15.5 to read as follows: 15.5 The Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remew as -either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regul2tions in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents, END OF DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -17 Bidder Status Form To be completed by all bidders Please answer "Yes" or "No" for each of the following: Part A ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is authorized to transact business in Iowa. (To help you determine if your company is authorized, please review the worksheet on the next page), ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has an office to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company's office in Iowa is suitable for more than receiving mail, telephone calls, and a -mall. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has been conducting business in Iowa for at least 3 years prior to the first request for bids on this project. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is not a subsidiary of another business entity or my company is a subsidiary of another business entity that would qualify as a resident bidder in Iowa. If you answered "Yes" for each question above, your company qualifies as a resident bidder. Please complete Parts B and D of this form. If you answered "No" to one or more questions above, your company is a nonresident bidder. Please complete Parts C and D of this form. To be completed by resident bidders My company has maintained offices in Iowa during the past 3 years at the following addresses: i 0 Dates: /--/—to Dates: _ / to Dates: ! /-- to f ! Part B Address: City, State, Zip: �C Address:+ - City, State, Zip, rs Address: — You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. City, State, Zip: To be completed by non-resident bidders Part C 1. Name of home state or foreign country reported to the Iowa Secretary of State: 2. Does your company's home state or foreign country offer preferences to bidders who are residents? ❑ Yes ❑ No 3. If you answered "Yes" to question 2, identify each preference offered by your company's home state or foreign country and the appropriate legal citation. You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. To be completed by all bidders Part D I certify that the statements made on this document are true and complete to the best of my knowledge and I know that my failure to provide accurate and truthful information may be a reason to reject my bid. You must submit the completed form to the governmental body requesting bids per 875 Iowa Administrative CodeChapter156. -- -- =--- – _ This form has been approved by the Iowa. Labor -Commissioner. 309-6001 02-14 Worksheet: Authorization to Transact Business This worksheet may be used to help complete Part A of the Resident Bidder Status form. If at least one of the following describes your business, you are authorized to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is currently registered as a contractor with the Iowa Division of Labor. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a sole proprietorship and I am an Iowa resident for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a general partnership orjoint venture. More than 50 percent of the general partners or joint venture parties are residents of Iowa for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is an active corporation with the Iowa Secretary of State and has paid all fees required by the Secretary of State, has filed its most recent biennial report. and has not filed articles of dissolution. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a corporation whose articles of incorporation are filed in a state other than Iowa, the corporation has received a certificate of authority from the Iowa secretary of state, has filed its most recent biennial report with the secretary of state, and has neither received a certificate of withdrawal from the secretary of state nor had its authority revoked. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in this state and the statement has not been canceled. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in a state other than Iowa, has filed a statement of foreign qualification in Iowa and a statement of cancellation has not been filed. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership which has filed a certificate of limited partnership in this state. and has not filed a statement of termination. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or a limited liability limited partnership whose certificate of limited partnership is filed in a state other than Iowa. the limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership has received notification from the Iowa secretary of state that the application for certificate of authority has been approved and no notice of cancellation has been filed by the limited partnership or the limited liability limited partnership. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in Iowa and has not filed a statement of termination. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in a state other than Iowa, has received a certificate of authority to transact business in Iowa and the certificate has not been revoked or canceled. c..a j C, ✓ CL- CD CD ® g l! <V I tV Division 01 General Requirements _4r- v M _K :- Division 01 N O Q r n-< c :�( _4r- v M _K :- Division 01 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. o 3, Work under other contracts. o = 4, Use of premises. 5. Owner's occupancy requirements. 6. Work restrictions. o 7. Specification formats and conventions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" Y for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.03 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: City Hall North Court HVAC Replacement Project 2014 Project Location: City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa Owner: City of Iowa City Owner's Representative: Kumi Morris, 410 E. Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa C Architect / Design Professional: Design Engineers Project Engineer: Tim Lentz, 8801 Prairie View Lane SW Suite 200, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 319.841.1944 D. The Work consists of the following: The Work includes replacement of one existing packaged DX rooftop HVAC unit serving the lower, first, and second levels of the North Court portion of City Hall and installation of a mini -split cooling unit serving the police station IT room. 1.04 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.05 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. SUMMARY 01 1000-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. Preceding Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. Temperature Controls System Integration: A separate contract will be awarded to provide some temperature controls integration to bring the various systems at City Hall to be viewed through an open source platform such as Tridium Niagara. 1.06 USE OF PREMI SES A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas indicated with work to be performed. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, apparatus bay apron, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner. Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1.07 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1. RX j Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used fa�41ities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used fa&dies without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. ii Er �uide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's cze rations. M y. -t-) B— Owner Geq!�pancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and L to flscaag:install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, prided s-Zh occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of eypment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy. mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. SUMMARY 01 1000-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.08 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. On -Site Work Hours: Work may be performed any hour of the day. Building Is occupied between Sam and 5pm. At contractor's option, work may be performed outside normal business hours. Noisy work shall be coordinated with Owner's Representative such that interruption to occupants is minimized. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner's Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. 0 1.09 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS r A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sell using ths.5j;. division format and CSI/CSC's 'MasterForni numbering system. n"< a " 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and t6 Co h€;,I cross' referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manuab � ink mer`Io sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all availablk�,4.,,ection•numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Prrect Maflllal to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. R Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.10 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Contractor shall be responsible for all permits required by City. Contractor shall be responsible for permitting temporary use of right of way to close of street access as required by the work (refer to form attached to the end of this section). C. Contractor to pay all parking fees as required as no contractor parking is available. D. Contractor to fill out all prescriptive rebate forms from the utility company (MidAmerican) and coordinate rebate checks from utility company to Owner. SUMMARY 01 1000-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY 01 1000-4 DE #14006 cl) N W O _J CJf^ hi SUMMARY 01 1000-4 DE #14006 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 01 2600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK o A. Design Professional will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Chi in-�e W67gl, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on "Desig - nal's Instruction to Contractor" (ITC) form. = C-) o 1.04 PROPOSAL REQUESTS <M a r*r M A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Design Professional will issue a detailed Oscriptcm of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or theTontract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Design Professional are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 14 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Design Professional. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2600-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 1.05 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Design Professional will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Design Professional may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2600-2 C~) cv Ia Ld C7 U co } C� _s n N CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2600-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS 0 A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions Co, -tract to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractors pli,tions f Payment. r7 -C co �--- ��� a tl 1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Cm M A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparatQ of OPitrac&P Construction Schedule > — Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative farms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. Submit the Schedule of Values to Design Professional at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment, B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Design Professional. c. Design Professional's project number. d. Contractors name and address. e. Date of submittal. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 g. Dollarvalue. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar, total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each Item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.05 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Design Professional and paid for by Owner 1. Initial Application for Payment. Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: Payments will be made as labor performed and material delivered is c(Zijfied approximately monthly. Payments are made within three weeks of approved payment alp}icatign r E: L2 C Pay -me t2plication Forms. Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation St6ets;as'ferm for Applications for Payment. CD o W N PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Design Professional will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Design Professional by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. N O 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recSding appropriate information about application. ZE n � M –t F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waiveMYmetpniq— liens from subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, and suppliers for construction pOF covered by. the previous application. rn 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previousplication, after deduction for retainage, on each item. _ 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices, if applicable. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 9 Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 10. Performance and payment bonds. 11. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900-4 �i jCi 'L r� Cn LL r 4 cV PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 101 RELATED DOCUMENTS A- Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: ©_ 1 Coordination Drawings. r 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.? 3. Project meetings. t 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). p r, B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas�rFuspoMibilit be assigned to a specific contractor. w C. Related Sections include the following: — 1 _ Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included In different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1 Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation, 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair, 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports. and list of attendees at meetings. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Key Personnel Names: Within 10 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project sit Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities, list addresses and telephone nufftbers i£rYluding home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and tel�homigumbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Protect. t>— g © t-) I,- �a 1. ro 'copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office. and by each U- orary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.06 AG£RINISTRATIVEAND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. 1.07 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required. of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Design Professional of scheduled meeting dates and times. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Design Professional, within 3 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Design Professional, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Design Professional, and their consultants, Contractor and its superintendent, major subcontractors, suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c c. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items. r d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. 7. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Ordersj:71 _ f. Procedures for RFIs. CS -G wc� --- g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. ::4 C.) h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. ;<r- --a M i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. = ^ Cl) k. Preparation of Record Documents. J " I. Use of the premises and existing building. M. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. S. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. U. Security. V. Progress cleaning. W. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Design Professional and Owner of scheduled meeting dates. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 Q e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. I. Weather limitations. M. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. U. Installation procedures. V. Coordination with other work. W. Required performance results, X. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. DE #14006 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting. Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Design Professional, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented �J at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and c� authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review ff�ffnitems of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appLopriate to status of Project. c> $ r., Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. r M Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind CDo schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how 0 construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items_ 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. d 19) Pending claims and disputes. qrc) 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. I < C:) 3 Minutes Record the meeting minutes. d� o 4. Reporting Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present arli 'a arties whb I I should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Sche*le after'each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or— recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.08 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Design Professional. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-5 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Software -Generated RFIs: Software -generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format. D. Design Professional's Action: Design Professional will review each RFI; determine action required, and return it. Allow 7 working days for Design Professional's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Design Professional's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Design Professional's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Design Professional's time for response will start again. 3. Design Professional's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Design Professional in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. On receipt of Design Professional's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Design Professional 7 days if Contractor disagrees with response. F. RFI Log: Prepare. maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log bi-weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2�',J Name and address of Contractor. 3011 Nall, a and address of Design Professional. 4CF I;number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5- 4 F-Ldescription. LU 6. t to the RFI was submitted. 7 c Design Professional's response was received. 8.>_ ptification of related Minor Change in the Work. Construction Change Directive, and posal Request, as appropriate. 9.� cloification of related Field Order; Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as N appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-6 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES y d A. Samples, shop drawings and/or product data shall be submitted to and alc the Desiga— Professional prior to fabrication. No work shall commence in connection with er-thewarious� items for which submittals are required until all related submittals have been a�p�p�of �ed W the Design Professional. --1n c.� <r— -0 M B. Transmit each submittal with transmittal letter indicating: date, project title, proje,Btmbgr, contractor's name and address and pertinent Specification Section number, TQp) copies of`aV transmittal letters shall to be sent to the Construction Manager's attention at th&-.Rme of_aach submission. C. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Identify re -submittals with original number and an alphabetic suffix. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. F. Provide space for Contractor and Design Professional review stamps. G. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall submit for approval to the Design Professional, equipment lists and Shop Drawings, as expediently as possible. Failure of the Contractor to submit Shop Drawings In a timely manner will result in the Owner holding back Contractor payments. B. The material and equipment lists shall be submitted and approved before any material or equipment is purchased and shall be corrected to as -built conditions before the completion of the project. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 C- The Contractor shall submit to the Design Professional electronic (PDF) copy of all required Shop Drawings, material and equipment lists for the Design Professional's and the Owner's sole use. The Contractor shall submit additional copies required for his own use. Electronic copy will be reviewed by the Design Professional and returned to the Contractor marked accordingly. 1) The Contractor shall identify each submittal item with the following: (a) Project Title and Location (b) Project Number (c) Supplier's Name (d) Manufacturer's Name (e) Contract Specification Section and Article Number (f) Contract Drawing Number 2) Reference the accompanying Shop Drawing and Submittal Log at the end of this sec- tion for required submittal information. 3) The Contractor shall list the lead time for equipment on the transmittal for the respec- tive submittal. D. Refer to Division 23 and 26 General Provision sections for required shop drawing submittals. E. In no instance shall the Contract Drawings be reproduced for shop drawing submittals. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-2 Cv N U.I SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: A. Definitions: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section, as extensions of provisions in General Conditions and other contract documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as indication by Engineer that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of contract documents. Provisions of this section are applicable to, but not by way of limitation, utility services, construction facilities, security/protection provisions, and support facilities. C3 —C 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE. D"[ A. General: In addition to compliance with governing regulations and rules/ recon TWMdAibns o franchised utility companies, comply with specific requirements indicated and ApppliBable JMI industry standards for construction work. , =- B. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI A10 -Series Standards on-_ construction safety, including A10.3, A10A, A10.5, A10.6, A10.7, A10.8, A10.10, A10."1-1, A10.12, A10.13, A10.14, A10.15, A10.17, A10.18, A10.20, and A10.22. C. NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA Code 241 "Building Construction and Demolition Operations". 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. General: Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for proper performance of the work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, when no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the need. B. Conditions of Use: Install, operate, maintain and protect temporary facilities in a manner and at locations which will be safe, non -hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons and property, and free of deleterious effects. PARTS 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION 2.01 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES: A. The types of services required include, but not by way of limitation, water, sewerage, surface drainage, electrical power and telephones. Where possible and reasonable, connect to existing or franchised utilities for required services: and comply with service companies' recommendations on materials and methods, or engage service companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference with construction operations. B. Potable Water: Water connection to Owner's existing potable water system is permitted, if not abused. Location of connections and shutdown must be approved in advance by Owner. Piping, hose, etc. for distribution is Contractor's cost, Owner will bear cost of water, TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 5000-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Non -potable Water: Where non -potable water is used, mark each outlet with adequate health - hazard warning signs. D. Temporary Power: Connection to Owners existing service and/or outlets is permitted, if not abused. Provide service with ground -fault circuit interrupter features, activated frame each circuit of 20 -amp or less rating if required. Materials and cost of distribution is Contractor's cost; Owner will bear cost of power. 2.02 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES A. The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, water distribution, drainage, dewatering equipment, enclosure of work, heat, ventilation, electrical power distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities, stairs and ladders. Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations properly and adequately. B. Enclosure: Provide temporary enclosure where indicated and where reasonably required to ensure dust protection of interior space from construction activities, adequate workmanship and protection from weather and unsatisfactory ambient conditions for the work, including enclosures where temporary heat is used or dust protection is needed. Provide fire -retardant treated lumber and plywood. Provide tarpaulins with UL label and flame spread of 15 or less; provide translucent type (nylon reinforced polyethylene) where daylighting of enclosed space would be beneficial for workmanship, and reduce use of temporary lighting. C. Lighting: Provide sufficient temporary lighting to ensure proper workmanship everywhere; by combined use of daylight, general lighting, and portable plug-in task lighting. Provide general lighting with local switching which will enable energy conservation during periods of varying activity (work -in -progress, traffic only, security check, lock-up, etc). Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. D Access Provisions: Provide hoisting equipment, ladders and similar temporary access elements as reasonably required to perform the work and facilitate its inspection during installation. Comply with reasonable requests of governing authorities performing inspections. On permanent stairs, corridors and building interiors available for access during construction, cover finished surfaces with sufficient protection to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. Access routes through occupied portions of the building will require approval of the Owner. 2.03 SECURITY/PROTECTION PROVISIONS: A. The types of temporary security and protection provisions required include, but not by way of limitation, separation walls, passage ways, fire protection, barricades, warning signs/lights, site enclosure fence. sidewalk bridges, building enclosure/lockup, personnel security program (theft prevention), environmental protection, and similar provisions intended to minimize property IOS96s, personal injuries and claims for damages at project site. Provide security/protection serncesamia;systems in coordination with activities and in a manner to achieve 24-hour, 7-day- per<weel� effectiveness. Installation to conform with NFPA - IBC requirements. gCD h �7 M `t— C: 0 N TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 5000-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 2.04 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES: A. The types of temporary support facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, field offices, drinking water, first aid facilities, bulletin board, telephones, project identification signs, clean-up facilities, waste disposal service, and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may be reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation of personnel at the site. Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of permanent work of the project, only when and in manner authorized by Engineer; and, if not otherwise indicated, immediately before time of substantial completion, Locate temporary support facilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities. Note that temporary support facilities will have to be contained within project limits consisting of the project staged construction area. B. Contractor's Field Office: Non required. D. Sanitary Facilities. Contractor shall be allowed to use facilities inside City Hall as long as this privilege is not abused. Owner reserves the right to require Contractor to provide and maintain, in a sanitary condition, chemical -type portable toilet facilities at the work site for use by contractor personnel if existing facilities are not maintained to Owner's standards of cleanliness and care. Toilet location shall be coordinated with the Owner's Representative. Ca r n END OF SECTION 01 5000 > �—C CD 11 �n M rt7 cava w N - TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 5000-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 01 7050 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project closeout procedures. B. Substantial completion. C. Final acceptance. D. Project record documents. 1.02 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near end of Contract Time, in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy by Owner and similar actions evidencing completion of the Work. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Division 2 through 16. Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion" and therefore may be either a single time pLiod for entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of the work which haisbeen certified as substantially complete at different dates. Any time variation shall be applicablherti. "n provisions of this section. 'i t-3 o 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION -C O 3 +� A. Prior to requesting Owners inspection for certification of substantial completio"eithy enti work or portion thereof, complete the following and list known exceptions in re4aest: _ 1. List incomplete items, value of incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete -for inclusion in "Certificate of Substantial Completion". 2 Advise Owner of pending insurance change -over requirements. 3 Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 4. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Owner. 5. Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touch-up painting or marred surfaces. 6. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. B_ Inspection Procedures- Upon receipt of Contractor's request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial inspection, Owner will either prepare certificate of substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be performed prior to issuance of certificate; and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of completed inspection will form initial "punch -list" for final acceptance. 1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Prior to requesting Owner's final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, as required by General Conditions, complete the following and list known exceptions in request: 1. Submit final payment request supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit copy of Owner's final punch -list of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 7050-1 3. Submit final liquidated damages settlement statement, acceptable to Owner, if required. 4. Submit project record documents, specified guarantees, operation and maintenance data, and similar final record information. 5. Submit proof, satisfactory to Owner, that taxes, fees and similar obligations of Contractor have been paid. Submit Iowa Department of Revenue Form 35-002 for sales tax refund. 6. The Contractor shall return to the Owner all keys borrowed during the course of the project. B. Reinspection Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been completed, including punch -list resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, Owner will reinspect the work. Upon completion of reinspection, Owner will either prepare certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated. C. Reinspection Costs: Should Engineer be required to perform second inspection because of failure of work to comply with original certifications of Contractor, Contractor will compensate Owner for additional services, and deduct amount paid from final payment to Contractor. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Deliver to Owner upon completion of project; obtain receipt prior to final payment. Reference Section 01 7200. 1.06 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specifications sections. B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed by the Owner: obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS A. Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Not used. END OF SECTION 01 7050 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 7050-2 CV 0 o t l t- o.J C7 }•Ca P LV CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 7050-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 01 7200 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: DE #14006 1. The Contractor shall maintain at the job site one copy of: a. Record Contract Drawings b. Record Project Manual C. Addenda d. Review Shop Drawings e. Change Orders f. Other modifications to Contract g. Field test records 2. Store documents in cabinets in temporary field office, apart from documents used for construction. 3. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition. 4. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. 5. Make documents available for inspection by the Engineer and the Owner's Representative. o 6. Failure to maintain documents up-to-date will be cause for withholding pffment� the Contractor.h [i —C W 1.02 RECORDING ,;R� o r A. Label each document "Project Record". Zx B. Keep record documents current. _ C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. D. Contract Drawings: Contractor may at his option enter required information on a "working set" and then at completion of project transfer the information to final submitted "Project Record" set. 2. Contractor shall legibly mark to record actual construction: a. Field change of dimension and detail. b. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. c. Details not on original Contract Drawings. E. Project Manual and Addenda: The Contractor shall legible mark up each section to record: a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. b. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order, C. Other items not originally specified. 1.03 SUBMITTAL A. At completion of project, deliver Record Documents to the Owner's Representative prior to issuing final payment. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7200-1 B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate. 6. Signature of the Contractor, or his authorized representative, PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 7200 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7200-2 4 Cd MS K ~ y T CD �+ O N PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7200-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 01 7329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 3. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching fire -rated construction. a 1.03 DEFINITIONS r C:) A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or awe of other Work. -1c s o B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original condifaogafte installation of other Work. r v 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In -Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. S. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio CUTTINGAND PATCHING 01 7329-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire -suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain -wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration -control elements and systems. D, Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. e•d PART 2 - PRO pyll 2.n1j MAZEl7t F, CD r� r A— Generali-GeTnply with requirements specified in other Sections. it I B... In Rlaceetdlrials Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use marbrials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. N 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that. when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. N O D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing se8ices/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/syste11fcrp utting rl minimize interruption to occupied areas. -< 3.03 PERFORMANCEr�- o' A, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed wi€lead:: tinWand patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 3> Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, Including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer, comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces, Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete / Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond - core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete, CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing, a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even - plane surface of uniform appearance. 5.. Exterior Building Enclosure Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint. mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01 7329 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-4 cv 121E2 L LJ © c�E` 0 cv CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record lgawin mor operation and maintenance manuals. zs 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenanen c requirements for the Work in those Sections. M 1.03 DEFINITIONS IVID A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by0gular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 1 electronic draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return 1 electronic copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit 1 electronic of each manual in final form at least 5 days before final inspection. Architect will return 1 electronic copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 1, Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 1 electronic copy of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 1.05 COORDINATION A, Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory -authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following - 1 . ollowing: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system. subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.02 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials. in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2� Table of contents. 3.. My ual contents. e x s TOI0 Pag�.� Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: o 1f,o >S,upject matter included in manual. 2>- +-�@,.me and address of Project. - + 3�_ [ tjlame and address of Owner, 4y Date of submittal. EQ Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual. identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3 -ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple -volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents- Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual- 3- Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch white bond paper. o 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and binfvith texF.. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same sizA�Tigxt pages aad. use as foldouts. o i b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and placevPngs in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At a0f6ariatT? locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawinabgti , ca descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.03 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6 Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. T Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. DE #14006 D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation. and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color -coding where required for identification. 2.04 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below, B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1 C: Product name and model number. 2.,: , M6 ufacturer's name. - 3.,;,_ cGbtor, pattern, and texture. 4.�— `1Ulaterial and chemical composition. 5. co qRdering information for specially manufactured products. D� Ma ten%cZ Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 6._ :5 C.3:_' Cal 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning, 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.05 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A, Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment. 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essergl maintenance procedures: d r 1. Test and inspection instructions." -t 2. Troubleshooting guide. w 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. n 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement, and reass n�k jy irrructi n 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. c2: ED 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. , E Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, lis- of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1 Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent, H. Warranties and Bonds. Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-5 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. t . Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow;sliagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensN correct illustration of completed installation. 1. ;a C o•,"t use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance U-0 a Is. A 2. o d4k-ply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section c"sect Record Documents." G. Cordy v fl ivision 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and END OF SECTION 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-6 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 01 7900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1 Demonstration and training videotapes. B. Related Sections include the following N 1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for administrative and procedural r ruiremeE s for demonstration and training allowances. c?. 2 Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requ*W ent_Qrfbr .� preinstruction conferences. n� o 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demorr on and tra for products in those Sections. ! t C. Allowances: Furnish demonstration and training instruction time under the D�r�onstratlon and Training Allowance as specified in Division 01 Section "Allowances " D. Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual time spent performing demonstration and training in required location. No payment will be made for time spent assembling educational materials, setting up, or cleaning up. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit 1 electronic copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory -authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment; and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. HVAC systems 2. HVAC instrumentation and controls 3. Electrical service and distribution B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module Include a de-d�ptm IffI specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each B module, bi1ijde instruction for the following 1. o BaSisof System Design. Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: rSystem, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. tea; ,, Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. s c. o Operating standards. N d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions h. Performance curves 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. C. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages, b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. C. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures - e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. M. Special operating instructions and procedures. o 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a a- Alignments. __4c7 0 b. Checking adjustments. C. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. co 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions, b. Test and inspection procedures. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. C. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions, C. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location_ 3.02 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy_ 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from project site Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use END OF SECTION 01 7900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-4 ry cli =2 tZ Jr W ra N DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-4 Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Division 23 N CJ r C7'C W -F m f..J Division 23 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 0010 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section applies to all work under the HVAC contract. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Piping Insulation 2. Ductwork for Air Distribution 3. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers and Dampers 4. Exhaust Fans and Ducts �z 5. Thermostats and Control Wiring o o 6. Insulation of Ducts and Plenums 7. Furnaces and Condensing Units and Refrigerant Piping y -.q 8. Unit Air Conditioners c-) [ w t... 9. Hot Water Boiler 10. Water Chillers -o 11. Terminal Heating and Cooling Units 12. Hydronic Piping B. The work shall include all materials, equipment and labor required for complete and properly functioning HVAC systems. C. Drawings for HVAC work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. D. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make such changes without additional cost to Owner. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain piping or items such as unions or fittings may not be shown, but where such items are required by other sections of the specifications, or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. F. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. G. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1. International Mechanical Code 2. Uniform Plumbing Code 3. International Building Code 4. National Electric Code (NEC) HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 5. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) 6. Local Utility Company Requirements 7. Local Codes, all trades 8. Standards of ASME, ASHRAE, NEMA. IEEE, AGA, SMACNA 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 10. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) 11. Iowa Administrative Codes 12. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Design Professional of any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Design Professional for final decision. C. Where drawings or specifications call for workmanship or materials in excess of code requirements, a lower grade of construction will not be permitted. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections, licenses and fees required in connection with the HVAC work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. 1.05 HVAC DRAWINGS A. The HVAC drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only, Contractor shall examine construction drawings to familiarize himself with the specific type of building construction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. cv B. AiNings-afe intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangement afi�loca,:2s of ducts, piping and equipment. L �.l_E di—I Contraoto-shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations foq equ��ie`nt and rough -ins and the exact routing of piping and ducts so as to best fit the layout D_�_� o�it e v�or`k' � Ciitractohall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions: scaling ole drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. cv E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings and valves may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications. such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact location of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. C. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. D. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with the conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of the General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. e. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. Design Professional reserves the right to determine space priocty of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts andl-quipmit of the various contractors. `'n C. Drawings and specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work Gholin m3eithe�rr' them, whether in the other or not, shall be executed according to the true iamtp4m arRmeaAing thereof, the same as if set forth in all. Conflicts between the drawings and the-FWcifteation„�o between the requirements set forth for the various contractors shall be calle – :-Nhe attenti Design Professional. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids” rt 6,1 tS�?assu that none is required and that Contractor is in agreement with the drawings aM specAsations as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by Design Professional and his decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting and plaster until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint and scratches shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires Contractor to work in finished areas of the building, Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Contractor shall arrange with the General Contractor for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect. 1.Og OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Refer to Division 1 for additional cutting and patching information. B. Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between walllfloor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shall be sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. Where piping, sleeves and ducts pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Existing Structure: 1. Contractor shall provide cutting, lintels and patching, and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of his work, and shall furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. 2. Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Design Professional. Extent of cutting shall be minimized: use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. 3. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. 1.10 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Contractor shall do all excavating necessary for hydronic piping, gas piping, etc., and shall backfill trenches and excavations after work has been inspected. Care shall be taken in excavating that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not disturbed in any way, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. Where a line must pass under a footing, the crossing shall be made by the smallest possible trench to accommodate the pipe. Excavation shall be kept free from water by pumping if necessary. Q Backfill about the structure shall be placed, when practical, as the work of construction Progresses. Backfilling on or against concrete work shall be done only when directed. Backfilling of trenches shall progress as rapidly as the testing and acceptance of the finished sections of the work will. permit and shall be carried to a crown approximately six (6) inches above existing grades. In backfilling trenches, selected material shall be compacted firmly around and to a depth of not less than six (6) inches over the top of work in trench. All fill and backfill and rough grading shall be compacted thoroughly in layers and shall be brought up to within six (6) inches of fi4&cl grades. All fill and backfill shall be sand or pit run sand/gravel graded from 1" size do- nO — _i) excavated material is not suitable for backfill. 1. f JFAT15GIAt�S C) C- A.Allnate; i regufarl� of sad otherwise. c+ EQUIPMENT equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A_ manufacturer in the manufacture of the specified item Where two or more units are required they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items, when required, shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish, to Design Professional, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. C. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include. but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D. After award of contract, Contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to Design Professional for review. E. Submit required information on the following items: F. Design Professional will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctlylnterpreting the plans and specifications. G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to Design Professional in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard -backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR HVAC SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-5 CERTIFICATE OTHER SPEC DETAIL PROD INSTALL O & M OF DEMON- (SEE SECTION EQUIPMENT DWGS DATA SAMPLES METHODS MANUAL STRATION NOTES 230548 Vibration Controls for HVAC X Piping and Equipment 230553 HVAC Identification X 230593 Testing, Adjusting and 1 Balancing for HVAC 230700 HVAC Insulation X 230900 Instrumentation and Control X X X X for HVAC 233113 Metal Ducts X X 1 233300 Air Duct Accessories X X — o 237400 Packaged Outdoor HVAC X X DC7 Equipment 238126 Split System Air Conditioner X X NOTES: 1. Submit test reports as described in specification section. ' o F. Design Professional will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctlylnterpreting the plans and specifications. G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to Design Professional in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard -backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR HVAC SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-5 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization. address, contract and phone number. 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Design Professional and Contractor shall be included, if applicable. along with the items listed above. 8. Reports of all tests and demonstrations including certificate of owner instruction, testing and balancing report, etc. 1.14 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Tests Required: Piping shall be tested and proved tight under the following static pressures. Pressure shall be maintained for four (4) hours. System Hydronic Piping Steam Piping Pressure 150 psi (water) 150 psi (water) (IJ OiIP4ping „.- 150 psi air pressure. cry W Refrlger Ydci Piping: LL:" PfirchJLF'79'�,dLines Charge and operate unit. Check for r7 c'r" leaks with electronic leak detector. M >- v FuPifiing 100 psi air pressure or 150% of �. p operating pressure (whichever is greater) B. Al"ystems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. Contractor shall submit a report to Design Professional citing dates, times, pressures, and results of all tests performed. 1.15 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Prior to acceptance of the HVAC installation. Contractor shall provide to Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. 1. Provide adequate notice to Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. 2. Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. B. Equipment training: Manufacturer's representatives shall provide instruction on each major piece of equipment. Contractor shall provide instruction on all other equipment. Training sessions shall use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction materials included in the O&M manuals and emphasize preventative maintenance and safe operating procedures. Training shall be performed by qualified factory trained technicians. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-6 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 4. HVAC Contractor shall attend all sessions performed by the manufacturer's representative and shall add to each session any special information relating to the details of installation of the equipment as it might impact the operation and maintenance. 5. Equipment training shall occur as soon as possible after start up of the equipment and shall include hands-on operation. Training shall be provided for equipment listed in the table below. C. System training: HVAC and Temperature Controls Contractors shall jointly conduct system operating training. These sessions shall include hands-on demonstrations of system wide start-up, operation in all possible modes, shut -down and emergency procedures. D. The following are minimum requirements for Owner instruction: Section Description Hours Presented By Others Present Remarks (Note 1) 230010 HVAC System 8 Mech. Contractor Note 2 (Excluding Equipment) T.C. Contractor 237400 Central HVAC Equip. 4 Mach. Contractor 230900 Temperature Control 40 Manufacturer's Representative _}te 3 System )'—r -� 238126 Split System Air 2 Mech. Contractor�j h� 1 Conditioner 1. Any unused hours shall be used at Owners discretion during the first year of occupancy.r ,;:R •"" t routing, flaw' 2. System training shall include, but not be limited to, valve locations, system .2hd`air1&er patterns, system start-up/shut-down/emergency procedures. 3. Training shall occur in several sessions over the course of the first year of operation. A minimum of four separate dates are required for temperature controls, two dates for chillers. E. Contractor shall submit to Design Professional a certificate, signed by Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-7 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that Contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: NAMES DATE HOURS D. Owner's representatives receiving instruction: C� Owner: cv P c% t CD c� s zz zz r a N t NAMES DATE HOURS E. Acknowledgement of demonstration: Contractor's Representative: signature date Owner's Representative: signature date HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-8 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.16 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Divisions 00 and 01. B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.17 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Design Professional at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B. Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of Contractor and/or the manufacturer. C. If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions (including accessibility for maintenance), operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends tr@over all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manuf�5urer. r D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all proftPegr ments.. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specificaMjrv� as.. equir Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog"nb�T that re not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. [M '.o M 1.18 GUARANTEE A. The entire HVAC system including all sub -systems shall be guaranteed againstn'aefect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year from substantial completion or beneficial occupancy whichever occurs earlier. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1.19 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non -hazardous and ready for normal use by Owner. B. Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.20 CLEANING A. Prior to assembly of pipe and piping components, all loose dirt, scale, oil, and other foreign matter on internal and exterior surfaces shall be removed by means consistent with good piping practices. During fabrication and assembly, slug and weld splatter shall be removed from both internal and external pipe joints by preening, chipping, and wire brushing. B. At the conclusion of the construction, the entire system of piping and equipment shall be cleaned internally. Prior to flushing erected piping surfaces, Contractor shall disconnect all instrumentation and equipment and open wide all valves. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-9 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. All temporary labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed from all fixtures and equipment. Name plates, ratings, instruction plates, etc., shall not be obscured by paint, insulation, or placement of units. D. Heating and air conditioning equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and clean filters installed. 1.21 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Electrical work and equipment provided by HVAC Contractor shall include the following: 1. Starters and disconnects for motors of HVAC equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 2. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of HVAC equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 3. Electrical heating coils and similar elements in HVAC equipment. 4 All control wiring in accordance with the requirements of Division 26. B. Electrical Contractor shall provide all power wiring for HVAC equipment, including services for motors and equipment furnished by the HVAC contractor. Motor and equipment locations are shown on the electrical drawings, C. Electrical Contractor shall make final connections for all motors and equipment furnished by the HVAC contractor. D. Electrical Contractor shall furnish safety disconnects and starters for all motors and equipment furnished by the HVAC contractor (unless specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with the eq ment), so as to make service complete to each item of equipment. E.r—�, Con$acto 'ihall consult with Electrical Contractor prior to conduit rough -in and shall verify with LU hi I g)ikct locations for rough -ins, and the exact size and characteristics of the services required- shall provide Electrical Contractor a schedule of electrical loads for the equipment fur heHCy.�-him. These schedules will be used for sizing services, disconnects, fuses. starters anovep�q protection. F. R6�_r to Dusion 23 Controls section for control system wiring. Control wiring shall be done in a Nordance with the requirements of Division 26. G. All conduit installed for control wiring shall be blue. Labeled conduit will not be accepted. H. Control wiring, where not exposed, may be installed without conduit. Wiring in ducts.. plenums and other air handling spaces shall be specifically listed for the use. All exposed control wiring and wiring behind inaccessible construction (such as in walls and above drywall ceilings) shall be routed in blue conduit. All wall penetrations shall be sleeved with blue conduit. Installation shall comply with all code requirements. 1.22 ACCESS DOORS A. When HVAC Contractor provides any equipment requiring periodic servicing which will be concealed by non -accessible architectural construction, HVAC Contractor shall provide a flush access door, The access door shall be equal to a Karp DSC -211 Universal access door or Nystrom APWB or type for the specific construction involved. B. Access doors in fire rated construction shall be fire rated and have U.L. label. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-10 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Construction 1. Door and trim shall be 13 gauge steel, frames shall be 16 gauge steel. 2. Trim shall be of one piece construction. 3. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive baked grey enamel. 4. Hinges shall be concealed, offset, floating hinge. 5. Locks shall be flush, screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam -and -studs. 1.23 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for specific requirements concerning temporary utilities. B. Under no circumstances shall the building HVAC equipment be used for temporary heat, cooling or ventilation during construction prior to Owner acceptance of the building at substantial completion. 1.25 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS A. Provide equipment housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment. Anchor equipment to concrete equipment pads according to equipment manufacturers recommendations. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or as required to be 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. Pads to be a minimum of 4" in height unless noted N otherwise. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otEe7rwise- indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimete;S a base. —71 3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend t od h co trete, base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manu rer''s ettin drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished wit gms6 be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts according to manufacturer's recommendations and kcgelevaWans required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Use 3000 -psi compressive strength concrete with #3 rebar 12" O.C. END OF SECTION 23 0010 HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-11 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PARTS - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes the following: 1. Demolition 2. Sleeves 3. Escutcheons 4. Fire Stopping 5. Guards PART 2 - PRODUCTS r 2.01 DEMOLITION MATERIALS ..� A. All materials removed shall be the property of the removing contractor and sha2brer d of�ii ` the site by him, unless otherwise specified. -4P- ro 2.02 SLEEVES A, Sleeves passing through non -load bearing walls and partitions shall be galvanized ;Beet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: 1. For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller - 24 gauge 2. For pipes 3" to 6" - 22 gauge 3. For pipes over 6" - 20 gauge B. Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, fireproof walls, foundations, footings and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe or cast iron pipe. C. Sleeves are not required in masonry walls which are core drilled or walls of drywall construction, except where partition is a firestop, smokestop, or side of air plenum. D. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation and to allow for free movement of pipe. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing material. E. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with wall, partitions and ceilings, and shall extend 1/2" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water and fill space between sleeves and pipe with graphite packing and caulking compound. F. Sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe shall be provided with flashing, furnished and installed by General Contractor, extending 12" beyond sleeve in all directions; flashing shall be secured and sealed to membrane or lead safe and shall be sealed to sleeve and caulked watertight. Sleeves passing through roof shall be installed in same manner except sleeves shall extend to 6" above roof. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 G For exterior walls below grade, sleeves shall be cast iron. Space between sleeve and pipe shall be sealed with modular rubber links tightened with bolts (Link -Seal or equal). Waterproofing of pipe penetrations in exterior walls shall be coordinated with waterproofing contractor. 2.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeved opening into finished spaces. Escutcheons shall fit around insulation or around pipe when not insulated; outside diameter shall cover sleeve. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with set screws or other approved devices. 2.04 FIRESTOPPING A. Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wali/floor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shall be sealed with UL Listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. General: 1. Demolition shall be accomplished by the proper tools and equipment for the work to be t` -j removed. Personnel shall be experienced and qualified in the type of work to be cli performed_ t 2. o`niractor shall remove existing equipment and piping not necessary for additions or Zxr ling portions of building as indicated on drawings and/or specified herein. To include CD ..w co �bandoned equipment and piping back to point of origin. 3. �Wfractor shall be responsible for the cutting and capping of all existing services before anzwork is commenced by the General Contractor. 0 3. Wofk by Others: Unless specifically noted under other contracts, Contractor shall assume all required work shall be performed by him In general, the following will be performed by others: C General Contractor will remove any floors, walls and ceilings, neatly patch, match, complete and finish all affected surfaces. 2. Electrical Contractor will disconnect all electrical services and remove abandoned conduit back to point of origin Existing Conditions: 1. If any piping serving existing fixtures or equipment which are to remain are disturbed by operations under this Contract, Contractor shall provide pipe and insulation required to reestablish continuity of such piping systems_ 2. Contractor shall arrange for General Contractor to repair. patch and paint all construction, with material necessary to match surrounding material, which is necessary due to removal of equipment and piping_ COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3. Contractor shall furnish all required labor and material where required to extend new work to connect to similar work where new addition adjoins existing building and for extension of existing system. Connection shall be made in a suitable manner. D. Owner's Right of Salvage: The Owner may designate and have salvage rights to any material herein demolished by the Contractor. 3.02 SLEEVES A. Install sleeves for all piping passing through floors, roof, walls, concrete beams and foundations as required by this section. 3.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Install escutcheons for all pipes entering finished spaces. 3.04 GUARDS A. Where exposed insulated piping extends to floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation to extend up from floor 48". Guard to be galvanized sheet not less than 26 gauge. END OF SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-3 0 � r C7 c:. ! �� �� R M N CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A- Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for all motors provided B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics andconnection requirements. c3 C. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power �L;v or ree p-hrese motors larger than 1/2 horsepower. C -1,a D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical conneckl%lul catlo d wiring instructions. W 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ^7 A. ANSIINSF 372 Certification: All potable water supply piping valves (excluding main gate valves greater than 2") shall meet the requirements of ANSI/NSF 372 Certification, Drinking Water System Components, Lead Content. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Comply with NEMA MG1 unless noted otherwise. Constant Speed Motors: Minimum 1.15 service factor; rated at 40 deg. C. ambient temperature with 90 deg. C. temperature rise (Class B insulation). C. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Inverter duty rated, Class F insulation (minimum). Windings shall be copper magnet with moisture -resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse -width modulated inverters. D. Multiple speed motors: Multiple windings. E. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficiency as defined in NEMA MG1. Peak instantaneous current: Maximum 130% of full -load. COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 G. All motors shall be provided as required for motor orientation within equipment. H. Horsepower ratings shall be adequate for operating the connected loads continuously in the prevailing ambient temperatures in areas where the motors are installed, without exceeding the NEMA standard temperature rises for the motor insulations. I. Motor designs, as indicated by the NEMA code letters, shall be coordinated with the connected loads to assure adequate starting and running torques. J. Motor Enclosures: 1. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the motors. 2. Where the types of motor enclosures are not shown on the drawings, they shall be the NEMA types which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the motors are being installed. Motors located outdoors to be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy - sealed type. 3. Thoroughly clean and paint the enclosures at the factory with manufacturer's prime coat and standard finish. K. Additional requirements for specific motors, as indicated in other sections, shall also apply. 2.02 SINGLE PHASE POWER A. Capacitor start motors starting torque shall be three times full load torque and starting current shall be less than five times full load current. B. Puil-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. c,i C, Breakdown: Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. Dgtor§ 7Qapacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-starUcapacitor-run motors ---- with nttyapacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. drip -p ooFlznclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, elurcated sleeve or ball bearings. .:- Cl) F. 9zlclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.03 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque. B. Starting Current: Six times full load current. C_ Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. D_ Design, Construction, Testing and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. E Insulation System. NEMA Class B or better. F Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data. G_ Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T -Frames of steel, aluminum or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors imbedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter. I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti -friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V -belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 23 0513 RE COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and seals as required by the drawings and this section. B. Types of supports, anchors and seals specified in this section include the following: N 1. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports. 2. Vertical -Piping Clamps. © T 3. Hanger -Rod Attachments. 4. Building Attachments. 5. Saddles and Shields. c71-< o 6. Miscellaneous Materials. -<r-- n 7. Anchors. � oZ 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable plumbing and mechanical codes pertaining-toproduct materials and installation of supports, anchors and seals. B. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved. C. ANSI Compliance: All supports and parts shall conform to the latest requirements of the ANSI Code for Pressure Piping 1331.1.0 except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this specification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows, with catalog numbers based on Grinnell: 1. Anvil International 2. B -Line 3. Elcen 4. Unistrut Building Systems 5. Grinnell B. Pipe support systems shall secure pipes in place, prevent pipe vibration, provide vertical adjustment for maintaining required grades, and provide for expansion and contraction. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being induced into the pipe or connected equipment. D. Wherever possible, pipe attachments for horizontal piping shall be pipe clamps. E. Wherever possible, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. F. All rigid hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. G. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit swing. H Where horizontal piping movements are greater than 1/2 inch, or where the hanger rod angularity from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to hot position of the pipe, the hanger pipe and structural attachments shall be offset in such manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. I. Hangers shall be designed so that they cannot become disengaged by movements of the supported pipe. J. Where supports are attached to concrete or other structural members, care shall be taken to prevent damage or weakening of the structural members. K. Where concrete inserts are used, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to accurately locate and attach inserts to concrete forms. PART 3 - . EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORT A. Hanger rods for steel and copper pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: C1_1 cv Naiiinal Pipe Minimum Rod in. Maximum Span, ft Diameter, in to 1 10co y—JP — 1 /2 10 3/8 3/8 Li..:;1/2 10 11 318 3a 12 1/2 1/2 0 3-112 13 1/2 4 14 5/8 5 16 5/8 6 17 3/4 8 19 7/8 10 22 7/8 12 23 7/8 For 1/2 incopper tube, 8 ft. spacing of hangers is recommended. B. In addition to the above specified spacings, install additional hangers at change in pipe direction and at concentrated loads, large valves, strainers, etc. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. When two or more pipes are to be run parallel together, they may be supported on trapeze type hangers. Trapeze bar angles or channels and hanger rods shall be of sufficient size with required spacing to support the particular group of pipes. D. For suspending hanger rods from brackets attached to walls, use welded steel brackets, Fig 194 for loads up to 750 lbs; Fig. 195 for loads up to 1,500 lbs; Fig. 199 for loads up to 3000 lbs. E. Exterior refrigerant piping shall be supported with steel angle or steel channel strut supports as detailed on the drawings. F. Where pipes are to be racked along walls, use malleable iron one -hole clamp, Fig. 126 for pipes up to 3". For pipes larger than 3", use steel channel strut pipe rack. G. Where pipes are to be supported from floor, use unistrut pipe stand with post base. Unformed concrete will not be permitted. 3.02 INSTALLATION - VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS 0 A, Support vertical steel and copper pipe at every other floor line. B. In addition to the above, support vertical pipes at base of riser with base fitting setion—o ncrete,ar block pier, or by hanger located on horizontal connection close to riser. o r— C. Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling belov_grl* sua3ort camp extensions from inserts or other approved attachment. CD w 3.03 PIPE ATTACHMENTS A. For horizontal steel pipe, use adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. 260, for pipes up to 30". B. For horizontal copper pipe and tube, use copper plated adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. CT -65. C, When thermal expansion for horizontal pipe is in excess of 112" axially as indicated on the drawing, use adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, Fig. 181, or pipe roll stand, Fig. 177. 3.04 INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS A. Hanger rods: use carbon steel single or double end threaded, Figs. 140 and 253 as required. Continuous threaded rod, Fig. 146, may be used wherever possible. Contractor may at his option cut and thread rod on the job site. B. Chain, wire or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. One pipe shall not be suspended from another pipe. C. Hangers shall be supported from appropriate structural members. In no case shall hangers be supported from ductwork, cable trays, piping, or other equipment. Existing hangers and supports shall not be used as supports for new hangers unless specifically designed as such, or additional loadings have been confirmed to be acceptable for existing supports. 3.05 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS A. For attaching steel or copper plated hanger rods to reinforced concrete; use black carbon steel concrete inserts, Fig. 285 for loads up to 400 Ids., Fig. 281 for loads up to 1200 lbs. or suitable drilled inserts equal to Ramset/Red Head - Trubolt wedge anchor, RamseURed Head Epcon system or Hilti Kwik Bolt II anchor. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. For attaching steel hanger rods to structural steel beams, use malleable iron C -clamps, Fig. 87, with retaining clip for loads up to 500 Ibs.; Fig. 229 with extension piece for loads up to 1,365 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron C -clamps, Fig. CT -88, with hardened cup paint set screw, for loads up to 400 Ids. C. For attaching steel hanger rods to wood structural members, use malleable iron ceiling flange pipe threaded, Fig_ 128 for loads up to 480 lbs., Fig. 153 for loads up to 1270 Ids. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron ceiling flange, Fig. CT -128R for loads up to 180 Ids. D. Under no circumstances shall hangers be attached to metal roof deck. 3.06 PIPE AND DUCT COVERING PROTECTION A. Hangers and supports for insulated cold piping and ductwork shall not injure or pierce insulation. Provide insulation protection shields or saddles for piping, Fig. 160. 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 165A, 166A, or 167 in conjunction with hanger or roll device. 3.07 ROOF MOUNTED PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Roof mounted equipment, not specified to be mounted on roof curbs shall be installed on equipment mounting rails specifically designed for that purpose or as shown on plans. Roof mounted piping and ductwork shall be mounted on a pipe support system equal to B -Line C - Port. END OF SECTION 23 0529 @.V c:3 Ut— �d C7 LL i - s M HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 SECTION 23 0548 -VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Conditions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A- Extent of vibration isolation work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and/or specified in other Division -23 sections. B. All HVAC equipment over one horsepower, unless otherwise noted shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration and noise isolators C. Where isolator type and deflection are not shown, the related equipment shall be isolated in accordance with the 2003 ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications, Chapter 47. N D. Types of vibration isolation products specified in this section include the followings' c7 r Cn 1 Precompressed Molded Fiberglass Isolators. —■ ifir 2. Elastomeric Isolators. 3. Spring Isolators, Free Standing_ 4. Spring Isolators, Vertically -Restrained. 5. Isolation Hangers. p 6. Structural Steel Bases. " ca 7. Concrete Inertia Bases. ` 8. Isolation Rail Systems. ^� 9. Flexible Duct Connectors. 10, Flexible Pipe Connectors. E. Vibration isolation products furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division -23 sections. F. Refer to other sections of these specifications for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets and other work related to vibration isolation work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Qualification: Provide each type of vibration isolation unit produced by specialized manufacturer, with not less than 5 years' successful experience in production of units similar to those required for project. The materials and systems specified in this Section shall all be provided by the Contractor, from a single vibration isolation materials manufacturer to assure single responsibility for the performance of all isolation materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The isolator manufacturer's submittal shall include the complete design for required isolation and bases, and a tabulation of the design data including O.D., free and operating heights of the isolators. VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Vibration Isolation Products 1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. 4. Mason Industries B. The following item specifications apply to the corresponding Type numbers used in the Vibration Isolation Schedule. Model Numbers are based on Kinetics Noise Control. 2.02 ISOLATION MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS A. Type 1 Isolator: Model KIP -Q Precompressed Molded Fiberglass Noise and Vibration Isolation Pads, individually coated with a flexible moisture impervious elastomeric membrane. Pads shall be fine (.00018 in dia) bonded annealed glass fibers which have been stabilized during manufacture by overloading the material ten times. Pads shall have a constant natural frequency over the operating load range, and the stiffness shall increase proportionately with load applied. Pads shall be no taller than the shortest horizontal dimension. Where the equipment base does not provide a uniform load surface. steel plates shall be bonded to the top of the pads. Alternately, Model RD Neoprene Mounts, incorporating completely enclosed metal inserts to permit bolting to the supported unit, may be used. B. Type 1,.Iso,lator: 5I8" thick neoprene molded pad, incorporating cross ribbed molding for vibration isolation. C. Type 2 Isolators: Model FDS Free -Standing. Unhoused Laterally Stable Steel Springs ins�rporating leveling bolts and 1/4" thick ribbed noise isolation pads. To assure stability, the -y spfgpg shall have a lateral spring stiffness greater than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness, and shatl bi.ab_s'igned to provide 50% overload capacity. In capacities up to 5,000 lbs., springs shall b&°repl'igeoble. In capacities over 5,000 lbs. springs shall be welded to the top and bottom load pl t� amblies. Q.. T e J3 -gangers: Model SFH Combination Spring and Fiberglass Hangers, incorporating p;o4 169sed molded fiberglass noise and vibration isolation pads, coated with a moisture inap-ervious-elastomeric membrane in series with springs, all encased in welded steel brackets. Springs shall be as specified for Type 2 Isolators, above. Isolators shall be designed for 50% overload capacity. and shall accommodate rod misalignment over a 30 degree arc. Brackets shall be designed to carry 500% overload without failure. E. Type 3 Isolators: Model FLS, Free -Standing Laterally Stable Spring Isolators, similar to Model FDS, but shall incorporate vertical limit stops to assure a constant operating height if the supported weight is removed; and to reduce movement due to wind loads. Limit stops shall be isolated from the housing to prevent short-circuiting. F. Type 4 Bases: No base required. Isolators may be attached directly to the supported equipment. G. Type 5 and Type 6 Bases: Model SFB and SBB Structural Steel Bases, designed and supplied by the isolator manufacturer Bases shall be designed with isolator brackets to reduce the mounting height of the equipment. To assure adequate stiffness, the height of the members shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, or at least 6 inches. Where thinner sections are necessary, due to head room limitations, etc., the section modulus of the members selected shall equal or exceed the section modulus of wide flange steel members whose thickness is 8% of the longest span between isolators. VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 H. Type 7 Bases: Model CIB Reinforced Concrete Inertia Bases, the steel members of which are designed and supplied by the isolator manufacturer. The concrete shall be poured into a welded steel frame, incorporating prelocated equipment anchor bolts, 1/2 inch diameter reinforcing bars on nominal 8 inch centers each way, and recessed isolator mounting brackets to reduce the mounting height of the equipment, but yet remain within the confines of the base. The thickness of the base shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, at least 6 inches, or as indicated on the drawings. Where inertia bases are used to mount pumps, the bases shall be wide enough to support piping elbows. I. Type 8 Bases: Model ASR Isolation Rail System, consisting of two parallel aluminum rail systems with continuous neoprene air and water seal, incorporating steel spring isolators designed for one inch static deflection, all fabricated to be installed over the roof curb system, and provide continuous support for the isolated equipment. J. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Flexible neoprene or canvas connections of approved construction shall be provided in the ductwork adjacent to all air moving units. 2. High velocity ductwork, for a distance of 50 feet from high pressure fans, shall b o olated from the structure by means of Type 2 Hangers described herein. g= K. Flexible Piping Connectors: D� c 1. Piping over one inch diameter and piping three supports away Ym= ro'€gting for reciprocating HVAC equipment shall be isolated from the structure by SFT ofxyibratrn and noise isolators. �? 2. Suspended piping shall be isolated with Type 2 Hangers described heref`i. 3. Floor mounted piping shall be isolated with Type 2 Isolators (spring mounts) described herein. 4- Flexible members shall be incorporated in the piping adjacent to all reciprocating and/or rotating equipment and pumps. Flexible pipe connectors not required at in-line pump installations. 5. See Section 23 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping for pump connector specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, including definitions of critical and noncritical locations, for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units. 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. General_ Apply types of vibration isolation materials and units indicated at locations shown or scheduled Selection is Installer's option where more than one type is indicated VIBRATIONCONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation. B. Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated. C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. D. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible. E. Bond flanges of flexible duct connectors to ducts and housings to provide airtight connections. Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible. 3.04 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK A. Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe installation of other work related to vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration isolation work, and, after completion of other related work (but before equipment startup), shall furnish written report to Contractor listing observed inadequacies for proper operation and performance of vibration isolation work. Report Si covenbut not necessarily be limited to the following: 1..-- �:Egwpment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration isolators. ...e 2.c; Ci ring connections including flexible connections. 3. ,!, iwork Connections including provisions for flexible connections 4. Passage of piping and ductwork which is to be isolated through walls and floors. N B. Do not start up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected in manner acceptable to vibration isolation Installer. END OF SECTION 23 0548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division -23 sections. B. Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following: 1. Painted identification materials 2. Plastic pipe markers 3. Plastic tape 4. Valve tags Q r � C. Identification furnished as part of factory fabricated equipment, is specifie npad of thA equipment assembly in other Division -23 sections. [7-C W tt� o 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE _a M A. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and vOD 9 wglesWf identification devices. — iv 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals. B. Labeling Nomenclature: Submit list indicating system types with appropriate nomenclature to be provided on the pipe labels. Where possible, match to system labels on drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division -23 sections. Where more than one single type is specified for an application, selection is Installers option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. Painted Identification Materials: Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray -can form and grade. 3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, color -coded, plastic -sheet pipe markers, complying with ANSI Al 3.1, 2. Small Pipes: For external diameters not greater than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full -band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: a. Snap -on application of pre -tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. C. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). d. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2". 3. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full -band or narrow strip -type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: a. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). b. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3". c. Strapped -to -pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type. with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands. 4" Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping c -i �syStem in each instance, as selected by Design Professional in cases of variance with t r 1�fjames as shown or specified. o -3 A= 5.e.7 t- uu ws: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally >'wR piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate e LtJ of plastic. D. PLastic Tape: N 1. General: Manufacturer's standard color -coded pressure -sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape; not less than 3 mils thick. a. Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6", 2 112" wide tape for larger pipes. b. Color. Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated. E. Valve Tags: Brass Valve Tags: Provide polished brass valve tags with stamp -engraved piping system abbreviation in 114" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 7/16" high, and with 3/16" hole for fastener. Tag thickness 0.040 inches. a. Provide 2" diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. b. Fill tag engraving with black enamel_ IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2. Plastic Valve Tags: Provide red heavy plastic tag with 7116" white embossed sequenced numbers. 3. Valve Tag Fasteners Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S -hooks or heat sealed braided copper wire of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. Name Plates: General: Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted plastic, brass, or aluminum with stamped, engraved or embossed letters. Lettering: a. Large Equipment 1 112" lettering as appropriate. b. Small Equipment: 314" lettering as appropriate. 3, Attachments: Mounting holes and screws, pressure sensitive adhesive backing, or solid brass chain. 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in HVAC identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of HVAC systems and egq�Ement, O r 1 Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic ni mown Tp specified, provide identification which indicates individual system �qer as well service (as examples, Boiler No. 3, Air Supply No. 1H, Standpipe C) Wo r" PART 3 - EXECUTION i W 301 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION > _ ry A. General Installation Requirements. 1. Coordination, Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish including valve tags, install identification after completion of covering and painting if any Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. B. Ductwork Identification: Access Doors. Provide stenciled or plastic -laminate type signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. C. Piping System Identification: General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: a. Stenciled markers, including color -coded background band or rectangle, and contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2" beyond ends of lettering. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 b. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section. C. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous color -coded painting of piping is provided. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non -concealed locations. a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units, mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. C. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non -accessible enclosures. d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Valve Identification: General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory -fabricated equipment units, and shut-off valves at terminal devices and similar rough -in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. E. Equipment Identification. 1. General: Provide equipment identification for all equipment including air handling units, terminal units, fans, pumps, boilers, heaters, control panels, heat exchangers, condensing units, and chillers -7 2. Labeling: All equipment shall be labeled as per construction document plan marks or as LU �e'signated by Owner. R o i 3.y reside identification by means of nameplates or stenciled painting as appropriate. LL *77 a. c-) For equipment with factory furnished casing, identification shall be by adhesive N fixed name plates. b. Field insulated items, such as heat exchangers may be identified by plastic pipe markers or stenciled lettering_ END OF SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of testing, adjusting and balancing work is indicated by requirements of this section, and also by drawings and schedules, and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems and associated equipment and apparatus of HVAC work. The work consists of setting speed and volume (including pulley changes as required) adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending modifications to work as required by contract documents. B. Component types of testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this section includes the following as applied to HVAC equipment: N 1. Air Systems ca a. Air Handling Unitsn v "� b. Ductwork Systems r .-.r c �-< o 2. Water Systems: Coils —irC� a. b. HVAC Piping SystemsW O Ci C. The Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor shall provide a complete a4id operating HVAC system and shall cooperate with the balancing agency by: ry 1. Installing balancing dampers as required by the Drawings and Specifications and requested by the Testing and Balancing Contractor. 2. Putting complete system into operation during duration of balancing period. 3. Providing up-to-date set of Drawings and advising immediately of any changes made to the system during construction. 4. Providing labor and equipment and cost of performing corrections, such as dampers, belts, etc., as required without undue delay. 5. Providing complete submittal information for all HVAC equipment, complete with pertinent engineering information. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. B. ASHRAE - HVAC Applications Handbook: Chapter 34, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. (Most recent edition). C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tester: A firm with at least 3 years of successful testing, adjusting and balancing experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project, who is not Installer of system to be tested and is otherwise independent of project. B. Test Equipment Criteria: The basic instrumentation requirements and accuracy/calibration required by AABC, National Standards or by NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems. C. All testing and balancing contractors are to be approved by the Design Professional before bidding. The contractors approved to date are: 1. Precision Test and Balance Clive, Iowa (515)288-2332 2. Systems Management and Balancing Waukee, Iowa (515) 987-2825 3. River Place Technologies East Moline, Illinois (309)796-0800 4. Integrity Testing and Balancing Madrid, Iowa (515)250-6055 Omega Test and Balance Adel, Iowa �--`(5-T5) 729-6046 1-05 JOUONVfIONS .. c-� >-( , Db. znotprCSeed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until work has been completed and is r -v- oera!S[9.,�:.€nsure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed. B. l3ii+not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded building materials. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. TAB Agency Qualifications: Submit names and qualifications of company officers and job supervisor. Submit list of proposed test equipment and sample report format indicating all measurements to be taken. These shall be submitted to and reviewed by Design Professional prior to commencing work. B. The test -and -balance report shall be complete with logs, data, and records as required herein. All logs, data, and records shall be typed on white bond paper and bound. The report shall be certified accurate and complete by the balancing agency's certified test -and -balance engineer. C. Three (3) copies of the test -and -balance report are required and shall be submitted to Design Professional. D. The report shall contain the required data in a format selected by Balancing Contractor. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 E. Report shall include the following information: (For all references to "design", specific information from shop drawings shall be incorporated.) Air Moving Equipment. a Location b. Manufacturer and Model C. Supply, return and exhaust, air flow, design and actual d. Outside air flow, design and actual (where applicable) e. Inlet, discharge, and total static pressure, design and actual f. Fan RPM, design and actual g. Static pressure across the coil section with the face and bypass damper in both the face and bypass positions (where face and bypass dampers are provided). 2. V -Belt Drive a. I d entification/location b. Required driven RPM G. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave, diameter and RPM 3. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch b. Duct size and area [> C. Velocity and airflow, design and actual :5 C-7 d. Duct static pressure X3� e. Air temperature and correction factor (if applicable) --tom 4. Air Terminal Unit Data: a. Identification/number and location a to Manufacturer and model Ay c. Size d. Minimum static pressure, design and actual e. Maximum air flows, design and actual f. Minimum air flow, design and actual 5. Central Station Cooling and Heating Coil Data: a. Identification/number b. Location and service C. Air flow, design and actual d. Entering and leaving air DB and WB temperatures, design and actual e. Water flow and pressure drop, design and actual f. Entering and leaving water temperature, design and actual g. Air pressure drop, design and actual h. Differential pressure across balancing valves. 6. Terminal Unit Heating and Cooling Coil Data a. Identification/number b. Manufacturer and model C. Entering and leaving DB temperature, design and actual d. Entering and leaving water temperature, design and actual e. Water flow, design and actual f. Differential pressure across balancing valves. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jibs. and similar purposes. At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed. cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester. Before initiating balancing work, Contractor shall verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following: 1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Correct fan rotation. 7. Volume dampers are in place and open. & Coil fins have been cleaned and combed. 9-._ Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. IV Ainoutlets are installed and connected. 1E1' i dt system leakage has been minimized. E_I yrdronic systems have been flushed, filled, and vented. LU is- erect pump rotation_ 1 z Ff'aper strainer baskets are clean and in place. Slice and balance valves are open. Tent, ad a and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance wi€�;proced"ures outlined in applicable standards. r� C. Coordinate TAB procedures with any phased construction completion requirements for the project- Systems serving completed phases of the project will require TAB for such phases prior to partial final inspections. D, Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for TAB and submission of reports prior to partial final inspections. E Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recommended by applicable standards. Draft report shall be sent to Design Professional for review prior to issuance to Owner F. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 G. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials. H. Prepare a report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced; including, where necessary, modifications which exceed requirements of contract documents for HVAC work. I. The test and balance agency shall perform the following tests and balance the air system in accordance with the following requirements (provide written substantiating data): 1. Test, adjust and record all blower RPM at design requirements. 2. Make pitot tube transverse of main supply ducts and obtain design CFM at all fans and blowers. 3. Test and record all system static pressures, suction and discharge. 4. Test and adjust all systems for design CFM of recirculated air. 5. Test and adjust all systems for design CFM of outside air. 6. Test and record entering and leaving air temperatures (DB and WB); all air units. 7. Adjust all zones to proper design CFM, supply and return. 8. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. 9. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, set adjustments of all controllers to operate as specified, indicated and/or noted. 10. Flow Rate Tolerances: a. Applications which do not require differential pressure control: -10%t"10%. b. Minimum outside air: 0 to +10% CD J. The test and balance agency shall perform the following tests and balance gji�atEdZystem'IP accordance with the following requirements (provide written substantiating dat@j -< W -" f C-) �u 1. Before setting pump capacities, check the following items: C� o a. Automatic fill valve setting and strainer - - b. Expansion tank level%= :;s x C. Cleanliness of system water — d. Make certain all pump strainers are clean '•> e. Check air vents at coils and high points of system Measure circulating pump capacities by differential pressure measurements, amperage and brake horsepower method using the pump manufacturer's capacity curve. Position all automatic valves, hand valves and balancing cocks for full flow through coils, convertors, etc. during pump adjustment. Use only calibrated test gauges for pump adjustment; the use of pressure gauges installed with the system will not be allowed. Adjust triple duty valve as required to provide minimum differential pressure required for most remote automatic flow control valve. 3. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. 4. Balance system with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. For coils with 3 -way control valves, set bypass balancing cock to provide total flow when control valve is in 100% bypass position equal to total flow when control valve is 100% open to coil. 5. Determine minimum differential pressure setpoint required to maintain flow at all water coils. Coordinate final setting with Temperature Control Contractor, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-5 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 Coordinate the setting of controls to maintain coil water inlet design temperatures, with coil valves positioned for full flow through coil during adjustment. Balance individual water coils at full flow to maintain temperature differential specified. Mark settings of all balancing cocks at required positions. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. For automatic flow control valves: Record differential pressure and verify within operating range of valve. 8. Flow Rate Tolerances: a. Heating water pumps and coils: -10% to +10% K. Where balancer has a question regarding appropriate system configuration for balancing, balancer should contact Design Professional for clarification. ENO OF SECTION 23 0593 cv TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-6 o r� LL. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-6 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 0700 - HVAC INSULATION PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install insulation to all hot and cold surfaces of piping, ductwork, tanks, fittings and other surfaces as required by the drawings and this section. B. Insulation shall include insulating materials, jackets, adhesive, mastic coatings, tie wire and other materials as required to complete the insulating work. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Conditioned Space: an area inside the building which is heated and/or cooled. B. Tempered Space: an area inside the building which is not directly heated or cooled, but is adjacent to a heated or cooled space with no insulation separating the two spaces (29).1 ceiling plenums). C'3 _ C. Untempered Space: an area inside the building which is not conditioned apse naYetemp (e.g., attic spaces). �'< w Z- n O D. Exterior: An area outside the building (e.g., roof mounted items). =fir— -,0 M 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE " w A. NFPA Compliance: Insulating materials, jackets, mastics, etc., shall meet flame °spread and smoke developed ratings in accordance with NFPA-90A. Flame spread rating of not more than 25, smoke developed rating of not more than 50 as tested by ANSI/ASTM E84 (UL 723) (NFPA 255) method. All accessory items such as PVC jacketing and fittings, adhesive, mastic, cement tape and cloth shall have the same component ratings as specified above. B. Installation of insulation materials shall be in accordance to the latest edition of MICA/NIAC National Commercial & Industrial Standards for the appropriate material application. C. NFPA Compliance: Fire Barrier Duct Wrap systems shall meet requirements of NFPA 96 for grease duct application. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of HVAC insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturers product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each HVAC system requiring insulation. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of HVAC insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. C. Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. HVAC INSULATION 230700-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.06 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and HVAC damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulating Materials 1, Owens/Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2. Armacell. 3. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 4. CertainTeed Corp. 5. Knauf Fiber Glass 6. John's -Manville Corp. 7. Aeroflex B. Mastics and adhesives as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.02 PIPE INSULATION A. Type 'A': Preformed sectional heavy density fiberglass insulation and factory applied vapor barrier, all service jacket with pressure sensitive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Suitable for operating temperatures from 0 to +850 deg. F. Thermal conductivity shall be no greater than 0.23 Btu-in/hr-sq.ft.-deg F @ 75 deg. F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance 6'1402 perms. Equal to Owens Corning 25 ASJ/SSL. ?. E,7_ 4iere insulation is exposed to weather outdoors it shall be covered with an aluminum or UJ stainless steel weatherproof jacket 0.016" thick and sealed. a va_ 2M >4Aere insulation is exposed in indoor occupied space, it shall be covered with 30 mil y� jacket equal to Johns Manville Zeston, c 1 C) B. -*e 'B`. --Flexible elastomeric extruded pipe covering, 6 pound density, 0.27 K factor, water vapor permeance of 0.20 perms. Suitable for temperature from -40 deg. F to +220 deg. F. Equal toArmacell, AP Armaflex, joints sealed with adhesive as recommended by insulation manufacturer. Exposed outdoor insulation to be finished with two coats of ArmacellArmaflex finish. C. Type 'C': Preformed rigid hydrous calcium silicate insulation. Mechanically fastened by wiring in place using 16 gauge wire on 9' centers and covered with suitable jacketing for indoor or outdoor application. Suitable for operating temperatures +200 to +1200 deg. F Thermal conductivity shall be no greater than 0.42 Btu-in/hr-sq.ft.-deg F @ 200 deg. F mean temperature. Equal to Owens-Corning Kaylo asbestos -free pipe insulation. 2.03 FITTING INSULATION A. Type 'AT: Fittings: Insulate with mitered segments of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, or with pre -molded fiberglass wired in place and covered with all -service jacket or low smoke PVC fitting covers. Valve bodies, strainer bodies, flanges, etc.: insulate with single or multiple layers of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering; wired in place and covered with all -service jacket. HVAC INSULATION 230700-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. Type '61': Fittings: Insulate fittings, valve bodies, strainer bodies, etc., with mitercut pipe insulation or sheet insulation of same material as pipe covering. C. Type 'C1': Fittings: Insulate fittings with mitered segments of pipe insulation of same material as pipe covering, wired in place and finished with a 114" layer of insulating cement. Valve bodies, strainer bodies, flanges, etc.. insulate with single or multiple layers of same insulating material as pipe covering, wired in place and finished with 114" layer of insulating cement. 2.04 DUCT INSULATION A. Duct Covering: Certain -Teed Ultralite Duct Wrap with Foil Scrim Kraft vapor barrier facing, one (1) pound per cubic foot density. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.04 GENERAL A. Use only experienced applicators regularly engaged in the trade. Rough work will be rejected. Application details shall be in accordance with the insulating materials supplier's recommendations except where a higher standard is specified. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, cuts and surfaces of insulation. B. All piping shall be insulated unless specifically noted otherwise. Piping not noted in the table below shall be insulated with thicknesses matching ASHRAE 90.1 based on the fluid temperatures o 3.02 PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION =L n -` `n Service Type Insulation and Thick6R3t` ca o r..._ o Above Ground Piping �}Tt M Hot water heating lines, Type A and At, supply and return_ 1-1/4" and smaller- 1-1/2"Rick — 1-1/2" and larger - 2" thick Refrigeration piping (except liquid lines) Condensate drain lines Type C and Cl: 1-114" and smaller– 2-1/2" thick 1-112" to 6" – 3" thick 8" and larger – 4" thick Type B and 61: 3/4" and smaller – 3/4" thick 1" to 2" – V thick 2-1/2" and larger – 1-1/2" thick Type A and Al: V thick for all pipe sizes. For piping exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures, increase thickness by 1/2" 3.03 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Do not insulate the following: 1 Valve bonnets 2. Unions in hot piping HVAC INSULATION 230700-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3. TC valve operators 4. Hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinet. 5. Cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan. 6. Heating piping beyond control valve, located within heated space, 7. Condensate piping between steam trap and union. 8. Preinsulated expansion joints B. Inspect all piping and equipment before applying insulation to insure the installing contractor has completed all leak tests, and that all surfaces are clean, dry and ready for application of insulation. C. Covering for "cold" pipes shall pass unbroken through hanger clevises, sleeves, etc. All details of covering for cold surfaces shall be such that continuous covering with unbroken vapor barrier and uncompressed insulation is provided as required to prevent condensation, The same covering and hanging detail shall be used for pipes connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressures to avoid metal contact between pipes and hangers. D. Insulation at removable heads, manhole covers, strainer plugs, and other access points shall be fabricated in such a manner that it can be readily removed without damage to the insulation. Removable insulation shall have a vapor proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. 3.04 DUCT INSULATION APPLICATION A. Unless noted otherwise, all ductwork and accessories shall be either lined or covered as scheduled on plans. If type or thickness is not indicated, it shall be 1-112" covering. 3.05 DUCT COVERING INSTALLATION A. Inspect all ductwork and equipment before applying insulation to insure the installing contractor has completed all leak tests, and that all surfaces are clean, dry and ready for application of insulation. B. Covering shall be cut slightly longer than circumference of duct to insure full thickness at corners. Allcipsulation. shall be adhered with edges tightly banded, and shall be adhered to duct with fire reotant. adhesive. Adhesive shall be applied so that insulation conforms to duct surfaces t "ti untfgrml €rl d firmly. cr= LLJ C Inditia�e the adhesive, the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of all ducts 18,mr wjdAay means of grip nails and speed clips. The protruding ends of the pins shall be cut off*ushr2AET the speed clips have been applied. The vapor barrier facing shall be thoroughly U seed vr&P-Z vapor barrier mastic and tape where the pins have pierced through. D. Inst tion for "cold" ducts and accessories shall pass unbroken through hangers, sleeves, fire dampers, flexible connectors, reheat coils, etc, as required to prevent condensation. All details of covering for cold surfaces shall be such that continuous covering with unbroken vapor barrier and uncompressed insulation is provided. The same covering and hanging detail shall be used for ducts connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressures to avoid metal contact between ducts and hangers. Insulation Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with equipment suppliers as required to ensure continuous covering of unlined equipment components, i.e. VAV terminal unit supply collar, fan coil unit discharge, etc. E. Insulation at all access points shall be fabricated in such a manner that it can be readily removed without damage to the insulation. Removable insulation shall have a vapor proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. END OF SECTION 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION 230700-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 0900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A Contractor shall furnish and install DDC system including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation as called for in this specification. New DDC system shall be an extension of existing Schneider Electric I/A Series BACnet DDC system. B. Upon completion of system extension, the DDC system shall be a complete system designed for use on Intranets and the Internet. This functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. Primary controllers located in equipment rooms and shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT infrastructure existing in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the owner's environment without disruption to any of the other activities taking place on that LAN. O C. The DDC system work shall result in a complete, fully functional, commissionecEDDC stem that meets the intent of this specification and the sequences of operation. This wort sall ircude, not be limited to the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, re software- censes, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tFin i�allati;`n labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals, tes verificatigrvm training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handlingy-,mu�lstrati r supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cuttikr ndCsatchl warranties and services. D. The control system shall be installed by competent control mechanics and electricians employed by DDC Contractor. DDC Contractor is responsible for all work performed by their subcontractors. E, Manage and coordinate the DDC system work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project schedules. Coordinate cooperatively with the associated work of other trades so as to assist the progress and not impede or delay the work of associated trades. F. Provide support and coordination with Testing and Balancing (TAB) and Validation Contractors for all interfaces between controls and TAB/validation scope of work. Provide all devices, such as portable operator terminals for TAB use in completing TAB procedures. G. All interlocking, wiring and installation of control devices associated with the equipment listed below shall be provided under this contract. When the DDC system is fully installed and operational, DDC Contractor and representatives of Owner will review and check out the system. At that time, DDC Contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system and prove that it complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications. H. All work performed under this section of the specifications will comply with all codes, laws and governing bodies. If the drawings and/or specifications are in conflict with governing codes, Contractor shall submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code restrictions. If this specification and associated drawings exceed governing code requirements, the specification will govern. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary construction permits and licenses. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.03 WORK BY OTHERS A. The following incidental work shall be furnished by the designated under the supervision of the DDC Contractor. 1. HVAC Piping Contractor Shall a. Install automatic valves that are specified to be supplied by DDC Contractor. b. Install all pipe mounted DDC items including wells, paddle switches and differential pressure switches, including their isolation valves and associated tubing. 2. Sheet Metal Contractor Shall: a. Install all automatic dampers furnished by DDC Contractor. b. Provide necessary blank -off plates (sating) required to install dampers that are smaller than the duct size. C. Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors. d. Provide access door or other approved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment. e. Install airflow measuring stations. 3. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor: a. The installation of all line voltage power wiring by Division 26. 1.04 ELECTRIC WIRING A. All electric wiring and wiring connections required for the installation of the DDC system, as herein specified, shall be provided by DDC Contractor unless specifically shown on the electrical drawings or called for in the electrical specifications. Line voltage wiring which is the responsibility of DDC Contractor includes but is not limited to: power for unit mounted controllers and line voltage control devices, freezestat wiring, line voltage thermostats, and motor starter interlocks as required by sequence of operation. B. All control wiring in finished spaces is to be routed concealed in walls or above ceilings unless spFifically noted otherwise. Concealed control wiring. where accessible, may be installed without conduit. All concealed control wiring which is not accessible shall be routed in blue corrduit.0^,i��trol wiring in unfinished spaces may be routed exposed but shall be in blue conduit. Uj WLmg co -mutts, plenums and other air handling spaces shall be specifically listed for the use. Installat hall comply with all code requirements. C"2 >-C-,)Com- Wring glaaJlEomply with the requirements of local and national electrical codes. 4 1.059 QUAL-iFICATE@NS `o N A. All bidders must be DDC Contractors in the business of installing direct digital control building automation systems for a minimum of 3 years. B. The DDC system shall be provided by a single source manufacturer offering a full line of controls. This system shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by the manufacturers local factory owned branch office or the manufacturers locally authorized representative. DDC Contractor shall have factory trained technicians to provide instruction, routine maintenance.. and emergency service within 48 hours upon receipt of request. C. Control system components shall be the manufacturer's latest standard of design at the time of bid and in conformance with the following applicable standards for products specified: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, IEEE, INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA. 4. Underwriters Laboratory, UL (UL 916). 5. FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 156. 6. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. T. Local building codes. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted for approval: DDC Contractor shall submit schematic drawings for the entire control system for review and approval before work shall begin. Included in the submittal drawings shall be a one page diagram depicting the system architecture complete with a communications riser, Drawings shall include point-to-point wiring diagrams and must show all temperature controls, start -stop arrangement for each piece of equipment, equipment interlocks, wiring terminal numbers and any special connection information required for properly controlling the HVAC equipment. At a minimum, submit the following: a. DDC network architecture diagrams including all controllers and interconnections. b. Schematics, sequences and flow diagrams. C. Points schedule for each real point in the DDC, including: tag, point type, system name and display units. d. Detailed bill of material list for each controller, identifying quantity, part number, description, and optional features. e. Control damper schedule including a separate line for each damr' and a column for each of the damper attributes, including: code nuEper, fa i ositicn, damper type, damper operator, blade type, bearing type, --IR ct SM damper size, mounting, and actuator type. 'y "t f. Control valve schedules including a separate line for each valve9inff a �Aumncr each of the valve attributes: code number, configuration, fail 1ti pipe sipen valve size, body configuration, close off pressure, capacity, vale rQV,CUa CV, design pressure, actual pressure, and actuator type v y 7 2 The submittals shall include manufacturers catalog data describing eacF3 item of control equipment or component provided and installed for the project. o u 3. The submittals shall include a specification compliance analysis for review and approval before work shall begin. The compliance document shall address each paragraph of the specification by indicating COMPLY, EXCEED, or EXCEPTION. Do not indicate COMPLY unless the proposed system exactly meets the paragraph requirement, If EXCEED or EXCEPTION is indicated, then provide a clear and concise explanation of the variance from the specifications and the net effect this would have on the specified system performance. 1.07 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS A. Prior to delivery of software, the Owner and the party providing the software will enter Into a software license agreement with provisions for the following: 1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications. 2. Limiting copying. 3. Preserving confidentiality. 4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party. 1.08 PRE-PROGRAMMNG DESIGN REVIEW MEETING A Prior to starting programming, a design review meeting shall be scheduled with the Design Professional. The agenda of this meeting will be to discuss the design intent, review all systems requiring control, and answer any questions the Temperature Controls Contractor may have. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows Schneider Electric I/A Series – The Baker Group B. All control equipment shall be the product of one manufacturer. 2.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE A. The complete electronic DDC system shall be comprised of the following levels of control devices. 1. System Workstation includes the hardware and software necessary for an operator to interface with the control system. 2. Network Controller(s) are used for high level global programming functions and system networking. 3. Local Controllers are for control of large primary HVAC systems such as air handling systems, heating hot water systems and chilled water systems. 4. Zone Controllers are dedicated for specific equipment such as VAV boxes, fan coils, and heat pump controls. 5. Network thermostats dedicated to specific equipment such as VAV boxes, fan coils, or heat pumps, etc. 6. Field devices include but are not limited to electronic sensors, valves, actuators, switches, relays, and transducers. 2.03 OPERATOR INTERFACE A. General: The DDC operator interface shall be user friendly, readily understood and shall make maximum use of colors, graphics, icons, embedded images, animation. text based information and data visualization techniques to enhance and simplify the use and understanding of the DDC system by authorized users at the Ol. 1.— User access to the DDC system shall be protected by a flexible and Owner redefinable software -based password access protection. Password protection shall be multi-level man, partitionable to accommodate the varied access requirements of the different user c Jp ,ups. Provide the means to define unique access privileges for each individual LLQ btltl�orized user. Also provide the means to establish general password groups to which M �rtindividual will then be assigned. Once assigned to the group each individual will �sRme all the capabilities and restrictions of that group. Provide the means to on-line LL nage password access control under the control of a master password. 2.? Tt 8operator interface shall be able to combine data from any and all of the system ® components in a single browser window This shall include historical data stored on a h server. 3. The operator interface shall incorporate comprehensive support for functions including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: a. User access for selective information retrieval and control command execution b Monitoring and reporting c Alarm, non -normal, and return to normal condition annunciation d. Selective operator override and other control actions e. Information archiving, manipulation, formatting. display and reporting f. DDC internal performance supervision and diagnostics g. On-line access to user HELP menus h. On-line access to current DDC as -built records and documentation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 I. Means for the controlled re -programming, re -configuration of DDC operation and for the manipulation of DDC database information in compliance with the prevailing codes, approvals and regulations for individual DDC applications. 4. Provide DDC reports and displays making maximized use of simple English language descriptions and readily understood acronyms, abbreviations and the like to assist user understanding and interpretation. All text naming conventions shall be consistent in their use and application throughout the DEC. B. Web Interface 1. The system shall be capable of supporting clients using a standard web browser such as Internet Explorer TM. Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) are not acceptable. 2. The web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the graphical user interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted. 3. The web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions: a. User log -on identification and password shall be required. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be Implemented. b. Graphical screens developed for the operator interface shall bejhe same screens used for the web browser client. Any animated, graphSl objects supported by the OI shall be supported by the web browser inMlace. -Z C. HTML programming shall not be required to display system ges 6r -data on � web page. HTML editing of the web page shall be allowed if_t�us�rodesirs,a specific look or format. �n o l d. Real-time values displayed on a web page shall update augifmtical,ly witMu rn requiring a manual "refresh" of the web page. = e. Users shall have administrator -defined access privileges. o� c,? f. The system shall provide the capability to specify a users hor-me page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. FronR-the home page links to other views, or pages in the system, shall be possible if allowed by the system administrator. g. Graphic screens on the web browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link. C. Alarms: Alarms shall be routed directly from network controllers to PCs and servers. It shall be possible for specific alarms from specific points to be routed to specific PCs and servers. The alarm management portion of the OI software shall, at the minimum, provide the following functions: 1. Log date and time of alarm occurrence. 2. Generate a "pop-up" window, with audible alarm, informing a user that an alarm has been received. 3, Allow a user, with the appropriate security level, to acknowledge, temporarily silence, or discard an alarm. 4. Provide an audit trail on hard drive for alarms by recording user acknowledgment, deletion, or disabling of an alarm. The audit trail shall include the name of the user, the alarm, the action taken on the alarm, and a time/date stamp. 5, Provide the ability to direct alarms to an e-mail address or alpha -numeric pager This must be provided in addition to the pop up window described above. Systems which use e-mail and pagers as the exclusive means of annunciating alarms are not acceptable. 6. Any attribute of any object in the system may be designated to report an alarm. 7. The DDC shall annunciate diagnostic alarms, at a minimum, indicating system failures and non -normal operating conditions INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-5 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D. Reports: Reports shall be generated and directed to one or more of the following: Operator interface displays, printers, or archive at the user's option. As a minimum, the system shall provide the following reports: 1. All points in the DDC system. 2. All points in each DDC application. 3. All points currently in alarm in a DDC application. 4. All points locked out in a DDC application_ 5. All DDC schedules. 6. All user defined and adjustable variables, schedules, interlocks, etc. 7. DDC diagnostic and system status reports. E. Dynamic Color Graphics: The system shall allow for the creation of user defined, color graphic displays for the viewing of HVAC and electrical systems, or building schematics. These graphics shall contain point information from the database including any attributes associated with the point (engineering units, etc.). In addition operators shall be able to command equipment or change setpoints from a graphic through the use of the mouse. Requirements of the color graphic subsystem include: 1. An unlimited number of graphic displays shall be able to be generated and executed. 2. Graphics shall be based on Scalar Vector Graphic (SVG) technology. 3. Values of real time attributes displayed on the graphics shall be dynamic and updated on the displays. 4. The graphic displays shall be able to display and provide animation based on real-time DDC data that is acquired, derived, or entered. 5. The user shall be able to change values (setpoints) and states in system controlled equipment directly from the graphic display. 6. Provide a graphic editing tool that allows for the creation and editing of graphic files. It shall be possible to edit the graphics directly while they are on line, or at an off line location for later downloading to the controller. 7. DDC system shall be provided with a complete user expandable symbol library containing all of the basic symbols used to represent components of a typical DDC system. Implementing these symbols in a graphic shall involve dragging and dropping them from the library to the graphic 8. The following list of graphics, at a minimum, shall be provided: a. Floor plans showing room numbers and temperature sensor locations are to be provided that will alarm when a room is off their respective zone temperature and Cl) set point. The floor plans shall also be linked to a screen to show the equipment (D serving that particular room/zone. n J Provide a graphic screen for each type of equipment connected to the DDC C.) F_ system. At a minimum. the following shall be visible from the OI: a >_Z:, 1) VAV Boxes - discharge air temperature, zone temperature, set -point, -- – a.– I— < airflow, damper position, reheat valve position LJ„_ r 2) RTU - supply/return fans on/off/speed/status, dirty filter switch, outdoor s air temperature, mixed air temperature, return air temperature, discharge N air temperature, low limit alarm. heat/cool stage, damper positions, static pressure F. Schedules: It shall be possible to configure and download from the operator interface schedules for any of the controllers on the network. The system shall provide multiple schedule input forms for automatic DDC time -of -day scheduling and override scheduling of DDC operations. At a minimum, the following spreadsheet types shall be accommodated: a. Weekly schedules. b. Temporary override schedules. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-6 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 c. Special "Only active if today is a holiday" schedules. d. Monthly schedules. 2. Schedules shall be provided for each system or sub -system in the DDC system. Each schedule shall include all command able points residing within the system. Each point may have a unique schedule of operation relative to the system use schedule, allowing for sequential starting and control of equipment within the system. Scheduling and rescheduling of points shall be accomplished easily via the system schedule spreadsheets, 3. Monthly calendars for a 12 -month period shall be provided that allow for simplified scheduling of holidays and special days in advance. Holidays and special days shall be user -selected with the pointing device or keyboard, and shall automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the weekly schedules. G. Historical trending and data collection: Trend and store point history data for all DDC points and values as selected by the user. The trend data shall be stored in a manner that allows custom queries and reports using industry -standard software tools. At a minimum, provide the capability to perform statistical functions on the historical database. 1. Average. 2. Arithmetic mean. 3. Maxim umlminimum values. 4. Range—difference between 6. Standard deviation. 6. Sum of all values. 7. Variance. 2.04 NETWORK CONTROLLERS minimum and maximum values. A. General: The network controller shall be a microprocessor based, multi -tasking controller that provides advanced system programming, uplink and downlink polling and other supervisory functions for zone and local controllers. real time system communications, Each network controller shall be classified as a BACnet compatible device, supporting the BACnet Building Controller (B -BC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B-AAC are not acceptable. i shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B -BC). C, Hardware Specifications 1. Operating Environment: The controller shall be capable of operating in an environment of 32 to 122 deg F and 10 to 90% relative humidity non -condensing. 2. Memory: Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for the controller, shall be stored In non-volatile, FLASH memory. Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory. 3 Communication Ports. Each network controller shall provide communication to both the Workstation(s) and the field buses. An on -board Ethernet port shall be provided. 4. Stand -Alone: The controller shall be a true no -host system that does not require a PC or "Host" computer to perform any control functions or communications. 5. Modular Expandability: The system shall employ a modular 110 design to allow easy expansion. Input and output capacity is to be provided through plug-in modules of various. It shall be possible to combine 110 modules as desired to meet the 110 requirements for individual control applications. 6. Real Time Clock (RTC): Each network controller shall include a battery -backed, real time clock, accurate to 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap years. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-7 N d n o rn A. General: The network controller shall be a microprocessor based, multi -tasking controller that provides advanced system programming, uplink and downlink polling and other supervisory functions for zone and local controllers. real time system communications, Each network controller shall be classified as a BACnet compatible device, supporting the BACnet Building Controller (B -BC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B-AAC are not acceptable. i shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B -BC). C, Hardware Specifications 1. Operating Environment: The controller shall be capable of operating in an environment of 32 to 122 deg F and 10 to 90% relative humidity non -condensing. 2. Memory: Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for the controller, shall be stored In non-volatile, FLASH memory. Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory. 3 Communication Ports. Each network controller shall provide communication to both the Workstation(s) and the field buses. An on -board Ethernet port shall be provided. 4. Stand -Alone: The controller shall be a true no -host system that does not require a PC or "Host" computer to perform any control functions or communications. 5. Modular Expandability: The system shall employ a modular 110 design to allow easy expansion. Input and output capacity is to be provided through plug-in modules of various. It shall be possible to combine 110 modules as desired to meet the 110 requirements for individual control applications. 6. Real Time Clock (RTC): Each network controller shall include a battery -backed, real time clock, accurate to 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap years. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-7 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 7. Power Supply: The power supply for the network controller shall be auto sensing, 120- 220VAC, 60 Hz power, with a tolerance of +/- 20%. Line voltage below the operating range of the system shall be considered outages. The controller shall contain over voltage surge protection, and require no additional AC power signal conditioning. a. Automatic Restart After Power Failure: Upon restoration of power after an outage, the network controller shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored functions, resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start-up strategies as required. b. Battery backup: The network controller shall include an on -board battery to back up the controller's RAM memory. The battery shall have a shelf life of over 5 years, and provide accumulated backup of all RAM and clock functions for at least 3 years. In the case of a power failure, the network controller shall first try to restart from the RAM memory. If that memory is corrupted or unusable, then the network controller shall restart itself from its application program stored in its FLASH memory. 8. Field communication ports shall be individually electrically isolated to protect against transients, spikes, and power surges. The ports shall be optically isolated from each other, the controller circuit board and from power wiring. Optical isolation shall be provided either as an integral component to the controller or provided as a separate interface device between the controller and field wiring. 9. Upgrades: Include all future controller firmware at no additional cost to the system owner for a 3 year period after system acceptance. 10. Failure of any system controller shall be audibly and visually annunciated on a system workstation. D, Network Controller Software 1. General: The network controller shall contain FLASH memory to store both the resident operating system and the application software. There will be no restrictions placed on the type of application programs in the system. Each network controller shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of any other program. Each program shall have the full access of all N I/O facilities of the processor. This execution of control function shall not be interrupted d.ue to normal user communications including interrogation, program entry, printout of the "rrag m for storage, g ., e, etc. user Programming Language: The application software shall be user programmable. �1 is includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control algorithms, parameters, and d� �;s�etpoints. The source program shall be English language -based and programmable by �t user. The language shall be structured to allow for the easy configuration of control LL �U grams, schedules, alarms, reports, telecommunications, local displays, mathematical saticulations, passwords. and histories. The language shall be self -documenting. Users shall be able to place comments anywhere in the body of a program. Program listings shall be configurable by the user in logical groupings. Controllers that use a "canned" program method will not be accepted. 3. Programming Functions. The software blocks shall provide all the necessary mathematics, logic, utility, and control functions necessary for proper sequence of control. These functions shall be contained in the network controller operating system to be available in any combination for field programming the unit through RAM memory. a. Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID) b. Self tuning PID C. Two position control d. Digital filter e. Ratio calculator f. Equipment cycling protection INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-8 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE 414006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1. Energy Management Applications: As a minimum, the network controller shall have the ability to, but not be limited to, perform energy management strategies such as: a. Time or event based scheduling b. Calendar/holiday based scheduling C. Temporary schedule overrides d. Adaptive optimum start/stop e. Chiller and boiler reset/optimization f. Demand limiting/load shedding g. Enthalpy switchover (economizer) In. Temperature compensated duty cycling CFM tracking j. Tenant billing k. Hot water/outdoor air/chilled water/condenser water reset I. Run time totalization M. Alarm detection and dial out o n. Night setback r o. Historical trending �n ,.`,+ 5. Passwords: The access software shall provide at least 5 levels of pas Swocds. -Bach I shall be user definable. n --e, w I 6. Help Menu: On-line location sensitive help shall be provided for -et c menu iterrtr� describing the consequences of making the highlighted menu selection:"-," 7. Login: A user definable login message shall be displayed every timefvortation,s connected to a system controller, " 8. Alarms: The network controller shall be capable of comparing ahalog a7d digital readings to predetermined high and low limits and annunciate each time a value enters or returns from an alarm condition. Unique high and low limits shall be supplied for each analog point in the network. The network shall be capable of suppressing selected alarm reporting when the primary equipment from which the alarm point is based is in the inactive state The alarm features of the system controller software shall, as a minimum, provide the following: a. Digital, analog, and hi/lo settings and deadband b. Sliding alarm limits C. Conditional alarming d. Alarm inhibiting through feedback loop e. Fluttering alarm suppression f. Separate tailored alarm messages of 70 characters each g. Auto dial of any alarm condition to a minimum of 25 telephone numbers 9. On -Line Testing: The network shall have the capability to allow the operator to design, test, and implement desired control strategies on-line. 10. Communication Diagnostics: The network controller software shall be capable of self - diagnosing failure automatically without necessary query by the operator. In the event of communications failure or limited power failure, the network shall be capable of both notifying a local operator of the specific occurrence, as well as communicating to a remote operator, either by the internet or auto dialing the condition. In addition to automatic self -diagnostics, each network controller shall maintain communications statistics on zone and local controller communications. These statistics shall tabulate total communications attempted versus successful and unsuccessful communications by unit number. An option shall exist to reset communications statistics to zero (0) at any time. 11. Trending: Each network controller shall have the capability to simultaneously trend a minimum of 60 combined analog and digital points. Adjustable sampling intervals for each trend from 60 seconds to 10 days shall be possible. Each trend shall be capable of being automatically started or stopped, based on time of day, externally sensed points, alarms, or a calculated value. Upload of trend data to the system workstation shall be automatically performed at any time during the sampling period. The uploaded trend data shall be fully compatible with Microsoft Excel. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-9 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.05 LOCAL CONTROLLERS A. General: Each HVAC local controller shall be a stand-alone DDC controller. The local controllers shall be a local control loop microprocessor -based controller installed at each HVAC system; i.e., air handling unit, heating boiler. Each controller shall be fully programmable, contain its own control programs and will continue to operate in the event of a failure or communication loss to its associated network controller. Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for the controller, shall be stored in non-volatile, FLASH memory. Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory. All controllers with volatile memory shall have a battery for 72 hour database backup. Each controller shall be addressable by a workstation or a portable service tool. Each local controller provided must be a BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Application Specific Controller (B -ASC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B -SA are not acceptable. Local controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Specific Controllers (B -ASC). C. Hardware Specifications 1. Scan: Controller shall continuously scan and maintain the most recent data in RAM for retrieval by a remote workstation and by the local controller software programs. 2. Isolation: Control, communication, and power circuits for each controller shall be individually electrically isolated to protect against transients, spikes, and power surges. 3. Database: All field control databases shall be entered, changed or downloaded to the local controllers via a portable service tool or system workstation 4. Local Display: The controller shall have a local display and keypad that allows the user to view and change setpoints directly at the controller. 5. Auto -Calibration: All inputs shall feature an auto -calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors_ 6 Input/Output Modules: Provide the following input/output capabilities: a. Universal inputs which can accept industry standard analog signals (4-20 Ma, 0-5 VDC, etc.) and binary contact closures. c� b5-% Digital outputs may be latched or momentary contact type. Analog outputs shall have a 1 % resolution over total output span of 100°/x. 7.r=x-pandability: For larger controller (16 base inputs and up), provide input and output a _Li*ansion through the use of plug-in modules. At least two 110 modules must be capable © t-tbeing added to the base local controller. C�Aaomatic Restart After Power Failure. Upon restoration of power after an outage, the p '? �Srtroller shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored s fCVctions; resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and c mplement special start-up strategies as required_ 9 ' Real Time Clock (RTC). All local controllers shall have a real time clock in either hardware or software. The accuracy shall be within 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following information: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. Each local controller shall receive a signal, every hour. over the network from the NRC, which synchronizes all local controllers' real time clocks D. Local Controller Software: Provide complete controller software to execute all HVAC system local loop controls functions. Control Parameters: The software blocks in the local controller shall produce all of the necessary reverse acting and/or direct acting PI signals as required by the control sequence- The proportional and integral values which make up the PI output value shall be readable and modifiable. at the system workstation or the portable service tool to facilitate tuning of control loops. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-10 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2. Networking: Each input, output, or calculation result shall be capable of being assigned to the system controller for system networking. The local controller shall also provide the ability to download and upload configuration data, both locally at the controller and via the DDC communications network. 3. Programming Functions: Provide the following standard DDC loop programming functions: a. Control block programming b. PI or PID control 22 G. Serial load staging d. Binary load staging 7 e. Analog load staging cl w �• f. Master-submaster routines C-) o g. Anti -windup for integrated loops �r 2.06 ZONE CONTROLLERS A. General: Each HVAC zone controller shall be a stand-alone DDC controller. The contrgller shall include all hardware and software required for communications with the system controller. Unless noted otherwise, an individual zone controller shall be dedicated for each zone terminal device. B. Each local controller provided must be a BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Advanced Application Specific Controller (B -ASC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B- SA are not acceptable. Local controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Specific Controllers (B -ASC). C. Programs: The control program shall reside in the zone controller The application program shall be maintained in ROM. The default database, ie. setpoints and configuration information, shall be stored in EEPROM. Controllers requiring local setting of potentiometers or dip switches are not acceptable. D. Stand -Alone: Controllers requiring the application or database to be downloaded from a host or share processing with a "master controller" shall not be acceptable. After a power failure the zone controller must run the control application using the current setpoints and configuration. E. Communications. Communication to the system controller shall be 1200 -baud asynchronous. F. InpuVOutput: Each controller shall have a minimum of 8 inputs. Each input shall be usable as a discrete or 0-5 volt analog or digital input. Inputs shall be individually electrically isolated from other inputs, outputs, communications, and power. All inputs shall feature an auto -calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors. G. Each controller shall have a minimum of six digital outputs. Outputs shall be individually electrically isolated from the other outputs, inputs, communications and power. Controller shall be available with a minimum of two (2) analog outputs. H. Connections: All electrical connections shall be made to the combination terminal strip and base assembly. To insure long term reliability, all electrical terminations shall be screw type. L The logic card, containing all active electrical components, shall be easily installable and removable from the wiring base, without the use of tools or the removal of any electrical wiring. Products that require disconnection of wiring from logic card before removal will be required to supply and install a quick disconnect type inter -connection. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-11 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.07 FIELD DEVICES A. Temperature Sensors: All temperature devices shall use precision thermistors accurate to +/- 1 degree F over a range of -30 to 230 degrees F. Space temperature sensors shall be accurate to +/- 1 degree F over a range of 40 to 100 degrees F. 1. Standard space sensors shall be available in an off white enclosure for mounting on a standard electrical box. Space sensor shall have a portable service tool jack. a. The sensor housing shall feature both a mechanism for adjusting the space temperature setpoint, as well as a push button for selecting after hours operation. b. The sensor shall incorporate either an LED or LCD display for viewing the space temperature; setpoint and other operator selectable parameters. Using built in buttons. operators shall be able to adjust setpoints directly from the sensor. 2. Duct temperature sensors shall incorporate a thermistor bead embedded at the tip of a stainless steel tube. Probe style duct sensors are useable in air handling applications where the coil or duct area is less than 14 square feet. Averaging sensors shall be employed in ducts which are larger than 14 square feet. 3. Immersion sensors shall be employed for measurement of temperature in all chilled and hot water applications as well as refrigerant applications. Thermal wells shall be brass or stainless steel for non -corrosive fluids below 250 degrees F and 300 series stainless steel for all other applications. 4 Freezestat: Duct temperature sensor as described above with appropriate temperature range for the service 5. A pneumatic signal shall not be allowed for sensing temperature unless otherwise specified. B. Humidity Sensors: Humidity sensors shall be of the solid-state type using a hydroscopic polymer or thin film capacitive sensing element. The sensor shall vary the output voltage with a change in relative humidity. Sensors shall be available for room, outside air or duct mounting, with a minimum range of 0%- 100%+/- 3%. C. Differential Pressure Sensor: Differential pressure sensor shall be temperature compensated and shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. Sensing range shall be suitable for the application with accuracy of +/- 2% of range and non -repeatability of +/- 0.05% of rfte. Sensor shall be capable of withstanding up to 150% of rated pressure without damage. `-" 1: -, :''pressure measurements in the range of 0 to 10" water column will be accurate to +/- LLI (1- L- using a solid-state sensing element. 2=> C-[�fferential pressure measurements of liquids or gases shall be accurate to +/- 0.5% of �mge. The housing shall be Nema 4 rated. �` <r ' rer t' I nsors_ Current status switches shall be used to monitor fans, pumps, motors and gitctrical-loads_ Current switches shall be available in solid and split core models, and offer Zither a digital or an analog signal to the automation system. E. Measurement of three phase power shall be accomplished with a kW/kWH transducer This device shall utilize direct current transformer inputs to calculate the instantaneous value (kW) and a pulsed output proportional to the energy usage (kWH). F. Control Valves: Valves shall be packless, modulating, electrically or magnetically actuated. These valves shall have true linear flow characteristics in relationship to valve opening. Control valves shall meet the heating and cooling loads specified, and close off against the differential pressure conditions within the application. Valves should be sized to operate accurately and with stability from 10 to 100% of the maximum design flow. These valves shall carry a full (3) three year parts and labor warranty- This warranty shall cover all required maintenance and failures. In the event of a failure the valve and actuator shall be replaced and reinstalled, by DDC Contractor; at no cost to the building owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-12 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1. Terminal Unit Valves: Valves shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi drop, Valve body shall be nickel plated brass, rated at 125 psig and shall have a control rangeability of 100 to 1. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be screwed type with NPT fittings. Valves 2-112 inches and larger shall be flanged. All two -position valves shall be full port valves. 2. Hot water valves shall be rated to 240 deg. F and 125 psig. Valves shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi pressure drop. Valve body shall be cast iron with a chrome nickel steel seat and inner valve material. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be screwed type with NPT fittings. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be flanged. 3. Butterfly Valves: 2 -way and 3 -way butterfly valves shall be cast iron valve body, with stainless steel stem, and available with disc seal for bubble -tight shut off. G. Pressure Independent Control Valves Valves shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi drop. Valve body shall be cast iron, steel or bronze and rated for 150 psi working pressure. All internal parts shall be stainless steel, steel, Teflon, brass, or bronze. The flow through the valve shall not vary more than +/- 5% due to system pressure fluctuations. A flow tag shall be furnished with_ach valve. The rangeability of the control valves shall be a minimum of 100 to 1.s Qc' X, M H. Control Dampers: Motorized damper, unless otherwise specified elsewhere ell bE5furniMged by DDC Contractor. Dampers are to be installed by HVAC Contractor undef2h6 surgrvisi n cf DDC Contractor. All blank -off plates and conversions necessary to install smai than ductrs dampers are the responsibility of Sheet Metal Contractor. :.--M E G 1. Damper frames are to be constructed of 13 gauge galvanized sheets3 el rrfg;hanically joined with linkage concealed in the side channel to eliminate noise as friction. Compressible spring stainless steel side seals, and acetal or bronze bearing's shall also be provided. 2. Damper blade width shall not exceed eight inches and the blade length shall not exceed 48 inches. Seals and 3/8 inch square steel zinc plated pins are required. 3. Provide opposed blade dampers for modulating applications and parallel blade for two position control. L Damper Actuators: Damper actuators shall be electronic, and shall be direct coupled over the shaft, without the need for connecting linkage. 1. The actuator shall have electronic overload circuitry to prevent damage. For power- failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. 2. Actuators shall be available with spring return to the normal position when required. 3. Actuators shall have a position indicator for external indication of damper position. 4. Actuators shall have manual override capability without disconnecting damper linkage. J. Airflow Measuring Stations: Provide a thermal anemometer using instrument grade self heated thermistor sensors with thermistor temperature sensors. 1. The flow station shall operate over a range of 0 to 5,000 feet/min with an accuracy of +/- 2% over 500 feet/min and +/- 10 ft/min for reading less than 500 feet/min. 2. The output signal shall be linear with field selectable ranges including 0-5 VDC, 0-10VDC and 4-20 ri 2.06 PORTABLE SERVICE TOOL A. General: Provide a minimum of one (1) portable service tool with the system to allow commissioning, adjustment, and diagnosis of the zone and local controllers. If different types of portable service tools are required for programming of zone controllers versus local controllers, provide one (1) of each type. All programming shall utilize English language descriptors. Manufacturers which utilize portable service tools which require the user to translate HEX decimal, binary, or numerical syntax shall provide one (1) laptop computer with the hardware and software required to meet the specified programming capabilities. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-13 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. The portable service tool shall have the following capabilities: 1. Readout of each input and output value. 2. Database programming of input and output definitions, setpoints, and control parameters. 3. Manual override of all digital outputs, analog outputs, and application modes (occupied/unoccupied/standby) and control modes (heating/cooling/deadband). 4. Download of all stored database parameters with a single keystroke for cloning typical controllers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT A. Provide a project manager who shall, as a part of his duties, be responsible for the following activities: 1. Coordination between Contractor and all other trades, Owner, local authorities and the design team. 2. Scheduling of manpower, material delivery, equipment installation and checkout. 3. Maintenance of construction records such as project scheduling and manpower planning for project coordination and as -built drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION METHODS A. Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, rough -in drawings and equipment details Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division -26 sections of these specifications. B. The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit, and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric or electronic control devices. C. Number -code or color -code conductors, excluding those used for individual zone controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system. D. Qjinevoltage power wiring required because of substitution of equipment specified in this sa�rytion, ,,§ krill be provided by this section. C) (� Sy Nk CEPTANCE A. ! Grenera),:E-The system installation shall be complete and tested for proper operation prior to " a®geept�n�c�testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the D�.,gigiZP�iifessional requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are iralled 2d the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment oWration. Acceptance testing will commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of request. When the field test procedures have been demonstrated to the Owner's representative. the system will be accepted. The warranty period will start at this time. B. Field Equipment Test Procedures: DDC control panels shall be demonstrated via a functional end to end test such that: 1. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their operation verified. 2. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation. 3. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device and observing the appropriate change of displayed value, INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-14 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 4. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed point and all interlocked points. 5 Automatic control operation shall be verified by Introducing an error Into the system and observing the proper corrective system response. 6. Selected time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled outputs. C. As -Built Documentation: After a successful acceptance demonstration, Contractor shall submit as -built drawings of the completed project for final approval. After receiving final approval, supply "3" complete 11 x 17 as -built drawing sets to the Owner. As -built sets printed using high resolution laser printer may be provided on 8-112" x 11" drawings. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three copies of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following. 1. Manufacturer's catalog data and specifications on sensors, transmitters, controllers, control valves, damper actuators, gauges, indicators, terminals, and any miscellaneous components used in the system. 2. An operator's manual which will include detailed instructions for all operations of the system 3. An operator's reference table listing the addresses of all connected inputEpoints and output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable. C� 4. A programmer's manual which will include all information ner*Q'y � Pam programming functions. Lo^ -- 5. A language manual which will include a detailed description of the lar2liege uLmd ar�all routines used by the system. 7 -h 6. Flow charts of the overall system configuration. -'- 7. Complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all program s6? ;; c a 8. A copy of the warranty. 9. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions. 10. Recommended spare parts list. As -built drawings and sequence of operation to be provided on back of door at each control panel for field reference. Upon completion of project, DDC Contractor shall adjust and validate all thermostats, controllers, valves, damper operators, relays, instruments and devices provided under this section in conjunction and coordinated with Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC, 3.04 TRAINING A. Contractor shall provide to the Design Professional a training class outline prior to any scheduled training. B. Training sessions shall be provided for the Owner's personnel by factory trained control engineers and technicians. Refer to Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions for minimum times. C, The course shall include instruction on specific systems and instructions for operating the installed system to include as a minimum: 1, HVAC System overview. 2. Operation of Control System. 3. Function of each Component. 4. System Operating Procedures. 5, Programming Procedures. 6. Maintenance Procedures. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-15 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty: The control system shall be warranted to be free from defects in both material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year of normal use and service, with the exception of control valves with a five (5) year warranty. This warranty shall become effective the date the owner accepts the system. 3.06 SPARES A. Provide one each of the following spare parts: 1. Room Sensor 2. Velocity Sensor 3 Zone Controller Board (one of each type) 4. Local Controller Board (one of each type) END OF SECTION 23 0900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-16 c.J A p C']t-- a CJ eti INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-16 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 2123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of HVAC pumps work required by this section is indicated on drawings and scEiAdules, and by requirements of this section. Q T B. Types of pumps specified in this section include the following: c'>� :74c') 1. End Suction Base Mounted Pumps <r- _0 rn rna C. Refer to Division -26 sections for the following work, not work of this section: � r. w 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pumps. Includo starters, disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory installed, by manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Design, manufacturer and install HVAC pumps in accordance with UL 778 "Motor Operated Water Pumps". B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and components which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams. Submit manufacturers electrical requirements for power supply wiring to HVAC pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A- Handle HVAC pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged HVAC pumps or components; replace with new. B. Store HVAC pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Pumps 1 Aurora 2. Bell & Gossett ITT: Fluid Handling Div. 3. Taco, Inc. 4, Armstrong 5 Grundfos / Paco 6. Patterson Pump B. General: Provide factory tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size and capacity of each pump is listed in pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer. 2.02 BASE MOUNTED END SUCTION PUMPS A. General Install Base Mounted End -Suction Pumps where indicated, and of capacities as scheduled. B. Type: Base mounted, single stage, end suction design with a foot mounted volute to allow servicing of the impeller and bearing assembly without disturbing piping connections. Pumps shall be designed for 175 psi working pressure, and 225 deg, F continuous water temperature. C, Construction: Class 30 cast iron body with integrally -cast pedestal support feet, suction and discharge flanges, gauge (suction and discharge). vent and drain ports. Solid steel shaft with bronze shaft -sleeve, mounted on heavy-duty grease lubricated ball bearings. Internally flushed, carbon, mechanical seals. The pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. Provide with wear rings. D. Inirseller: Qast bronze. hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a lockiragwless steel cap screw or nut. ,-ter:.: CE plihAg a flexible type.. center drop-out design coupling shall be employed between the pump . j aIeg mol*–Pumps for variable speed application shall have suitable coupling design for aFPlicahio1f4r Coupling shield shall be OSHA complaint and include an inspection window. F- Wier: ci rs shall have heavy-duty grease lubricated ball bearings. Motors shall be non- o*srloading at any point on the pump curve Motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be of tl�+size, voltage and enclosure called for on the plans. Pump and motor shall be factory aligned, and shall be realigned by Contractor after installation. G. Base. Structural steel or fabricated steel channel with fully enclosed sides and ends, and securely welded cross members. Grouting area shall be fully opened_ H. Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute standards. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high grade machinery enamel prior to shipment. Suction Diffuser Provide at each base mounted pump a Suction Diffuser of size and type noted on drawings. Units shall consist of angle type cast iron body with steel straightening vanes and steel combination Diffuser Strainer -Orifice Cylinder with 3116" diameter openings for pump protection. A permanent magnet shall be located within the flow stream and shall be removable for cleaning. The orifice cylinder shall be equipped with a disposable fine mesh bronze strainer which shall be removed after system start-up. Orifice cylinder shall be designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head and shall have a free area equal to five times HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 cross section area of pump suction opening. Straightening vanes shall extend the full length of the orifice cylinder and shall be replaceable. Unit shall be provided with adjustable support foot to carry weight of suction piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which HVAC pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable with Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS A. General: Install HVAC pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that FMC pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. o r B. Access: Provide access space around HVAC pumps for service as indicatedP�ttin w cas �s than that recommended by manufacturer. ::n o t� 7, �t 9 C. Support: r 1. Support: Grout base mounted pumps to housekeeping pads with naP,hshrinkng grout in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Level pumps as requ r' ed prior to grouting. D. Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer for power wiring. 1. Verify that wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. Piping Connections: Refer to Division -23 HVAC piping sections. Provide piping, valves, accessories, gauges and supports as indicated, including the following: 1. Flexible connector in suction and discharge line of base mounted pumps. 2. Shut-off valve in suction line. 3. Check valve, balancing/shut-off valve in discharge line. For pipe sizes 2" and larger, check valve to be spring loaded silent type. At Contractor's option, an indicating type butterfly valve may be used in lieu of balancing cock and shut-off valve. 4. Compound gauge with turn cocks connected between pump suction and discharge. 3.03 ALIGNMENT AND START-UP A. Alignment Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps within recommended tolerances by manufacturer, and in presence of manufacturer's service representative. B. Start-up- Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. HYDROMC PUMPS 232123-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Cleaning: Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-4 o Lel O ;.3 i- � C3 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 2300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of refrigerant piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. ti a. Refrigerant suction line piping between compressors and cooling coils© b. Refrigerant liquid line piping between liquid receivers and coo coilsM 2. Insulation of refrigerant piping is specified in other Division -23 sectiq!3�,,,,pndL!� incln17d as work of this section. -ice o I 3, Installation of valves for refrigerant piping system is specified I* er Fvisio - sections and is included as work of this section. o CO 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSI Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping", and extend applicable lower pressure limits to pressures below 15 prig. B. Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". C. UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigeration piping in accordance with IAMPO "Uniform Mechanical Code". D. IMC Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigeration piping in accordance with "International Mechanical Code". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with ANSI B31.5 "Code for Refrigeration Piping" where applicable, base pressure rating an refrigeration piping system's maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections, provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in refrigeration piping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Valves: Refer to Section 23 0523 - General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. C. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section - 23 0500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 D. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 23 0529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping. 2.02 PIPE., Material Service A. Copper refrigeration tube, hard Refrigerant lines. temper. Type L -ACR. ASTM B88. 2.03 FITTINGS. A. Copper refrigerant tubes: 1. 3/4" and Smaller: Cast copper -alloy for flared copper tubes. 2. 7/8" through 4 1/8': Wrought -copper, solderjoints. 2.04 JOINTS A. Copper refrigerant tube: 1. 3/4" and Smaller Flared. 2 7/8" through 4 118': Soldered PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION silver -lead solder, ANSI/ASTM B 32, Grade 96 TS. A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which refrigerant piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INS7-,9 LATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A Gen'erajkjnjtall basic materials and products as required per manufacturer=s recommendations, Li j ANSI BEft-�_ iACcde for Refrigerant Piping" and as required to meet the intent of the documents. B Reft erpt�Piping 1.:% +�ll pipe for all refrigerant systems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other -s se&lns, and as specified herein. 0 M 2. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated, straight, plumb, and as direct as possible, form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other refrigerant items. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other: space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. 3. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. Pitch piping in direction of oil return to compressor. 4. Check all piping for interference with other trades, avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. 5. Where rough -in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough -in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing -in. REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 6. Where refrigeration piping is buried, encase piping and insulation loosely in schedule 40 PVC and ventilate PVC pipe to allow vapor line to see outside air temperature. Ensure PVC pipe is free draining to prevent water buildup. Provide a riser trap and slope refrigeration line to trap. Where buried lengths exceed 25', provide a 90 minute timer wired parallel with thermostat control to operate unit every 90 minutes to maintain safe slugging levels. C. Valves 1. Refer to Section 23 0523 - General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping, 2. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. D. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 23 0500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. E. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 23 0529 - Hangers and Supportvor HVAC Piping. Cry 1 F. Install specialties and accessories as indicated on drawings and in accordance —� manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes and standards. -)-< o M G. Equipment Connections ro 1.General: Connect refrigerant piping system to refrigerant equipmer 2s indWated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicatLTb. H. Field Quality Control 1. Refrigerant Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, test refrigerant piping with electronic leak detector. System must be entirely leak -free. 2. Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 3113 - METAL DUCTS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and erect low pressure ductwork as required by the drawings and this section. B. Low pressure ductwork shall apply to the following: 1. Supply: Downstream of terminal units, less than 1" static pressure. 2. Return: Upstream of terminal units, less than 1" static ressM. C3 n C. High velocity ductwork shall apply to the following: 1. Supply & Ventilation: Upstream of terminal units, less than 6" statimiRssta. 2. Return: Downstream of terminal units, less than 6" si�pres�sure. C7 1.03 DEFINITIONS ca A. Conditioned Space: An area Inside the building which is heated and/or cooled. ca B. Tempered Space: an area inside the building which is not directly heated or cooled, but is adjacent to a heated or cooled space with no insulation separating the two spaces (e.g., ceiling plenums). C. Untempered Space: an area inside the building which is not conditioned and is not tempered (e.g., attic spaces). D. Exterior: An area outside the building (e.g., roof mounted items). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Duct and plenum construction, metal gauges, reinforcing, methods of supporting and hanging and other sheet metal work as called for shall be in accordance with the following standards: 1. "SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards", Second Edition 1995, by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B. Low pressure ductwork shall conform to the following SMACNA pressure classifications. Refer to plans for ductwork designations. Supply & Relief - Rectangular .......................... 1" positive Supply & Relief— Round .................................. 2" positive Return & Outdoor - Rectangular ....................... 1" negative Return & Outdoor- Round................................2" negative METAL DUCTS 233113-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 C. High velocity ductwork shall conform to the following SMACNA pressure classifications. Supply & Ventilation - Rectangular .................... 4" positive Supply & Ventilation - Round .............................4" positive Return - Rectangular.........................................4" negative Return - Round..................................................4" negative D. NFPA Compliance: All liner and covering materials shall have maximum UL Flame Spread Index of 25, and maximum Smoke Developed Index of 50, and shall meet all requirements of NFPA-90A. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit 1/4 scale shop fabrication shop drawings. 2. Submit shop drawings of elbows and fittings showing static pressure loss charted for air quantities involved in each. B. Two copies of duct leak testing results. C. Submit weld sample, welding information, and welders' certification for weld stainless steel ductwork. Submittal to include the following information: 1. Welder name(s): 2. Certification: 3. Metal type and gauge: 4. Joint preparation: 5. Welding process: 6. Equipment utilized: �. 7. r" r :F lluspecifications: 8 L;y shield gas: D. # PrddllctrDa Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of me _han <lpsulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and L,L furmishe�Lql Cessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. - E_ MaMenance Data Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mecllanical insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. F_ Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. G. Submit product data for kitchen exhaust ductwork. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 90A. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. Underwriter's Laboratories, UL 181: Factory -Made Duct Materials and Air Duct Connections. 1.07 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect shop -fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling_ 1. Stored materials subject to rejection due to damage. METAL DUCTS 233113-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE 414006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products, C Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install D. Fittings: 1. Construct branches, bends, and elbows with centerline radius of not less than duct 1.0 times the width (diameter), where space conditions will not permit this radius or where indicated on drawings, square elbows with air turns shall be used. 2. Slopes for transitions or other changes in dimension shall be minimum 1:3. 3. Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh Lock or snaplock equal per SMACNA. Lateral seams shall be slip drive or standing. Slip seams and sheet metal screws not permitted. 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK- HIGH VELOCITY A. Single -Wall Ducts. Spiral -wound, zinc -coated steel with individual formed steel tees and elbows. Single -Wall Round Duct Gauges: Minimum USS Gauge Duct Diameter (Inches) Spiral Lock Seam Up to 8 26 9 to 22 24 23 to 36 22 37 to 50 20 51 to 60 18 61 and Over 16 METAL DUCTS 233113-3 damaged insulation, remove from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. All sheet metal work shall be constructed of prime quality resquared tight coat galvanized steel, except where other type material is specified. Manufacturer's name and U S. gauge number shall appear on each sheet. B. Duct Lining Materials ca � 1. Certain -Teed 2. Owens Corning Fiberglasso C:) — 3 Johns -Manville t- ern 4. PPG 5. Knauf'-�, s _ w 2.02 GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK- LOW VELOCITY Y c A. General: Provide factory -fabricated or shop fabricated duct and fittings. B. Materials: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A527, lockforming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A525, G90 zinc coatings, mill phosphatized. C. Gauge: Comply with code requirements for minimum gauge thickness for various sizes. D. Fittings: 1. Construct branches, bends, and elbows with centerline radius of not less than duct 1.0 times the width (diameter), where space conditions will not permit this radius or where indicated on drawings, square elbows with air turns shall be used. 2. Slopes for transitions or other changes in dimension shall be minimum 1:3. 3. Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh Lock or snaplock equal per SMACNA. Lateral seams shall be slip drive or standing. Slip seams and sheet metal screws not permitted. 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK- HIGH VELOCITY A. Single -Wall Ducts. Spiral -wound, zinc -coated steel with individual formed steel tees and elbows. Single -Wall Round Duct Gauges: Minimum USS Gauge Duct Diameter (Inches) Spiral Lock Seam Up to 8 26 9 to 22 24 23 to 36 22 37 to 50 20 51 to 60 18 61 and Over 16 METAL DUCTS 233113-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2. Single -Wall Oval Duct Gauges, Factory -Made with Spiral Lock Seams: Maximum Width Minimum in Inches USS Gauge Up to 10 24 11 to 20 22 21 to 40 18 41 to 72 16 Reinforcement Longitudinal Centers None 4 foot centers 2 x 2 x 118 angle 2.5 foot centers 2 x 2 x 3/16 angle 2 foot centers DE #14006 B. Flexible Ductwork, Insulated: Suitable for -20-F to 220°F temperature range and minimum 12 inches w_c. working pressure. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Flexmaster: Type 3 b. Genflex: IHPL (1-112" thick insulation) C. Thermaflex: M -KC (1-112" thick insulation) Inner Liner: Glass fiber, PVC coating, factory -clinched in cold -rolled galvanized steel spiral, or with spiral wire permanently bonded to fabric, UL listed, complying with NFPA 90. 3. Outer Jacket: 1-112" thick.. 3/4 Ib. fibrous glass, with flame -resistant PVC vapor barrier. C. Access Panels: Shall be of same material as ducts in which they are installed, fabricated of two thicknesses of not less than 24 gauge, with 1" thick rigid glass fiber filler. Provide sheet metal frame, airtight gasket equal to United McGill AOBXFDDC. D. Fabrication 1. Dirfctional Charge: c— Construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius minimum 1.0 times width of duct o _j� on center line. 2. ac -Change: Increase and decrease duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 150, unless otherwise o noted on Drawings. 3. Seams and Joints: In accordance with SMACNA standards. a. Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight, substantially airtight, braced and stiffened so not to breathe, rattle, vibrate or sag. b. Where spiral ductwork is exposed, assemble duct to duct joints with spiral seam following continuous helicoid pattern across joints. 2.04 DUCT SEALING -LOW VELOCITY A. All joints in low pressure duct work shall be sealed with Foster 32-14 or DuctMate ProSeal. Apply and install joint sealer per manufacturer's recommendations. In general, apply to male end of coupling and/or interior of female fitting. After connection, brush sealant over the assembled joint and screws with a 2" to 3" wide band. Sealant shall be allowed to set for 48 hours before any air pressure is put on system, All tie bars, bolts and rivets shall be sealed with the specified sealant. Sealant as manufactured by Minnesota Mining No. 800 or United Sheet Metal will be considered equal. METAL DUCTS 233113-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. Alternate Sealing System. 1. Transverse duct joints may be made with the Ductmate System or an approved equal. 2. The installation of the Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction and installation manuals. 3. The standard Ductmate System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "J" connection. The Ductmate-JR System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "E" connection. Construction of the duct, such as gauge, reinforcing, etc. shall be as indicated in the addendum to the SMACNA manuals as provided by the manufacturer and as tested by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. o C. Duct Sealing Requirements: SMACNA Seal Class C. Cs 2.05 DUCT SEALING - HIGH VELOCITY Wo c-� A. All joints in low pressure duct work shall be sealed with Foster 32-14 or DuctMARMSVal. Pil and install joint sealer per manufacturer's recommendations. In general, ap-y-;3o mile a V3 coupling and/or interior of female fitting. After connection, brush sealant over @ia 'assdMbled joint and screws with a 2" to 3" wide band. Sealant shall be allowed to set for 48 traiars before any air pressure is put on system. All tie bars, bolts and rivets shall be sealed with the specified sealant. Sealant as manufactured by Minnesota Mining No. 800 or United Sheet Metal will be considered equal. B. Alternate Sealing System: 1. Transverse duct joints may be made with the Ductmate System or an approved equal. 2. The installation of the Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction and installation manuals. 3. The standard Ductmate System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "J" connection. The Ductmate-JR System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "E" connection. Construction of the duct, such as gauge, reinforcing, etc. shall be as indicated in the addendum to the SMACNA manuals as provided by the manufacturer and as tested by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. C. Duct Sealing Requirements: SMACNA Seal Class A. 2.06 DUCT LINER A. Lining materials shall be Type'A' Duct Liner, Certain -Teed Coated Ultralite 150, one and one half (1 1/2) pounds per cubic foot density. B. Unless noted otherwise, all ductwork and accessories shall be either lined or covered as scheduled on plans. If type or thickness is not indicated, it shall be 1-1/2" covering. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve airtight and quiet systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum joints. METAL DUCTS 233113-5 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2. Align ductwork accurately at connections and with internal surfaces smooth. 3. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true -to -shape and prevent buckling and vibration. B. Ducts shall be installed following essentially lines indicated on drawings, install offsets, angles and transitions as may be required to avoid interferences with other work. Maintain full capacity of ducts at offsets, angles and transitions except where drawings indicate use of reducing or increasing transitions. General: Each duct section shall be rigidly supported from structure. Attach hangers to structure with expansion plugs, concrete inserts, beam clamps or other approved means. Rubber in -shear isolators shall be installed in hangers for all ducts in equipment rooms, to prevent vibration transmission to the structure. C. Install hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards general locations: 1. Install hangers close to transverse joints of main ducts and branches, clinch collar branch connections and the first branch elbows after nested splits. 2. Locate hangers of duct penetrating walls or partitions as though the walls will contribute no support to the duct. 3 Install hangers in pairs on exact opposite sides of duct. 4 Maintain hanger spacing intervals less than, equal to, but not greater than the specified maximums. 5. Install hangers at the midpoint of small and medium size horizontal vaned square elbows. On wide vaned square elbows, install additional hangers at maximum allowable intervals or less measured along the heel lines of the elbows. 6. o.- Errkide a set of hangers at the midpoint of small and medium size horizontal radius alt 6. Install one or more supplementary hangers, as necessary, along the inside and o Rt`sade arcs of large radius elbows of any angle whenever the lengths of these arcs �—* its Ped the maximum hanger spacing length for that particular size duct. LL 7. 5 F�ride at least one set of hangers for short duct branches 3 feet or less in length. Z=_ 8. `v Provide each duct riser with a minimum of two supports completely spanning the shaft opening at each floor. One pair of supports may be used to support more than one duct riser, provided that the strength of the supports is increased appropriately and proper additional supplementary steel is used at the extra risers. 9. Support duct risers, located between floors that are more than 15 feet high, at each floor and halfway points between floors. The distance between intermediate supports on very high floors should not exceed 12 feet. Intermediate hangers may be supported from an adjacent wall or hung by rods from supports on the floor above. 10. Provide one or more sets of hangers for equipment in duct runs such as heating coils, heat pumps, etc., as recommended by their manufacturers. D. Locate duct hangers approximately: 1. 2 to 24 inches from flexible connections of fans. 2. 2 to 24 inches from the outlets or flexible connects of VAV control units or mixing boxes. METAL DUCTS 233113-6 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3. 12 to 36 inches from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts. 4. 2 to 12 inches from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums. 5. 2 to 24 inches from fire damper breakaway joints. 6. 0 inches to half the duct width plus 2 inches from the vertical centerline of the lower elbow of short vertical offsets made with vaned square elbows. The width refers to the dimension of the elbow in the plane of the turn. 7. 0 inches to half the duct width plus 2 inches from the vertical centerline of the bottom and top elbows of vaned square elbow offsets over 8 feet high. 8. One-eighth of the arc in from the ends of bottom and top radius elbows of vertical offsets longer than 8 feet. Short vertical offsets require hangers at the bottom elbow. Likewise, sloping offsets need at least one set of hangers at their lower radius elbow. 9. 6 to 12 inches from transverse joints of ducts whose lengths are the same as specified hanger intervals. `= 10. 6 to 12 inches from one side of walls or partitions penetrated by ducts. �� { C-) w E. Maximum permitted hanger spacing: __qrI C:) �r- 1. Ducts with areas up to 4 square feet may have their hangers spaced u _< fe€Faparm 77 2. Ducts with areas 4.1 to 10 square feet may have their hangers spaces - not mare than 6 feet apart. co 3. Ducts with areas over 10 square feet may have their hangers located up to 4 feet apart. F. Provide and install locking manual volume dampers in all duct systems as required for controlling air volumes to trunk ducts, branch ducts, outlets and inlets. Provide and install additional volume dampers as required by Testing and Balancing Contractor for balancing of system. G. Duct sizes shown on drawings are net inside dimensions and sheet metal size shall be increased to allow for duct linings. H. Install as indicated on the drawings all duct mounted equipment as specified in other sections. I. Install eccentric reducers with tops of both duct sizes flush to maintain maximum ceiling space below ducts. J. Openings: 1. Provide in ductwork to accommodate access doors, temperature control components and fire dampers. 2. Install access panels for inspection and servicing of all duct mounted equipment- reheat coils, sound attenuators, motorized dampers, smoke and fire dampers. 3. Provide pitot tube openings for testing of systems, complete with metal cap, with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. 4. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation materials inside metal collar. METAL DUCTS 233113-7 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 K. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. L. Connections: 1. Connect duct to equipment with flexible fabric, sheet metal clips, screws and washers. 2. At each point where ducts pass through partitions, provide sleeve with space between duct and sleeve packed with insulation and sealed. M. Where ducts pass through fire -rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings, seal openings in accordance with Specification Section 23 0500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. 3.02 DUCT LINER APPLICATION A. Apply duct liner with coated or surface designed to be exposed facing the air stream and adhered with 100% coverage of fire retardant adhesive. When width exceeds 12" or height exceeds 24", additionally secure liner with mechanical fasteners spaced 12" maximum centers. Fasteners shall start within 3" of leading edge of traverse joints. Coat all exposed joints and edges of traverse joints with a fire retardant adhesive. B. Duct sizes shown on drawings are net inside dimensions and sheet metal size shall be increased to allow for duct lining. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning: 1 _ Clean ductwork internally, as it is installed, of dust and debris. N 2co ' Clan external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration I { J 4 o etal or where ductwork is to be painted. TeempTdd EClosure: Cn LL� 1a fiends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time Eq ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering r2il time connections are to be completed. N 3.04 DUCT LEAK TESTING — HIGH VELOCITY A. Tappable and Fume Hood Exhaust Ducts. 1. Testing shall be done before any exterior insulation is applied. 2. Fume hood and tappable exhaust ducts are intended to be virtually without leakage within the building. 3. Each exhaust system shall be capped at all inlet points and at the point of discharge to atmosphere. Fans, dampers and flexible connections shall be included in the testing. 4. Each duct system shall be pressurized to 7 inch water column and shall exhibit a leakage rate of less than 4 cfm regardless of system size or design flow rate. 5. Where several ducts discharge into a large collection duct, the collection duct and each individual exhaust duct may be treated as separate duct systems. METAL DUCTS 233113-8 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. HVAC Supply and Exhaust Ducts 1. The system shall be leak tested at the design operating pressure with a total leakage not to exceed 2% of the total design cfm for the system. 2. Carefully seal off all openings (except one for connecting the test equipment) to the riser or run -out section to be tested. 3. Follow the recommendations of the manufacturer of the duct seal to allow for adequate cure time for sealer. 4. Connect test blower, calibrated orifice tube and manometers to the system in accordance with the test equipment manufacturer's recommendations. 5. When the specified test pressure is reached, allow the blower to run for one minute to make sure that the pressure is stabilized. 6. When the pressure is holding steady, measure the air flowing through the orifice tube assembly. 3.05 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE —LOW VELOCITY o AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL HVAC Supply, Return Steel, Galvanized C-) —< p General Exhaust -a 3.06 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE —HIGH VELOCITY c,,a AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL HVAC Supply, Return and Steel, Galvanized General Exhaust END OF SECTION 23 3113 METAL DUCTS 233113-9 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 3300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of duct accessories is indicated on drawings and by the requirements of this section. r� B. Types of duct accessories required for project include the following: o Tw 1. Sound Attenuators— 2. Volume Dampers/Regulators c1 C 3. Flexible Ducts 4. Access Doors 5. Control Dampers cam% w 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE –^ w A SMACNA Compliance Comply with applicable portions of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) "Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide". B Industry Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to construction of duct accessories, except as otherwise indicated. C. UL Compliance. Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers". D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of Al 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of duct accessories. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data, Submit manufacturer's specifications for each type of duct accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction, and Installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly -type shop drawings for each type of duct accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, and method of fastening or support. C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of duct accessory', include this data in Maintenance Manual. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible ductwork equal to one of the following: Semco Wiremold AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3. Thermaflex 4. Valuflex B. Sound Attenuators 1. Price 2, Industrial Acoustics Company 3. Ruskin Manufacturing 4. Semco 5, Vibro Acoustics 6. Commercial Acoustics 2.02 SOUND ATTENUATORS DE #14006 A. General. Furnish and install sound attenuators of the types and sizes listed in schedule. B. Materials and Construction Outer casings of silencers shall be made of galvanized steel in accordance with ASHRAE GUIDE recommended construction for high pressure rectangular duct work. Seams shall be lock formed and mastic filled. a. Rectangular: 22 gauge (min.) b. Elbows: 18 gauge (min.) C. Circular: Connection Diameter Casing Gauge Less than 18" 22 18" to 30" 20 cw 30" to 54" 18 m' Over 54" 16 ir...o .-e; r -p U 2 i- ';111 rior partitions for silencers shall be made of perforated galvanized steel. _J — —J f p CD co }ami Rectangular: 22 gauge r -b Elbows 22 gauge LL e� c Circular: 22 gauge CD 3N Filler material shall be of inorganic mineral or glass fiber of a density sufficient to obtain the specified acoustic performance and be packed under not less than 5% compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling. Material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof. 4. Combustion rating for the silencer acoustic fill shall not exceed the following when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA Standard 255 or UL No. 723: Flamespread Classification 25 Smoke Development Rating 50 Fuel Contribution 20 5, Airtight construction shall be provided by use of a duct sealing compound on the job site. Material and labor furnished by Contractor. Silencers shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential air pressure of 8 i.w.g. inside to outside of casing. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Acoustic Performance 1. Silencer ratings shall be determined in a duct -to -reverberant room test facility which provides for airflow in both directions through the test silencer in accordance with ASTM Specification E 477-06. The test set-up and procedure shall be such that all effects due to end reflection, directivity, flanking transmission, standing waves and test chamber sound absorption are eliminated. Acoustic ratings shall include Dynamic Insertion Loss (DIL) and Self -Noise (SN) Power Levels both for FORWARD FLOW (air and noise in same direction) and REVERSE FLOW (air and noise in opposite directions) with airflow of at least 2000 fpm entering face velocity. Data for rectangular and tubular ty"e' silencers shall be presented for tests conducted using silencers no smJler thacrthe following cross-sections: Rectangular, in. - 24 x 24, 24 x 30, or 24 x 36� o C a rn D. Aerodynamic Performance p7G ca Static pressure loss of silencers shall not exceed those listed in the silencer schedule as the airflow indicates. Airflow measurements shall be made in accordarice with3�TM Specification E 477-06 and applicable portions of ASME, AMCA, and ADC airflow test codes. Tests shall be reported on the identical units for which acoustic data is presented. E. Certification With submittals, the manufacturer shall supply certified test data on Dynamic Insertion Loss, Self -Noise Power Levels, and Aerodynamic Performance for Reverse and Forward Flow test conditions- Test data shall be for a standard product. All rating tests shall be conducted in the same facility, shall utilize the same silencer, and shall be open to inspection upon request from Design Professional. Duct Transitions When transitions are required to adapt silencer dimensions to connecting duct work, they shall be furnished by Installing Contractor G. Access Doors: As indicated on schedule, provide access doors in sound attenuator casing. Access doors shall allow service for inspection and cleaning. Access doors shall be supplied integral to unit and shall have leakage and pressure ratings equal to that of the attenuator. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS A. Manual Volume Dampers Fabricated of same material as ducts, two metal gauges heavier than duct and hammered 1" all around, mounted on 3/8" square rod with saw slot position indicator. Provide end bearings with gasket - Young Regulator Co. Model 666 -FD or equal by Elgin ManualVolume Damper Regulators: 1. Accessible areas: Provide locking position regulator with gasket and handle - Young Regulator Co. Model 403 -FD or equal by Elgin. 2 Inaccessible areas: Provide concealed manual volume damper regulators with cover plate and gear assembly - Young Regulator Co. Model 315 or equal by Elgin C. Air Turns Elgin "Air-Tite" or equal shop fabricated. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D. Flexible Duct Connection: 30 ounce woven glass fiber, double neoprene coated, fire retardant, waterproof and air tight, suitable for temperatures to 250 deg. F, UL approved. Ventfabric, Inc. " Ventg lass". E. Access Panels: Shall be of same material as ducts in which they are installed, fabricated of two thicknesses of not less than 24 gauge, with 1" thick rigid glass fiber filler. Provide sheet metal frame, air tight gasket and two Young Regulator Company No. 1330 latches, or equal by Elgin. 2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible duct shall be factory pre -insulated, consisting of vinyl coated spring steel wire helix bonded to vinyl coated fiberglass mesh screen, having one (1) inch nominal fiberglass insulation and vinyl impregnated closely woven fiberglass vapor barrier. Basis of Design: Seri Type Al. B. Composite assembly shall meet Class I requirements of NFPA-90A and shall be UL listed for flame spread rating of not more than 25 and smoke developed rating of not more than 50. Assembly shall meet the requirements of UL -181. C. Where flexible duct is allowed, it shall be connected to metal ducts, terminal units and diffusers with Panduit, Tylon or equal tool installed nylon clamps. D. Maximum length of flexible duct connections from metal duct to terminal units and grilles, registers and diffusers shall be not greater than 72". All duct turns greater than 45 deg. shall be rigid elbows. E. Wherever ductwork is routed exposed, flexible ductwork is not acceptable. All exposed ductwork to be rigid. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION O A. E cRa'mine areas and conditions under which duct accessories will be installed. Do not proceed wGLk:j? til unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Fid INS�PALL7y.®N C:3 U t— �. Faall hPaccessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with LL a�p�licaabble5)ortions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance w4h re?cj5ized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. G B. %Ball access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter. C. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of duct accessories properly with other work. D. Field Quality Control: Operate installed duct accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. END OF SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 7400 - PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of packaged outdoor HVAC equipment work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of rooftop heating and cooling units specified in this section include the following: CD 1. Packaged rooftop units. `C-) Y Tr C. Refer to Division -26 sections for the following work, not work of this section. o r 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on packagedr0,frtd9q HV equipment. Include required electrical devices except where specified furnahed, factory -installed by manufacturer. D. Refer to other Division -23 sections for ductwork required external to rooftop heating cooling units for installation, not work of this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. ARI Compliance: Provide capacity ratings for packaged outdoor HVAC equipment in accordance with ARI standard 360 "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air -Conditioning Equipment". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct refrigerating system of packaged outdoor HVAC equipment in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 3. ASHRAE Compliance: Provide Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) of packaged outdoor HVAC equipment not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90A "Energy Conservation in New Building Design". 4. UL Compliance: Provide packaged outdoor HVAC equipment which are listed by UL and have UL label affixed. 5. AGA Compliance: Construct gas-fired furnace sections in accordance with AGA safety standards, and provide AGA label. B. Warranty: 1. Provide one year warranty on all parts except compressor. 2. Provide five year warranty on compressor. PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 237400-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. Submit manufacturer's equipment specifications, equipment capacities, ratings and selection points, fan curves with selection points clearly indicated and installation and start-up instructions_ B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to packaged heating and cooling equipment including control and thermostat wiring_ Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle packaged outdoor HVAC equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting, and scoring. Do not install damaged packaged outdoor HVAC equipment or components; replace with new. B. Store packaged outdoor HVAC equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading packaged outdoor HVAC equipment and moving them to final location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Packaged Rooftop Units 1.CD N Mc -quay Group, McQuay-Perfex, Inc. J6tne Co., The ROWS TOA�U„MTS, 20 TONS AND LARGER p C.36•- GMerolLiBYovide factory -assembled and tested rooftop units as indicated, designed for roof or LL sPab rmu_Zing, consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils. condenser and escapoFakcrrfans, refrigeration, heating coils and temperature controls, filters and dampers. f�a$vide ccaacities and electrical characteristics as scheduled. N B. Casing: Provide manufacturer's standard casing construction, corrosion protection coating, and exterior finish. Provide removable panels and/or access doors for inspection and access to internal parts. Insulate casing with 1" thick minimum thermal insulation. Provide knockouts for electrical and piping connections. Provide condensate drain connection and lifting lugs. C. Evaporator Fans: Provide forward -curved, centrifugal, belt driven fans with adjustable sheaves, and permanently lubricated motor bearings. D. Condenser Fans: Provide propeller -type, direct -driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings. E. Coils: For evaporator and condenser, provide non-ferrous construction with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes: with brazed tubing joints. PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 237400-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 Compressors: Provide scroll compressors. Provide vibration isolators and crankcase heaters which de -energize during compressor operation. Provide with minimum steps of unloading as scheduled. Provide thermal expansion valves, filter dryers, sight glasses, compressor service valves, liquid line service valves; and provide minimum of 2 refrigerant circuits for units having 2 or more compressors. G. Safety Controls: Provide the following controls: a 1. Low pressure cutout, manual reset. cs C 2. High pressure cutout, manual reset. —mac 3. Compressor motor overload protection, manual reset. nco 4. Anti -recycling timing device. =tC-s o 5. Adjustable low -ambient lockout. _G rn M H. Economizer Control: Provide economizer control consisting of return and opts airyJam�a�us, outside air filter, power exhaust damper, fully modulating electric control si�i m wiT dry bulb control to automatically use outdoor air for free cooling when outdoor air temperature s.below 550 (adjustable). L Filters: Provide filter section consisting of 2" thick fiberglass throwaway filters in filter rack, with maximum face velocity of 300 fpm. J. Electrical: Provide 115V convenience outlet, separately fused, for unit service. Provide means for unit power connection either through unit cabinet or within roof curb perimeter. K. Temperature Control: Provide factory -wired controls and terminal block for power wiring. Unit shall be capable of interfacing with building DDC control system. L. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated and/or scheduled: 1. Stand: A steel support stand shall be furnished and installed for setting of unit on roof. Refer to structural plans for details. Contractor shall coordinate requirements with General Contractor. 2. Anti -Recycling Control: Provide control to automatically prevent compressor restart for 5 minutes after shutdown, 3. Provide with power return/exhaust fan and motorized bypass and relief dampers. 4. Provide 2" spring isolators for supply and return fans. 5. Refer to schedule on plans for other options to be provided. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which rooftop heating and cooling units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 237400-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS A. General: Install rooftop heating and cooling units in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Support: Install units on steel support stand. C. Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory -mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor for power wiring only, 1. Verify that wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. D. Ductwork: Refer to Division 23, Section 23 3113 - Metal Ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to unit with flexible duct connections. Provide transitions to exactly match unit duct connection size. E. Start-up rooftop heating and cooling units in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 1. Balancing of unit systems is specified in Division 23, Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC, not work of this section. F. Provide traps on condensate drains with a seal depth equal to unit total static pressure plus 112". 3.03 GROUNDINGS A. Provide positive equipment ground for rooftop heating and cooling unit components, 3.04 TRaING !f OWNER'S PERSONNEL a cy� . P.rovidAer s_0rvices of manufacturer's technical representative to instruct Owner's personnel in opera4r�and maintenance of rooftop heating and cooling units, o t -- o y-Qhedule training with Owner, provide at least 7 -day notice to Contractor and Owner of U �t4ring date. 6.,� C� 3.05 SPARE PARTS c:. cv A General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each packaged heating and cooling unit: 1. One set of matched fan belts for each belt driven fan. 2. One set filters for each unit. END OF SECTION 23 7400 PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 237400-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 8126 - SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 - General Requirements are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of packaged cooling units work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. N B Types of packaged cooling units specified in this section include the following: 1. Split System Air Conditioning Units. n �a n -C C. Refer to Division -26 sections for the following work: .,:,rte C:) o 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pac ad coo'lirg Include disconnects and required electrical devices, except where spEr'giifed atfurnish , or factory -installed by manufacturer. 1> _ c.a 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: UL Compliance: Provide packaged heating and cooling units which are designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with UL requirements. B. Warranty: 1. Provide one year warranty on all parts except compressor and heating elements. 2. Provide five year warranty on compressor and heating elements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: Submit manufacturer's equipment specifications, equipment capacities, ratings and selection points, and installation and start-up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to packaged cooling equipment including control and thermostat wiring. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle packaged cooling units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged packaged cooling units or components; replace with new. B. Store packaged heating and cooling units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS 238126-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading packaged cooling units, and moving them to final location. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Split System Air Conditioning Unit 1. Fujitsu 2. Mitsubishi 3. LG 2.02 SPLIT SYSTEM UNITS A. General: Furnish and install a ductless split system AC unit consisting of an indoor wall mounted evaporator/blower section and matching outdoor condensing section of size, voltage, and capacities shown on unit schedule. Systems shall be ARI 210 or 240 & 270 B. Indoor Evaporator/Blower Section: Indoor section shall be compact cassettes, factory assembled and wired. Units shall be furnished with anti-mold, poly type washable air filters. C. Outdoor Condensing Section: Outdoor section shall be single-zone outdoor unit with R410A refrigerant. Unit shall utilize high performance, low noise, large capacity OC twin rotary compressor and shall be paired with indoor evaporator/blower section as indicated. D. Provide with the following accessories: Refer to schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which packaged heating and cooling units are to be instplled. -Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in CZ:k marineracc-eptable to Installer. 3114-SINS-ALLAH ON OF PACKAGED COOLING UNITS A.--+dGeyn'eratYnstall packaged cooling units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instruct� g Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain ma�'ufacfr's recommended clearances. o B. Co trols: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor for power wiring. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. C. Refrigerant Piping: Refer to Section 23 23 00 - Refrigeration Piping. Connect liquid and suction piping to unit as indicated, charge system, and check for leaks. D. Drain Piping: Route drain line to nearest service sink or drain as indicated. SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS 238126-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 H. Start-up packaged cooling units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.03 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of packaged cooling units. END OF SECTION 23 8126 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS 238126-3 o_ C7 x' )> O ,<rn_ rn M Division 26 Electrical Division 2 G N Q t ipr/�r CD / • �� 4 �rpl w Division 2 G CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 - General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work shall include furnishing of all systems, equipment and material specified in this division and as called for on the electrical drawings, to include supervision, operations, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests for the complete electrical installation. B. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. C. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODESAND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: o 1. National Electrical Code Cl 2. National Fire Protection Association c;71 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association- 4. Standards of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - co m 5. International Building Code ca 6. Occupational Safety and Health Actern �? 7. Iowa Administrative Code 3 8. NECA Standards 9. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) B. All Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Design Professional of any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Design Professional for final decision. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and check with each utility company providing requirements regarding incoming services. regulations of the local utility companies. He shall service to this project and determine or verify their B. Meters for incoming services shall be selected based on the project requirements. Any questions concerning this shall be referred to Design Professional prior to bidding. Contractor shall provide the appropriate meter and associated materials if not furnished by the utility company. C. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections, licenses and fees required in connection with the electrical work including State of Iowa Electrical Inspections. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. D. Contractor shall make all arrangements with each utility company and pay all service charges associated with new service. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.05 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS A. The electrical drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only. Contractor shall examine construction drawings to become familiar with the specific type of building construction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. B. Drawings for the electrical work are in part diagrammatic, and are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate in general the location of equipment. C. Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough -ins and the exact routing of conduits and raceway so as to best fit the layout of the work. D. Contractor shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions; scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as couplings, pull or splice boxes may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications or where they are required for proper installation of the work. such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact locations of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. C. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. D. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 SITV�NSPECTION A 4 Contractor"shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with the t cerin ittggs-pf the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routin 'Noutside conduit to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or 9 crer les. ra &yt)'9ent will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's failure to�rake this inspection. N 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of the General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. The Design Professional reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE 414006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications or between the requirements set forth for the various contractors shall be called to the attention of the Design Professional. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that the Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by the Design Professional and his decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc., shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. Refer to Division 09 for painting protection. F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires the contractor to work in areas previously finished by the General Contractor, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Electrical Contractor shall arrange with the General Contractor for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect - 0 1.09 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING o A. Refer to Division 1 for additional cutting and patching information- w tom, 0 B. Conduits and sleeves passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, w -RR", and parti� shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and conduit`499lee e shall sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating oIlfll or. Wt'(�de conduit or sleeves pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not .V" or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. C. Existing Structure: 1. Contractor shall provide cutting, lintels and patching, and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of his work, and shall furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. 2. Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Design Professional. Extent of cutting shall be minimized, use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. 3. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. E. Conduits and wireways passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and conduits, sleeves and/or wireways, shall be sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. Where conduits, sleeves and/or wireways pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. 1.40 MA TERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item unless authorized in writing by Design Professional. Where more than one unit is required of the same system, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items when required shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish, to the Design Professional, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. C. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. D. After award of contract, the contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to the Design Professional for review. E. Submit required information on the following items: CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM OTHER SPEC DETAIL PROD INSTALL O & M DEMON- (SEE SECTION EQUIPMENT DWGS DATA SAMPLES METHODS 262815 Motor and Service MANUAL STRATION NOTES) Disconnects X X 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers )< X Fuses NOTES: Design Professional will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the lans and lf p spec icahons. G_ Contract req'uirements cannot be changed an'?speclfIca tions. F' 4* n cv by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.92 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to the Design Professional in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard -backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: C. Items to be included shall be those listed in shop drawing section. 1.13 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. All systems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. B. Contractor shall test the electrical grounding system resistance in accordance with Specification Section 26 0526 — Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems and submit a report to Design Professional stating the results. C. Prior to acceptance of the electrical installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner, or his designated representatives, all essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. Owner instruction shall be provided for the following systems: Sections Description Hrs. on Site Hrs. off Site Presented By Dthers Present Remarks 26 2815 lElectrical Dist. System lContractor 1 REMARKS: 1. Perform complete system test at time of instruction. D Contractor shall submit to the Design Professional a certificate signed by the Owner stating the date, time, and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (� ; MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C-) o (PROJECT NAME) t (LOCATION) co (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization, address, contact and phone number, 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Design Professional and Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. C. Items to be included shall be those listed in shop drawing section. 1.13 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. All systems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. B. Contractor shall test the electrical grounding system resistance in accordance with Specification Section 26 0526 — Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems and submit a report to Design Professional stating the results. C. Prior to acceptance of the electrical installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner, or his designated representatives, all essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. Owner instruction shall be provided for the following systems: Sections Description Hrs. on Site Hrs. off Site Presented By Dthers Present Remarks 26 2815 lElectrical Dist. System lContractor 1 REMARKS: 1. Perform complete system test at time of instruction. D Contractor shall submit to the Design Professional a certificate signed by the Owner stating the date, time, and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-5 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that the contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to the Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: NAMES DATE HOURS D. Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: cd .. E. a (Whtractor's Representative: O Owner's Representative: signature date signature date ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-6 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.14 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Divisions 00 and 01. B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.15 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Design Professional at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. v B. Manufacturers, who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having then duct�gjecte time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rem pluct sh be the responsibility of the Contractor and/or the manufacturer. cl w �,-- — C. If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be ±iAf,�Wg spagsibili assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' abo �, ;r-�Ontf'actor assume all responsibility for physical dimensions, operating characteristics, an*at�othw resin changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by=tither trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. `l) D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The entire electrical system including all sub -systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to the Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1 17 CHANGES IN THE WORK A Refer to Divisions 00 and 01. B_ The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Contract Change Order and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. C. The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantial data to permit evaluation. A Change Order in excess of $300.00 shall be submitted with each item listed individually with a material cost and labor unit extension. Overhead and profit, as mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor shall be added to material and labor cost figures. D. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor before proceeding with any change to satisfy himself that the change has been properly authorized in behalf of the Owner. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-7 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.18 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non -hazardous and ready for normal use by the Owner. B. When all the electrical work is complete Contractor shall thoroughly clean all material and equipment installed as a part of this contract and leave all equipment and material in new condition. C. Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.19 ACCESS DOORS A. When the Electrical Contractor provides any equipment requiring periodic servicing which will be concealed by non -accessible architectural construction, the Electrical Contractor shall provide a flush access door. The access door shall be equal to a Karp DSC -211 Universal access door or Nystrom APWB or type for the specific construction involved. B. Access doors in fire rated construction shall be fire rated and have U.L. label. C. Construction: 1. Door and trim shall be 13 gauge steel, frames shall be 16 gauge steel. 2. Trim shall be of one piece construction. 3. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive baked grey enamel. 4. Hinges shall be concealed, offset, floating hinge. 5. Locks shall be flush, screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam -and -studs. 1.20 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Refer to Specification Division 1 for specific requirements concerning temporary utilities. 1.21 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS A. Prod de equipment housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment. Anchor equipment to copSret@ e%6ipment pads according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations. i 1. _ qn'ttruct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or as required to be 4 inches larger in LLJ o tb adirections than supported unit. Pads to be a minimum of 4" in height unless noted i5kerwise. 2. m iwiia—ll dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise ljMil wated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. �... 3. s_ fell epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. c Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturers setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts according to manufacturer's recommendations and to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Use 3000 -psi compressive strength concrete with #3 rebar 12" O.C. END OF SECTION 26 0010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260010-8 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes the following: 1. Demolition. o—_iC-) o :<t— --o M PART 2 - PRODUCTS rn 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials removed shall be the property of the removing contractor and shall be removed from the site unless otherwise specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Demolition shall be accomplished by the proper tools and equipment for the work to be removed. Personnel shall be experienced and qualified in the type of work to be performed. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. C. Existing Electrical Services: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. D. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 E. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service. Unless noted otherwise, all work associated with telephone system to be by Owner's Telecommunications Supplier. Contractor to coordinate timing and extent of demolition required. 3.04 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of this Section. B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified. C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. E.' Disconnect Arid remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. F. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. G. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. H. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. 3.05 WORK BY OTHERS A. Unless specifically noted under other contracts, Electrical Contractor shall assume all required work shall be performed by him. In general. the following will be performed by others: 1. Mechanical Contractor will disconnect all mechanical services and remove pipe back to behind finish surfaces, close and cap ends of pipe. 3.06 OWNER'S RIGHT OF SALVAGE A. Owner may designate and have salvage rights to any material herein demolished by the Contractor. END OF SECTION=�6 0500 Uj CD tJt— ...... co 7 �Z r r+� COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE 414006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0519 - LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PARTE- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. N 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK C A. Contractor shall furnish all material, tools, labor and supervision necessary e jnstard all wtfig systems. $' a -` n -C w g B. This section describes the basic materials and methods of installation for ge7reo wilRg sylte, e S of 600 volts and less. Wiring for a higher voltage rating, if required, shall bezfsT p_. i� d in r sections or called for on the drawings.ca Z u 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wire, cable and connectors. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL standards pertaining to wire, cable and connectors. C. UL Labels: Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors which have been UL -listed and labeled. D. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA/Insulated Cable Engineers Association standards pertaining to materials, construction and testing of wire and cable. E. ANSI/ASTM: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM standards pertaining to construction of wire and cable. F. The materials used for wiring systems shall be the products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 WIREAND CABLE A. All wire and cable for power, lighting, control and signal circuits shall have copper conductors of not less than 98% conductivity and shall be insulated to 600 V. Conductor sizes #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid, conductor sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. B Minimum size conductors shall be #12 AWG for power and lighting. C. Type of wire and cable for various applications shall be as follows: 1. Type THWN, or XHHW (75 deg. C) - use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in wet and dry locations. 2. Type THHN, or XHHW (90 deg. C) - use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in dry locations only. Use where lighting branch circuit conductors are routed through fluorescent fixture channels. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3. Type MTW, wet and dry locations - use for low voltage signal and control circuits operating at 25 volts or less. 4. Type OF - use where permitted by other sections or by the drawings for underground burial branch circuits. D. For all vibration type installations (i.e. motors, etc), provide stranded type conductors. 2.02 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A. Wiring systems shall be color coded. Conductor insulation shall be colored in sizes up through #8 AWG, conductors #6 AWG and larger shall have black insulation and shall be phase color coded with one-half inch band of colored tape at all junctions and terminations. Colors shall be assigned to each conductor as described below and carried throughout all main and branch circuit distribution. When necessary to use tape, use colored tape on black wire. Do not use colored tape on colored wire. 2.03 CONNECTORS A. In-line splices and taps for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller, use 3M Co. "Scotchlock" vinyl Mated spring connectors, or equal Ideal "wingnut" or Thomas & Betts. Wage wire nuts are also C�lY_ Q Eli I=ndrn' s for conductors No. 6 and larger shall be of compression or split -bolt types, National ctre,s,, pomas & Betts, Blackburn or Burndy mechanical connectors, Fill connector voids with -� triEarc-0sulation putty, follow with 3-M Scotch tape #33, minimum 2 layers. WT niXaeTION 3.09 PRA$ARATION A. Wire shall not be installed in the conduit system until the building is enclosed and masonry work is completed. B. Conduit shall be swabbed free of moisture and debris prior to pulling in wiring. Pull mouse through conduits prior to pulling conductors. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All cable for major feeders shall be continuous from origin to termination. unless otherwise indicated. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-2 1201208V.Y 277/480V. Phase 'A' Conductor Black Brown Phase 'B' Conductor Red Orange Phase'C' Conductor Blue Yellow Neutral Conductor White Grey Grounding Conductor Green Green 2.03 CONNECTORS A. In-line splices and taps for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller, use 3M Co. "Scotchlock" vinyl Mated spring connectors, or equal Ideal "wingnut" or Thomas & Betts. Wage wire nuts are also C�lY_ Q Eli I=ndrn' s for conductors No. 6 and larger shall be of compression or split -bolt types, National ctre,s,, pomas & Betts, Blackburn or Burndy mechanical connectors, Fill connector voids with -� triEarc-0sulation putty, follow with 3-M Scotch tape #33, minimum 2 layers. WT niXaeTION 3.09 PRA$ARATION A. Wire shall not be installed in the conduit system until the building is enclosed and masonry work is completed. B. Conduit shall be swabbed free of moisture and debris prior to pulling in wiring. Pull mouse through conduits prior to pulling conductors. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All cable for major feeders shall be continuous from origin to termination. unless otherwise indicated. LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. Splices in branch circuit wires shall be made only in accessible junction boxes. C. All power feeder cable shall be pulled with the use of approved pulling compound or powder. Compound must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which cannot damage raceway. E. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow surface contours, where possible. F. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. G. The continuity of circuit conductors shall not be dependant on service connections such as lamp holders, receptacles, etc., where the removal of such devices would interrupt the continuity. H. Provide separate green ground conductor throughout entire electrical system. I. All branch circuits shall have dedicated neutrals. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL C-1 A Prior to energizing system, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry, and a%s short circ`,i Q Correct malfunctions when detected. "`."' c 7" z B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION 26 0599 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK M13 C� A. Extent of grounding work is indicated by drawings and shall comply with NEC5 :ca B. Applications of grounding work in this section include the following: n–C o — 1. Service equipment. fir" 2 Enclosures. rn 3. Equipment. C") k C. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in these specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to materials and installation of electrical grounding systems, associated equipment and wiring. Provide grounding products which are UL -listed and labeled. B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 and 869 pertaining to electrical grounding and bonding. C. IEEE Compliance'. Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 142 and 241 pertaining to electrical grounding. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. Materials and Components General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type unit meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated. 2. Raceways. Provide raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings complying with Division 26, Section 26 0533 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 3. Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING A. General: Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding system with other work C. Install clamp -on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. D. Provide separate green ground conductor throughout entire electrical system sized as required by the NEC END OF SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2 r__: c.; aai i N GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide materials, labor and supervision as necessary to provide hangers and supports for conduit, fixtures and equipment, 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE o A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and insfllon-f electrical supporting devices. B. ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NE�td.d5Ab. NP -713 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies". ;-<r- v f�� 10 C. NECA Compliance. Comply with National Electrical Contractors Assoc �k1@T+YS Ztal Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports, and equipm9nt mounting. D. UL Compliance' Provide electrical components which are UL -listed and labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. General: Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation, and as herein specified. Where more than one type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. B. Conduit Cable Supports: Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for non -armored type electrical cables in risers, construct for rigid metal conduit; type wire as indicated; construct body of malleable iron casting with hot dip galvanized finish. C. U -Channel Strut Systems: Provide U -channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 16-guage hot dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated, construct with 9/16" dia. holes, 8" o.c. on top surface, with standard green finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match with U -channel. 1. Fixture hangers. 2 Channel hangers. 3. End caps. 4. Beam clamps. 5. Wiring stud. 6, Thinwall conduit clamps. 7. Rigid conduit clamps. 8. Conduit hangers. 9 U -bolts. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D. Manufacturer Subject to compliance with requirements, provide channel systems of one of the following: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc. 2 Thomas & Betts, Superstrut 3, Unistrut Div., Tyco International 4. Globestrut PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work C. Conduit hangers and support devices shall be approved type for the method of supporting required. All hangers and supports shall have galvanized finish or other approved corrosion resistance finish. In general, hangers and supports shall be as follows 1. Where single or multiple run of conduit is routed on surface of structure; use conduit clamps mounted on U -channel strut so as to maintain not less than 1" clearance between conduit and structure. 2 Where single run of conduit is suspended from overhead; use split ring conduit clamp suspended by 3/8" steel drop rod. 3. Where multiple parallel runs of conduit are suspended from overhead; use split ring conduit clamps uniformly spaced and supported on trapeze hangers fabricated of C_� U -channel stud suspended by not less than two steel drop rods. c.t ,!t re circuit voltage is above 600 volts, conduit clamps shall be provided with insulating o_ �ghings of dielectric strength as required. ,J � e-�ere conduit is buried in concrete floor topping: anchor conduit to structural floor with r- >'OR hole jiffy clamps. e ,� _4.< w.tn� (a ei°y . JW NL4amum hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with NEC L; D. Hangers and supports shall be anchored to structure as follows; Hangers and supports anchored to poured concrete. use malleable iron or steel concrete inserts attached to concrete forms. 2. Hangers or supports anchored to precast concrete, use self -drilling expansion shields. Expansion shields may be used where concrete inserts have been missed or additional support is required in poured concrete 3. Hanger or supports anchored to structural steel, use beam clamps and/or steel channels as required by structural system. 4 Hangers or supports anchored to metal deck, use spring clips or approved welding pins_ Maximum permissible load on each hanger shall not exceed 50 pounds. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 5. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls. 6, Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction. E. The following is not permitted: 1. Attaching supports and hangers to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, oconduit. 2. Use of powder -actuated anchors. 73 � YY --t -< 3. Drilling of structural steel members. c >-C o' F. Fixtures on or acoustical ceilings shall not be supported directly -lCi ort6FPg tH@. Pi -1031 plastered metal bar hangers or U -channel strut attached to ceiling supports. w G. Where disconnect switches and panels cannot be mounted on wall, provide su"ort racks fabricated of structural steel or U -channel strut. H. Provide concrete bases and pads for transformers, switchgear, free standing panels, generators, outdoor lighting poles and other equipment requiring bases, except where drawings indicate that such bases and pads are to be furnished by the General Contractor. Furnish all equipment anchor bolts and installation for their proper and accurate location. All concrete work and reinforcing shall comply with General Specifications. END OF SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete conduit systems. B. Conduit systems shall be provided for all wiring, except where the drawings or other sections of the specifications indicate that certain wiring may be installed in cable trays, surface raceway, underfloor raceway, wireways and/or auxiliary gutters. C. Types of raceways in this section include the following: "mac? : 1. Electrical metallic tubing.�- 2. Flexible metal conduit. t,n CD 3. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. E'er D. Provide factory painted red conduit for fire alarm system.' E. Contractor shall furnish all material, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install electrical boxes and fittings as required by drawings and specifications. F. Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following: 1. Junction boxes. 2. Pull boxes. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems, and provide products and components which have been UL -listed and labeled. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems. D. The materials used in the fabrication of the raceway system shall be products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. E. NEC compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. F. UL Compliance: Provide electrical boxes and fittings which have been UL -listed and labeled. G ANSI/NEMA Standards Compliance: Comply with ANSI C 134.1 (NEMA Standards Pub No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet -steel outlet boxes, covers and box supports RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Thin wall, electrically welded cold rolled steel conduit, galvanized inside and out by electro galvanized process. Baked clear elastic enamel coating in and out. Use for installations in stud walls, masonry walls, above suspended ceilings and where exposed. Size limited to 2 1/2" and smaller. C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound electro galvanized steel strip. Use for final connections to all motor operated equipment such as unit heaters, fans, air handling units, pumps, generators, generator enclosures and connections to dry type transformer, connections from junction boxes to lighting fixtures in accessible ceiling, and for wiring within casework and millwork. D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound steel strip, with water and oil tight neoprene jacket. Use for final connection to equipment listed in paragraph "D" above when located in wet areas. E. MC cable will not be allowed. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Metallic Tubing Fittings: Compression type galvanized malleable iron or steel, water and concrete tight. B. Flftle Metal Conduit Fittings: Squeeze or screw type galvanized malleable iron or steel with `6 n)6n insulated throats. 13 Li�uidt b,;=lexible Conduit Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or steel, with watertight gaskets, "@27rinj--M1 retainer, and nylon insulated throats. G nduW� .ft tings: Exposed conduit fittings shall be condulet type for all sharp turns, tees, etc. 0 E. (terve Mtional Electrical Code requirements for insulated bushings on 1-1/4 inch and larger cS?iduits. Double locknuts and fibre bushings with threads fully engaged are required. 1-1/4 inch and larger EMT connectors, if used, must also accommodate insulated bushings with threads fully engaged. T & B "Insuline" or Appleton insulated throat connectors are acceptable in lieu of separate bushings. F. Provide Sealtite for the last 3of feeder/circuit for all vibration type equipment (i e. motors, transformers. etc). 2.03 WIREWAYS A. General: Provide electrical raceways of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses), number of channels, for each type service indicated. Provide complete assembly of raceway including, but not necessarily limited to, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints. adapters, hold down straps, end caps.. and other components and accessories as needed for complete system. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable provisions of NEC for electrical raceways. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 2.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Construction, sizes and installation of pull and junction boxes shall comply with NEC, Article 370. B. Pull and junction boxes not specifically described in NEC, Article 370, shall be fabricated of heavy gauge galvanized steel with screw or hinged covers, and equipped with corrosion resistant screws and hardware. C. Pull and junction boxes for installation in poured concrete floors shall be flush type, cast iron, with watertight gasketed covers. Boxes for installation in floors with tile or carpet floor curring shall have recessed covers to accommodate the Floor covering- o o »� D. Pull and junction boxes for outdoor installation shall be raintight. -G o PART 3 - EXECUTION �r 3.01 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAY A. In general, all horizontal runs of branch circuit conduit shall be installed - n ceili6plenum. Conduit for convenience outlets, wall mounted fixtures and other wall outlets shalfc-be routed overhead and dropped through wall to the outlet. Branch circuit conduit shall not be installed in concrete floor slabs except where conditions will not permit the conduit to be installed overhead. B. Generally, all conduit shall be concealed, except in crawl spaces, tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms, and at connection to surface panels and free standing equipment, and as otherwise noted. C. Exposed conduit and conduit concealed in ceiling space shall be routed in lines parallel to building construction. D. All conduit runs above suspended acoustical ceilings shall be routed so as not to interfere with tile panel removals with 4'0" to 60" flexible conduit drops from an independent junction box, accessible from below the ceiling, to ceiling mounted equipment E. Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4" trade size except all home runs to panels shall be minimum 1". Where specified size is not called for on drawings or in the specifications,, conduit shall be, sized per NEC. F. Install the conduit system mechanically and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet and to all cabinets, junction or pull boxes. Conduit shall enter and be secured to all cabinets and boxes in such a manner that all parts of the system will have electrical continuity G. PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade unless noted otherwise. H- Support conduit raceway systems in accordance with requirements as set forth in the National Electric Code. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS A. Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Install pull boxes, junction boxes and auxiliary wiring gutters where indicated on drawings and where required to facilitate installation of the wiring. B. For concealed conduit, install boxes flush with ceiling or wall, with covers accessible and easily removable. Where flush boxes are installed in finish ceilings or walls, provide cover which shall exceed the box face dimensions by a sufficient amount to allow no gap between box and finished material. C. Boxes shall not be located in finished, occupied rooms, without prior approval of Design Professional. END OF SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-4 N „_s UJ UJ cm C7r S Q O N RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall provide identification for wiring systems and equipment as called for in this section. -' B. Types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following, �_E-y 1. Conduit color banding. 2. Cable conductor identification - J 3. Equipment/system identification signs. c.� 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining fd electrical marking and labeling identification systems. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of identifying labels and markers for wiring and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application. B. Color -Coded Conduit Markers General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, plastic -sheet conduit markers, extending 360 degrees around conduits; designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive, adhesive lap joint of marker, matching adhesive plastic tape at each end of marker, or pretensioned snap -on. Except as otherwise indicated, provide lettering which indicates voltage, [panel and circuit] of corductor(s) in conduit. 2. Colors: a. 120/208 volt: gray b. 277/480 volt: orange C. Fire alarm: `red * Factory painted. 3. For conduits above ceilings, spray painting of boxes and portions of conduit is acceptable in lieu of banding. For 120/208 volt branch circuits, mark circuit numbers on all junction/pull boxes. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C. Cable/Conductor Identification Bands General: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl -cloth self-adhesive cablelconductor markers of wrap-around type, either pre -numbered plastic coated type, or write -on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap; numbered to show circuit identification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATIONAND INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish, install identification after completion of painting. Conduit Identification Conduit above accessible ceiling spaces shall be identified per 2.01 S. 2. Where electrical conduit is exposed in spaces with exposed mechanical piping which is identified by a color -coded method, apply color -coded identification on electrical conduit in a manner similar to piping identification. 3. Identify junction and pullboxes of systems with stencil lettering for panel and circuit numbers or system type. C. Cable/Conductor Identification 1. General: Apply cable/conductor identification on each cable and conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or communication/signal System are present, except where another form of identification (such as color -coded � Fro�ductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, c_ �s�i drawings, contract documents and similar previously established identification for f CD Cgoject electrical work. Fquipment/System Identification 1- Q§neral: Install engraved plastic -laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication/signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work. a. Motor disconnects & starters. 1. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners; except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate the substrate. END OF SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 2815 - MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00- Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 -General Requirements and Section 260010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. In general, disconnect switches are indicated on the drawings, and it shall be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install all disconnect switches for equipment and motors furnished by him, and for equipment and motors furnished by others. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE o " A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation ofelmtrical meter and circuit disconnect switches. QC-' <m —o B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide motor and circuit disconnect switch&sr,WllicFrhave beep UL -listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds. Pub. No. KST 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each type of motor and circuit disconnect switch required. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers: 1. Bussman 2. General Electric 3. Square D Co. 4. Cutler Hammer 2.02 DISCONNECTS A. All disconnects shall be heavy duty type unless noted otherwise. Disconnects for fractional horsepower motors larger than 1/2 horsepower, for integral horsepower motors, and for equipment of similar capacity shall break all ungrounded conductors and shall be quick -make, quick -break with interlocking covers. C. Disconnects installed indoors shall have NEMA 1 enclosures, disconnects installed outdoors or in wet locations shall have raintight NEMA 3R enclosures. D. All disconnects shall be of the fuse type, except where drawings indicate non -fuse type (N.F.). MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS 262815-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Install motor and circuit disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Install disconnect switches used with motor -driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 26 2815 MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS 262815-2 c.: J C py�m e� n CV MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS 262815-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 2816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide circuit breakers, fuses and motor overload relays and install in disconnect switches and motor starters as required for proper overcurrent protection for service feeders, branch feeders, branch circuits, motors, transformers and other equipment requiring protection. B. Overcurrent protection shall be provided for each conductor and all equipment to open the circuit if the current reaches a value that will cause an excessive or dangerous temperature in conductors or conductor insulation. Circuit breakers shall have frame and trir�4atings as scheduled on drawings. -M C. Types of overcurrent protective devices in this section include the following: w o 1. Circuit breakers _<< rn 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE - A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction anc installation of overcurrent protective devices. B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 489, "Molded -Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures", and UL 198D, "High -Interrupting- Capacity Class K Fuses". Provide overcurrent protective devices which are UL listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std. Pub. Nos. AB 1, AB 2, and SG 3 pertaining to molded -case and low voltage power -type circuit breakers. D. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI C97.1 pertaining to low voltage cartridge fuses. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on overcurrent protective devices, including: amperes, voltages and current ratings, interrupting ratings, current limitations, internal inductive and non -inductive loads, time -current trip characteristic curves, and mounting requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Circuit Breakers a. General Electric Co. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B. All similar products shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation. B. Circuit Breakers - Branch Circuit Panelboards Branch circuit breakers up to 150 amperes shall be GE to match existing panelboards. Breakers shall be plug -on type toggle action with quick -make, quick -break mechanism. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between on and off when the breaker is tripped and by a highly visible red tripped circuit indicator. All multi -pole breakers shall be single -operated handle, internal common trip. Breakers having handle ties but not factory labeled "common trip" will be rejected. UL Class A ground fault circuit protection shall be provided on 120V AC branch circuits as specified on the plans or panelboard schedule. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V AC and carry the SWD marking_ Tandem or "piggyback" breakers providing two circuits from one pole space are prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of overcurrent protective devices with other work. END OF StCTIO1V26 2816 ® G P^ a cti ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 SECTION 26 2923 - VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. �a 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK r A. Variable speed AC motor controllers and all power wiring. Control wiringgLao system caairol components by others. o =tn B. Variable speed AC motor controllers shall be of the "Variable/Adjustable Fre6l;cy"_fit "In r" type drives based on solid state electronics. The adjustable frequency AC ED E a con _ 3 phase, 60 Hertz input power to an adjustable AC frequency and voltage` p�ase-output for controlling the speed of any NEMA MG 1 Design B squirrel cage induction motor. The adjustable frequency drive shall have the following basic design: 1. Converter - Converter shall consist of a modular assembly consisting of a diode rectifier and capacitor assembly which will first convert, then filter and maintain a fixed DC voltage source from the fixed voltage and frequency input. 2. Inverter - Inverter shall consist of a modular assembly consisting of power semiconductors for generation of a sine -coded pulse width modulated (PWM) output waveform. 3. Regulator - Regulator shall consist of a modular assembly. The regulator shall be fully digital and incorporate a microprocessor to control all inverter, converter, and external interface functions. 4. Interface - Interface shall consist of terminal strips for all input and output signals. C. All control instrument components shall be electronic and of industrial control quality and furnished with variable speed motor controllers complete as outlined in these specifications and drawings. D. The variable speed motor controller supplier shall provide all necessary factory and/or field labor for complete calibration and adjustment of the adjustable frequency drives and control components, and shall be responsible for setting all control set points, operating sequences, and alarming systems within the specified control systems to produce the overall system performance as specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data shall include but not be limited to drawings and/or catalog cuts giving physical dimensions, wiring diagrams (control and power diagrams), construction materials, capacities, ratings, control sequencing, manufacturers recommended installation instructions, and any other pertinent information. B. Provide operating and maintenance manuals. VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C Provide recommended spare parts list and prices. Also, the address of the manufacturer's closest parts stocking location shall be provided. D. Include manufacturer's standard product warranty (for not less than a one year period) for replacement of materials and equipment. 1.04 START-UP SERVICE A. The supplier of the variable speed motor controller shall have a factory trained service representative provide start up service and commissioning_ B. Contractor shall coordinate controller parameters with other contractors. 1.05 TRAINING A. The supplier of the variable speed motor controller shall have a factory trained service representative provide eight (8) hours of on-site training for the Owner's personnel advising of the proper methods of maintenance and operation of the controller. B. Additional training time as deemed necessary by the Owner's authorized representative may be obtained from the supplier on a negotiated basis with the Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The variable speed AC motor controllers shall meet all requirements of this section. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows: ty_r',oshibalHouston LLA %Cutler Hammer _. q? eneral Electric 1302 CJtVTf6L RS A_ Wneral:For the purpose of this Part, the word "controller" shall mean variable speed AC motor controller. B The controller shall be mounted in a NEMA ventilated enclosure appropriate for environment. The enclosure size shall be adequate to dissipate the heat generated by the controller within the limits of the specified environmental operating conditions. The door shall be hinged, secured with latch. "Bolt -on" doors are not acceptable C. Ambient service temperature rating shall be from 0 ❑C to 100 The controller shall operate at less than 90% relative humidity non -condensing. The controller shall operate at an altitude less than 1000 meters (3300 feet) above sea level. D. Input power rating shall be 3 Phase, 208 Volts +/- 10%, 60 Hertz +/- 3%. E. The controller shall have a door interlocked incoming AC disconnect with external operator handle which is capable of being locked in the "off' position. The disconnect shall shutdown all input power to both the drive and the bypass circuitry. F. The controller shall have the input fused internally with standard fuses. VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923-2 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 G. Controller shall have an output frequency range of 6 to 66 Hertz and a 11:1 speed range. The frequency regulation shall be +1-.5% of maximum frequency. H. The controller shall provide thermal overload relays on the inverter output for motor protection for each motor controlled Thecontroller shall maintain power factor to .95 or greater throughout its speed range for each motor controlled. J. The controller shall have as a minimum the following protective features: o 1. Short circuit protection. 2. Under/over voltage protection. `�� ca 3. Automatic restarting after a power outage or momentary overvoltage._ o into fault. 4. Ground fault protection, but there shall be no automatic restart groQrrd 0 5. Overcurrent protection.CD �= 6. Supply voltage phase loss protection. ca 7. 8. Over temperature protection. Start into rotating motor protection. The controller shall catch a spinning load without tripping. K. The controller shall be rated for 100% continuous current. The controller shall be capable of providing 110% of rated current for a minimum period of one minute. The controller shall have adjustable current limit. The controller shall have current limited stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, and run conditions. L. The controller shall have process follower inputs for 4-20 mA. Provide bias and gain adjustments for the follower. M. The controller shall provide adjustable linear acceleration and deceleration control, each separately adjustable. The ramp time shall be adjustable from 0.1 to 30 seconds. Longer ramp times shall be optionally available. N. The controller shall provide maximum and minimum frequency control, each separately adjustable. O. The controller shall have internal manually operated bypass circuitry for direct line motor operation. Provide an inverterfline selector switch on the front panel to transfer the motor from the adjustable speed drive to the power line, or from the line to the inverter at zero speed. Motor protection and other safety devices shall be operative in both inverter and line modes. P. The controller shall have a motor contactor at the inverter output. The controller shall also have three contactor bypasses. Q. Fault indicators shall indicate the following fault conditions: 1 Overcurrent. 2. Short circuit. 3. Undervoltage. 4. Overvoltage. 5. Overtemperature. 6. Regulator function error. 7. Ground fault. VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923-3 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 DE #14006 In addition to the fault indicators, the controller shall provide normally open Form C fault contacts to allow remote monitoring of drive conditions. R. The controller shall have as a minimum the following operator controls mounted on the front panel: 1 Manual/Auto selector. 2. Start/Stop switch. 3. Inverter/Line switch. 4. Speed potentiometer. 5. Fault reset. 6. Speed Indicator, S. The controller shall provide adjustable carrier frequency. T. The controller shall have an internal line reactor and EMI/RFI filters. U. Controller shall have serial communications capability with the building automation system via BACnet TCP/IP protocol. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CONTROLLERS A. Irittall controllers as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable reTuirerndyts of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in c$�plig euwith recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. Coordi r4f:with other work including motor and HVAC controls work, as necessary to interface in Ila fnCpf controllers with other work. J T5;— cc;�i�lers shall be mounted and installed on the mechanical equipment room walls weever— possible. When the controllers cannot be wall mounted, the controllers shall be ing5lled on four inch housekeeping pads. Installation of units directly on the floor will not be acceptable. D. Each controller shall have a dedicated raceway for the input power feeder, output power feeder and controls. Raceway shall be separated by at least 6" from other controller feeders and controls raceway. E Equipment manufacturer factory authorized service agent shall be responsible for on-site assistance to the temperature control contractor and the temperature control programmer with device addressing and confirming that the unit communicates with the FMCS as specified. Coordinate with the Controls Contractor and City of Iowa City IT Department for specific BACnet and internet protocol addresses that are to be set in lieu of the factory default address. 3.02 OPERATION A. Manual/Auto System Operation Selector switch in MANUAL mode - operation shall be from the door mounted potentiometer and the system shall be operable from 0-100% on the potentiometer operating between the minimum and maximum speeds as set in the inverter. VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923-4 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 Selector switch in AUTO mode - operation shall be from the input follower signal, with output speed being proportional to the input signal. A remote set of Form C start/stop contacts (furnished by the Temperature Controls Contractor) shall control the inverter. B. StarUStop Switch used to initiate command to start or stop the drive; operates in manual mode. C. Inverter/Line 1. Selector switch in the LINE mode shall disconnect the adjustable frequencyzstem and bypass for direct across -the -line motor operation to the 3 phase, 60 Hertz suppgy. � r 2. Selector switch in the INVERTER mode shall disconnect the 3 pha5,osuy and the system shall operate in the mode as established by the ittal switch. 'q C-) TCr- -n M D. Automatic Restart 1. In the event of a loss of supply line power, or an overvoltage/undervdltage rendition of more than 5%, or in the event of a shutdown signal from the temperature c6litrol or fire detection system, the system shall shut down. When line power is restored, the system shall automatically restart after a time delay, providing the start contact is a maintained contact in the closed position and all external interlocks are satisfied. 2. For motors started frequently, the system shall provide start at almost zero RPM and gradually increase to required speed. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energize controllers and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements; where necessary correct malfunctioning units. END OF SECTION 26 2923 VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923-5 CITY OF IOWA CITY DE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923-6 E� M •:i_ Ca w� O C') �i— r Ca ca cam+ VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923-6 rl� FORM OF PROPOSAL CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 CITY OF IOWA CITY Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: 2:30 PM local time on Thursday, July 10, 2014 0 TO: City Clerkt? 3'"'i City of Iowa City 7C w City Hall o 410 East Washington Street[rn -u M Iowa City, Iowa 52240 0= w In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement and Cgntracting Requirements, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 in strict accordance with the Project Manual and the Drawings dated May 30, 2014, including Addenda numbered and , inclusive, prepared by Design Engineers, for the Base Bid Lump Sum of BASE BID Dollars The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Base Bid amount. BID ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: Remove existing hot water parallel with variable speed drives controlled differential pressure sensor for control of pumps ADD the Sum of: pump and controller. Install two new pumps in by the building automation system. Install new Dollars Alternate No. 2: Replace existing circuit setters, air vents, strainers and connecting piping for 36 VAVs. ADD the Sum of: Dollars FP -1 The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract will be submitted within 24 hours of bid opening by the apparent lowest responsive, responsible bidder. NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before November 26, 2014. a Firm: Title: Address: Phone: Contact: FP -2 --lC7- Signature: -L ��Kz w Printed Name:" Title: Address: Phone: Contact: FP -2 Bidder Status Form To be completed by all bidders Part A Please answer "Yes" or "No" for each of the following: ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is authorized to transact business In Iowa. (To help you determine if your company is authorized, please review the worksheet on the next page). ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has an office to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company's office in Iowa is suitable for more than receiving mail, telephone calls, and e-mail. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has been conducting business in Iowa for at least 3 years prior to the first request for bids on this project. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is not a subsidiary of another business entity or my company is a subsidiary of another business entity that would qualify as a resident bidder In Iowa. If you answered "Yes" for each question above, your company qualifies as a resident bidder. Please complete Parts B and D of this form. If you answered "No" to one or more questions above, your company is a nonresident bidder. Please complete Parts C and D of this form. a�agffi�=�a To be completed by resident bidders Pad My company has maintained offices in Iowa during the past 3 years at the following addresses: Dates: /_ to --/ / Address:_ ^' City, State, Zip: �_ r D"t Dates: to Address: City, State, Zip: -ren "" w Dates: to / Address:`r You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. City, State, Zip: _ To be completed by non-resident bidders Part C 1. Name of home state or foreign country reported to the Iowa Secretary of State: 2. Does your company's home state or foreign country offer preferences to bidders who are residents? ❑ Yes ❑ No 3. If you answered "Yes" to question 2, identify each preference offered by your company's home state or foreign country and the appropriate legal citation. You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. To be completed by all bidders Part D I certify that the statements made on this document are true and complete to the best of my knowledge and I know that my failure to provide accurate and truthful information may he a reason to reject my bid. Signature: Date: You must submit the completed form to the governmental body requesting bids M14. Worksheet: Authorization to Transact Business This worksheet may be used to help complete PartA of the Resident Bidder Status form. If at least one of the following describes your business, you are authorized to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is currently registered as a contractor with the Iowa Division of Labor. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a sole proprietorship and I am an Iowa resident for Iowa income tax purposes ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a general partnership orjoint venture. More than 50 percent of the general partners orjoint venture parties are residents of Iowa for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My blisineSS is an active corporation with the Iowa Secretary of State and has paid all fees required by the Secretary of State, has filed its most recent biennial report, and has not filed articles of dissolution. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a corporation whose articles of incorporation are filed in a state other than Iowa the corporation has received a certificate of authority from the Iowa secretary of state, has filed its most recent biennial report with the secretary of state, and has neither received a certificate of withdrawal from the secretary of state nor had its authority revoked. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in this state and the statement has not been cance ed. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in a state other than Iowa, has filed a statement of foreign qualification in Iowa and a statement of w,, cancellation has not been filed. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership which has filed a certificate of limited partnership in this state, and has not filed a statement of termination. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership ora limited liability limited partnership whose certificate of Hinted partnership is filed in a state other than Iowa, the limited partnership or limited liability imited partnership has received notification from the Iowa secretary of state that the application for certificate of authority has been approved and no notice of cancellation has been filed by the limited partnership cr the limited liability limited partnership. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in Iowa and has not filed a statement of termination. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in a state other than Iowa, has received a certificate of authority to transact business in Iowa and the certificate has not been revoked or canceled. �s C) �'. W w,, 06-17-14 Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Engineering Division of Public Works, 410 E. Washington St„ Iowa City, IA 52240, (319)356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 14-198 RESOLUTION APPROVING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CON. - TRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACMENT PROJECT 2014, ESTABLISHING AMOUNT OF BID SECURITY TO ACCOMPANY EACH BID, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE TO BIDDERS, AND FIXING TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS. WHEREAS, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project was published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held, and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in City Hall Other Projects in CIP account # G4707. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA THAT: 1. The plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above- named project shall be in the amount of 10% (ten percent) of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice, not less than 4 and not more than 45 days before the date for fling the bids, for the receipt of bids for the construction of the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the city. 4. Sealed bids for the above-named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at the City Hall, before 2:30 p.m. on the 10`" day of July, 2014. At that time, the bids will be opened by the City Engineer or his designee, and thereupon referred to the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next regular meeting, to be held at the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, at TOO p.m. on the 15'h day of July, 2014, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. Passed and approved this 17`n day of June, 2014. ATTEST: CITY ZIEPK MAYOR Approved by City Attorney's Office 5..Nrpp,ovo Pl—LS,e THE CW( HALL NORTH COURT HJ,1CREPVAMENTPROJECTPOTad- Resolution No. 14-198 PvIBe 2 It was moved by Payne and seconded by Botchway the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS - A BSZ,IT: Botchway Dickens Dobyns Hayek Mims Payne Throgmorton � n. (YT ��V 7v Printer's Fee S CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, ]OHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS-CnU'N FED, ID#42-0\13�3r 0670 �• „�CrL,�V� being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said Paper, Ir_ time(s), on the following datel Legal Clerk Subscribed and sworn to be re me this _.L.— day of 1 Dr 20' r e or OFFICIAL PUBLICATION NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2074 IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 in said City at 7 P.m. on the 17th day of June, 2014, said meeting to lie held in the Emma J. Hareat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereaf- teras posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form Of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk In City Hall In Iowa City, Iowa, and may be Inspected by any inter acted persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments con- cerning said plansspecifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement, This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, lona and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARP, CITY CLERK Issaoo Is, Juneg,2014 ' NOM Public k�Al RACNELS ALLA N,huber76e515 ISp (�`pm011ssi My Commfsslon Exp '� t?JOfii2G1G or OFFICIAL PUBLICATION NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2074 IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 in said City at 7 P.m. on the 17th day of June, 2014, said meeting to lie held in the Emma J. Hareat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereaf- teras posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form Of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk In City Hall In Iowa City, Iowa, and may be Inspected by any inter acted persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments con- cerning said plansspecifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement, This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, lona and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARP, CITY CLERK Issaoo Is, Juneg,2014 ' Fee CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS-CI'FIZBN 111-0330670 I, N being duly sworn, say that 1 an the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN,a newspaper published in old county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper time(s), on the following datil Legal Clerk Subscribed and sworn to before me this $_ day o/f� Notary public r,Iec u^ CtACHEL SHALLA ,ay A v Com mission Number7d1715 z .!s! cv; My Commission Expires 1 210 6120 1 6 deims and damages of any kind OFFICIAL PUBLICATION caused directly or indirectly by the NOTICE TO BIDDERS operation of the contract, and shall CITY HALL NORTH COURT also guarantee the maintenance of HVAC REPLACEMENT the improvement for a period of PROJECT 2014 one (1 ) year(s) from and after its Sealed proposals will be received completion and formal acceptance by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa by the City Council, City, Iowa, before 2:30 PM, on the The following limitations shall 10th day of July, 2014. Seaddd apply to this Project: proposals will be opened immedi_ Substantial Completion Date: the City Enbyfaxeer November 26, 2014 or designee. or designee. Bids submitted by fax Bids Specified Final Completion Date: machine shall not deemed a "sealed Deoember 19, 2014 Liquidated Damages'. $1,117.00 bid" for purposes of this per day Project. Proposals received atter this deadline will be returned the The plans, specifications and pro - bidder unopened. Proposals will be i posed contract documents may be d at on by the CityCouncilErn examined at the office of the City meacteting meeting to held J. g the Emma J. Cleric Copies of said plans and Horvat Hall, at . the 15th P.M. specifications and form of proposal day July, 2014, 014, t ata special .blanks may be secured at in meeting called for that purpose. that Taehnigraphics, a division of The Project will involve the follow- Rapids Reproductions located at in 415 Highland Ave, Sults 100, Iowa the removal and replacement of City, Iowa 52240, Phone :319-354 the City Hall North Court Trane 5550 Fax:319-354-8973 Toll -Free HVAC unit serving areas of the 600-779-0093 by bona fide bid - City Hall facility. The work will cars. A $50.00 refundable fee is involve provisions to address pressurization Issues in the sys- -required for each set of plans and tem and an installation of an open specifications provided to bidders platform networked digital con- aother interested persons_ The trols for all new equipment as well fee shall be in the form ofacheck, as upgrading the controls for all made payable to Technlgraphies. terminal boxes associated with The fee will be mwrned If the plans the replaced HVAC units. are returned in unmarked and reus- There will be a recommended pre- able condition within 15 days of bid meeting held on site, at City Council Award. A separate and Hall, starting at 10:00 a.m. in the nonrefundable $15.00 shipping Halling Conference room at 410 and handling fee will apply to plans East Washington Street, on that are sent through postal mall. Thursday, June 26, 2014_ Prospective bidders are advised All work is to be done in stnct that the City of Iowa City desires to compliance with the plans and employ minority contractors and specifications prepared by Design subcontractors oa City projects. A Engineers, of Cedar Rapids, owa, I listing of minority contractors can which have heretofore been be obtained from the I...Department approved the Council, and of Economic are file for public e examination in Development at (515) 242-4721 O the Office of the City Clerk. of the it and the Iowa Department of Each proposal shall be completed Transportation Contracts Office at on furnished by the City and (515) 239-1422. mustst be be accompanied in ase Bidders shall list on the Farm of envelope, Separate from the one one Proposal the names of persons, containing the proposal. a firms, companies or other parties bond executed by a corrpp orationon with whom the bidder Intends to authorized to contract as a surety subcon4'act. This list shall include in the State Iowa, in the sum of the type of work and approximate 10% of the bid. The aid security bi subcontract amount(s). shall be made pay-cable to the The Contractor awarded the con- TREASURER OF THE CITY OF tract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed sub - forfeited to the City of Iowa Qty in the event the Successful bidder ties, unit prices and extended dol - fails to enter into a contracts thinCity lar amounts. ten calendar days of the City By virtue of statutory authalty, Council's Council's award of the contract preference must be given to prad- and post bond satisfactory to the rets and provisions grown and City ensuring the faithful pedoi coal produced within the State of mance of the contract and mainte- Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor pante said Project, if required, to the extent lawfully required pursuantnt to the proof this under Iowa Statutes, The Iowa notice notice and the other contract dost reciprocal resident bidder prefer - Bid bonds the lowest enee law applies to this Protest, iso, o. wo more bidders s may be The City reserves the right to retaineedd for a paned of not to reject any or all proposals, and also fifteen (15) calendar days reserves the right to waive tefirri folloexceed award of the contract or calities and Irregularities. until nejeing bond rejection is made. Other bid Published upon order of the City bonds will returned after the Council of Iowa City, Icwa. tabulation canvass andrepored o bids is completed and reported to the City INARIAN K, KARR, CITY CLERK Council. The successful bidder will be 11 e: livor, June 23, 2014 required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred per- cent ill of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Engineering Division, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319)356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 14-213 - RESOLUTION AWARDING CONTRACT AND AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR TO SIGN AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST A CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACMENT PROJECT 2014. WHEREAS, Modern Sheet Metal, Inc. of Cedar Rapids, IA has submitted the lowest responsible bid of $269,900.00 for construction of the above-named project; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in City Hall Other Projects in CIP account # G4707. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: 1. The contract for the construction of the above-named project for the base bid is hereby awarded to Modern Sheet Metal, Inc., subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign the contract for construction of the above-named project and the Contractor's Bond, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 3. The Director of the Parks and Recreation Department is authorized to execute change orders as they may become necessary in the construction of the above-named project. Passed and approved this 15' day of July 2014. Ak� MAYOR J/ Approved by ATTEST: CITY CLERK City Attorney's Office It was moved by Throgmorton and seconded by Dobvns the Resolution be adopted, and uaon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: X Botchway X Dickens X Dobyns X Hayek X Mims X Payne X Throgmorton 5'.1E,NG1PlM esolutlun5WnyEq Resolutlonslhwaitl OontmMTHE Cltt HALL NO PTH COURT HVAC REhhCMENT FROJ�T2%4-Award 10 Idotleni SheN M ala[,esolullon July 1520141 Jou ]l14 06-02 3- d== Prepared by, Ku mi Morris, Public Works, 410 E. Washington Sl., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 15-174 RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 WHEREAS, the Engineering Division has recommended that the work for construction of the City Hall North Court HVAC Replacement Project 2014, as included in a contract between the City of Iowa City and Modern Sheet Metal, Inc., of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, dated July 15, 2014, be accepted, and WHEREAS, the Engineer's Report and the performance and payment bond have been filed in the City Clerk's office, and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the in City Hall Other Projects in CIP account # G4707, and WHEREAS, the final contract price is $273,398.12. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 2nd day of June, 2015 MAYOR ATTEST:_ )1 CIT LERK It was moved by Payne and seconded by adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: M X NAYS: A roved by It Zia - City Attorney's Office Botchway the Resolution be ABSENT: Botchway Dickens Dobyns Hayek Mims Payne Throgmorton S 1E34G\P1MRasoluhcns\P,ol y R.,,OA onrWccoP1 PmjocllClty Hall NoM Court HVAC Replacement Project 2014 Accept P•,,Jecl an June 2 2015 doc 5115 i CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 410 E WASHINGTON ST IOWA CITY, IOWA CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ISSUE DATE: 30 MAY 2014 MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: DESIGN ENGINEERS 8801 PRAIRIE VIEW LANE SW SUITE 200 CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA 52404 PHONE: 319.841.1944 CONTACT: TIM LENTZ (TIML@DESIGNENGINEERS.COM) - MECHANICAL BRAD DESERANO (BRADD@DESIGNENGINEERS.COM) - ELECTRICAL JOSH PEARCE (JPEARCE@M2BENGINEERS.COM) - STRUCTUAL INDEX OF DRAWINGS: T1.0 I hereby certify that this engineering document was H1.0 prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision S1.0 and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer H1.1 under the laws of the State of Iowa. HD1.0 LOWER LEVEL HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN Dwight Clopton Schumm Date SECOND FLOOR HVAC PLAN Iowa Registration No. 13694 FIRST FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN My license renewal date is December 31, 2014. THIRD FLOOR HVAC PLAN Pages or sheets covered by this seal: SECOND FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN T1.0, HD1.0, HD1.1, HD1.2, HD1.3, HD1.4, 1-11.0, H1.1, H1.2, H1.3, H1.4, H5.0, H5.1, H5.2 HD1.3 THIRD FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: DESIGN ENGINEERS 8801 PRAIRIE VIEW LANE SW SUITE 200 CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA 52404 PHONE: 319.841.1944 CONTACT: TIM LENTZ (TIML@DESIGNENGINEERS.COM) - MECHANICAL BRAD DESERANO (BRADD@DESIGNENGINEERS.COM) - ELECTRICAL JOSH PEARCE (JPEARCE@M2BENGINEERS.COM) - STRUCTUAL INDEX OF DRAWINGS: T1.0 I hereby certify that this engineering document was H1.0 prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision S1.0 and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer H1.1 under the laws of the State of Iowa. HD1.0 LOWER LEVEL HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN Lynn A Boettcher Date SECOND FLOOR HVAC PLAN Iowa Registration No. 7600 FIRST FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN My license renewal date is December 31, 2014. THIRD FLOOR HVAC PLAN Pages or sheets covered by this seal: SECOND FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN S1.0 ROOF HVAC PLAN HD1.3 MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: DESIGN ENGINEERS 8801 PRAIRIE VIEW LANE SW SUITE 200 CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA 52404 PHONE: 319.841.1944 CONTACT: TIM LENTZ (TIML@DESIGNENGINEERS.COM) - MECHANICAL BRAD DESERANO (BRADD@DESIGNENGINEERS.COM) - ELECTRICAL JOSH PEARCE (JPEARCE@M2BENGINEERS.COM) - STRUCTUAL INDEX OF DRAWINGS: T1.0 TITLE SHEET H1.0 LOWER LEVEL HVAC PLAN S1.0 STRUCTURAL PLAN H1.1 FIRST FLOOR HVAC PLAN HD1.0 LOWER LEVEL HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN H1.2 SECOND FLOOR HVAC PLAN HD1.1 FIRST FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN H1.3 THIRD FLOOR HVAC PLAN HD1.2 SECOND FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN H1.4 ROOF HVAC PLAN HD1.3 THIRD FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN H5.0 HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS HD1.4 ROOF HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN H5.1 HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS H5.2 HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS t - «r i� Z 7� st 0 H 2,st v� PA h Kinnn:k Stadium Blood Center;Za F- m Luxury Honles r> t�4 (;r,;irFtf lir. Iowa " '^t IA J r x'a County of .fahnson ,¢ . Greyhound Lines L[?!i InStihlti a ole capitol Fduseurn CITY HALL Churci- S" _ t North t i .•• ! � �_ — n Friends Meeting Mercy iowa City z f'1 E malkel , T Attorney Office ss. 00 t: ui, r1a [7 a K Sf Eic�weF y E Renton St St o � M � +,1 Oak 17rave Park Jn�rscr i;cun!V,4Ldi?nr Wif• $� W Benton Si�31r� { westwinds heat l Estate Services. Inc Benton 1.0 Park I•ampton nn IGwa Kirkwood Ave Plum Grove 0 SITE MAP NOT TO SCALE PROJECT NOTES: ^.`lendan Air ._ Kirkwood Ave Church of Christ :r SCOPE OF WORK: 1. In general, the existing rooftop unit, curb and associated exterior ductwork are to be removed which serve the City of Iowa City City Hall basement, first and second floors. New rooftop unit, structural stand, and associated exterior ductwork are to be provided as specified per plans. Controls for 36 VAV with hot water boxes will be replaced with direct digital controls. 2 exhaust fans will be relocated and 4 existing exhaust fans will be added to the BAS. One existing pump will be added to the BAS. A server room cooling unit will be replaced with a mini—split cooling unit. Alternate 1: Demo existing hot water pump. Install two new pumps as listed in pump schedule. Provide variable frequency drives for both new pumps. Control pumps for variable flow as listed on the plans. Alternate 2: Provide new circuit setters, air vents, strainers and interconnecting piping for VAV reheat coils. 2. It is anticipated that the existing units can be removed and new units can be lifted into location by setting a crane on the northeast side of the building, in a parking lot. 3. Existing roof membrane shall be protected completely from all construction activities and is not intended to be modified in any way except where noted at specific curbs. Scope of roof protection shall include any surface intended to be walked upon more than once. Any equipment, storage boxes, or demolished materials that are to remain on the roof longer than one day shall be placed on roof protection. All roof protection shall be constructed as shown in Roof Protection Detail on sheet H5.1. 4. The third floor roof where the rooftop unit is located was originally installed by Firestone. All roof work materials shall be compatible with Firestone roofing system. SCHEDULE OF WORK: 1. Schedule of work is to be coordinated through the Owner's representative and to be performed at the convenience of the Owner. In general, all work at site shall be limited in duration. The facility will be occupied by the Owner during the work period. Timing for shutdown to be coordinated through the Owner's representative a minimum of 10 days in advance, and shall be dependent on actual weather conditions: a. Substantial completion shall be no later than November 26, 2014. b. Final completion shall be no later than December 19, 2014, 2. Shutdown of existing rooftop unit shall be for a single period of no more than 10 consecutive days. Shutdown period may take place between October 13, 2014 and November 26, 2014. Final approval of shutdown period to be coordinated with Owner's representative. a. Suggested schedule for shutdown • Day 1: Disconnect exhaust fans, extend ducts to new fan location. Disconnect existing RTU electrical and ductwork. Set crane, construct structural support stand, place roofing materials / ducts on roof, remove old RTU, remove crane. • Day 2: Construct structural support stand. Demo old ductwork and rooftop curbs. Patch roofing as required. • Day 3: Construct structural support stand. Install exhaust fans in new locations. • Day 4: Set crane, set new rooftop unit on stand, remove crane. • Day 5: Start up exhaust fans. • Day 6: Extend ducts to new unit. • Day 7: Connect RTU ductwork. • Day 8: Connect RTU electrical. • Day 9: Start up new rooftop unit. • Day 10: Float day b. Contractor to perform work inside the building prior to or during the rooftop unit shutdown period. C. Contractor to have all required materials onsite prior to commencing work. d. Work inside or on roof shall be continuous once started. z 0 V) U) V) o�w > Z U W 00 Q!� 00 0 7-4 � 0 N U � Q J O W Q �OUO W< L Z Q 0 ~ W JiU Q W K = 2 � ��z D U z 0 V) U) V) o�w > Z U W 00 Q!� 00 p 7-4 � 0 U � _:y O W �OUO U W = CL ��z LLJ = O O w U) LLz:E w J U ~ Q U w U � iT p 7-4 � =tr o _:y O Z�a �Wz W U � 7 L a U W ZJ w W U z Q U riloa, JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET T100 FIRST FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" REFER TO SHEET HD1.4 FOR DEMOLITION NOTES DEMOLITION KEY TO BE REMOVED/REVISED TO REMAIN — — — — — SINGLE LINE SINGLE LINE �-77 7 DOUBLE LINE 1 1 1 DOUBLE LINE EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT Z O H U O W � � Hv, D > z U W 00 C;� U O Z 0 Q r N CD In L� J 0 ry UZ O W :D LJ \W U O LnZ ��z U H o Q O W Q LL ch� w _ � � U Z O H U O W � � Hv, D > z U W 00 C;� U O 0 Zl C JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET HD1 A Z Q r CD In CN UZ O :D LJ F-- U O ��z o O -z O W U LL w J � > Q U Q 2 I— 2 U W O U LL U > � cf) 0 Zl C JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET HD1 A GENERAL HVAC DEMOLITION NOTES: 1. Refer to demolition key for items to be removed versus items to remain. 2. All penetrations to be patched and fire stopped to match the fire rating of the surrounding structure. Refer to architectural plans for required fire ratings. Coordinate patching and fire stopping requirements of existing structure with General Contractor. 3. Where ductwork or piping through a floor or a wall is removed, patch all remaining holes to match existing. 4. All asbestos to be abated under a separate contract. 5. Notify the owner's representative prior to creating any smoke, heat, moisture, vapors or dust around any fire alarm equipment. 6. Shut down of existing water, steam, condensate, natural gas or other systems to be requested through Owner's representative a minimum of seven working days prior to shutdown. Actual shutdown to be scheduled at Owners convenience. 7. Contractor to be responsible for the removal and replacement of all existing ceilings outside of the new project area as needed for associated work. 8. Schedule for all work impacting adjacent occupied areas shall be coordinated with the Owner's representative. Work to be performed in a manner that minimizes the interruptions and inconvenience to the Owners occupancy of these spaces. 9. For all work required above existing ceilings to remain, Contractor is responsible for removal and replacement of all ceiling tile as required to accomplish work. Refer architectural reflected ceiling plans for types and extent of both existing and new ceilings throughout project. HVAC DEMOLITION NOTES: HD-1 Existing to remain. HD -2 Remove rooftop unit serving City Hall basement, first floor, and second floor completely. Remove Trane Tracer controls wiring back to indoor Tracer panel. Disconnect electrical service to unit for reconnection to new unit. Remove roof curb entirely. Patch roof accordingly to match existing roof. Ductwork within building to remain. HD -3 Remove entire Liebert Computer room unit including condenser, blower evaporator coil, thermostat controller, and refrigerant piping. Leave copper condensate drain piping along south wall for use with new split system cooling unit. HD -4 Remove condensate drain from rooftop unit which extends to nearest roof drain. HD -5 Remove direct digital controller, hot water reheat coil control valve, damper actuator, room temperature sensor, and any other DDC controls associated with terminal unit. HD -6 Remove exhaust fans for reinstallation in new location. Salvage electrical disconnect for reinstallation. Demo motor starter for replacement with new DDC motor starter. HD -7 Remove motor starter on exhaust fan for replacement with new DDC motor starter. HD -8 Once rooftop unit is removed, cover ducts openings securely against weather until new ductwork installation begins. HD -9 Remove Trane control head end unit located in maintenance room south of E020. HD -10 Remove Trane control head end units located in mechanical room E024. Verify that all controlled devices are disconnected prior to removal of control units. HD -11 Base bid: Existing pump to remain. Remove pump motor control panel. Alternate 1: Remove pump and motor control panel. ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTES: ED -1 Disconnect and remove disconnect from Leibert unit. Mechanical Contractor shall remove existing Leibert unit as part of demolition. Existing raceway and wiring shall be reused in new work. ED -2 Disconnect and remove power from existing condensing unit on roof. Existing raceway to roof from 1st floor shall be reused in new work. Unit shall be removed by Mechanical Contractor. ED -3 Disconnect power from exhaust fans. Exhaust fans with integral disconnect shall be reused in new work. Remove branch circuit from roof to nearest accessible junction box above ceiling on 3rd floor. ED -4 Rooftop Unit shall be removed. Electrical Contractor shall disconnect power to unit for removal by Mechanical Contractor. Electrical Contractor shall remove existing feeder back to Panel M3 on the 3rd floor. Existing raceway to be reused in new work, refer to new work drawings for additional information. ROOF PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" IL'I DE MOO 1 N KEY TO BE REMOVED/REVISED TO Fe" ----- SINGLE LINE SINGLE LINE 777 DOUBLE LINE 111 �J DOUBLE LINE �� EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT Z O U O W N V) > Z U W 00 0:: 00 W W \1 CD Z Q n O H O w 0 U LL ON L.f0 Z oC z T— CD N (� WV U w � � Z X0 a W U � Q � � 0i>>Ow LL Z G 0JLL] U = Q U W U U Q 2 CD Z Q n O H O w 0 U LL ON L.f0 Z oC JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET ME 111 KA 11 z �W WU a U (� WV ZJ w � W Z a JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET ME 111 KA 11 a 0 T d E 00 Cl N Di N T m FIRST FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" N REFER TO SHEET H5.2 FOR NOTES NEW WORK KEY NEW/REVISED EXIS I M SINGLE LINE SINGLE LINE D DOUBLE LINE D DOUBLE LINE EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT 0 N O M M z H < Q < � p z O (10H U O X W N > zU W 00 ly- U O L� W Q n U Q 2 ry O LL LL JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET Hl A r N U � W �o0 U � Q 0Ow LL Z �; O�w U U w U ry U Q 2 Q n U Q 2 ry O LL LL JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET Hl A m lil W U ME BASE BID MS ��HWS HWS -X) ALTERNATE BID CIRCULATING PUMP CONTROL SCHEMATIC NO SCALE HEATING WATER CIRCULATION PUMPS P-1 Base bid sequence: 1. The pump shall operate continuously based on an on/off signal from the DDC system. 2. If the pump fails to prove operation, an alarm shall sound. If the pump is returned to operation, the alarm shall be silenced. POINTS LIST: BASE BID HEATING WATER CIRCULATION PUMP P-1 A. Analog Inputs 1. None B. Binary Inputs 1. P-1 status 2. Pump fail / reset C. Analog Outputs 1. None D. Binary Outputs 1. P-1 start / stop E. Suggested Alarms 1. Low space temperature HEATING WATER CIRCULATION PUMPS P-1A&1B Alternate 1 sequence: 1. The pump shall operate continuously with one running as lead pump and the other as a backup. Every 30 days, the backup pump shall operate as the lead pump for one day. 2. If the pump fails to prove operation, the backup pump shall start after a 30 second delay and an alarm shall sound. If the lead pump is returned to operation, the backup pump shall automatically stop and the alarm shall be silenced. 3. The pump speed shall be controlled to maintain a constant differential pressure in the heating hot water system at a location representative of system demand. POINTS LIST: ALTERNATE 1 HEATING WATER CIRCULATION PUMPS P-1A&1B A. Analog Inputs 1. Heating supply water differential pressure B. Binary Inputs 1. P -1A status 2. P -1B status 3. Pump fail / reset C. Analog Outputs 1. P -1A speed 2. P -1B speed D. Binary Outputs 1. P -1A start / stop 2. P -1B start / stop E. Suggested Alarms 1. Low space temperature CONTROLS SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS (NOTE: ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY NOT BE REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT.) SPACE SENSOR CO2 T = TEMPERATURE OCC = OCCUPANCY OA = OUTDOOR AIR H = HUMIDITY CO2 = CARBON DIOXIDE AVERAGING/LOW POINT SENSORS T= TEMPERATURE (AVERAGING) F = FREEZE STAT (LOW POINT) SENSOR P =PRESSURE T = TEMPERATURE H = HUMIDITY i=CURRENT t�l� MOTORIZED DAMPER o SMOKEDAMPER DP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR ECM ELECTRICALLY COMMUTATED MOTOR VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MS MOTOR STARTER LR LINE VOLTAGE RELAY EXHAUST FAN EXHAUST O RETURN SUPPLY RELIEF OUTPUT FROM DDC CONTROLLER INPUT TO DDC CONTROLLER N.C. NORMALLY CLOSED N.O. NORMALLY OPEN D4 TWO WAY CONTROL VALVE THREE WAY CONTROL VALVE ® PUMP ® FILTER AFMS AFMS =AIR FLOW MEASURING STATION WFMS = WATER FLOW MEASURING STATION [� (� COMPRESSOR THIRD PARTY CONTROLLER HUMIDIFIER DISPERSION TUBE COIL, ENERGY RECOVERY WHEEL, ETC. DDUCTWORK EXHAUST FAN CONTROL SCHEMATIC (EF -1, EF -2, EF -3, EF -4) NO SCALE EXHAUST SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 1. General: a All existing and relocated exhaust fans shall be controlled with Direct Digital Control (DDC) according to the control' -sequences contained in this section. All points, software programming and hardware, etcetera which are required to meet the following sequences of operation, shall be provided. b. The exhaust fan shall be turned on or off based on the occupancy schedule of the building. Coordinate occupancy schedule with Owner. 2. In occupied mode, the sequence shall be as follows: a. The fan shall be on. b. The damper in the outdoor air gooseneck shall be interlocked with operation of exhaust fan. (EF -4 only) 3. In unoccupied mode, the sequence shall be as follows: a. The fan shall be off. b• The damper in the outdoor air gooseneck shall be interlocked with operation of exhaust fan. (EF -4 only) POINTS LIST A. Binary Inputs 1. Occupied Mode 2. Unoccupied Mode 3. Fan Status B. Binary Outputs 1. Fan Start/Stop C. Suggested Alarm Values 1. Fan Start Failure VAV CONTROL SCHEMATIC (TYPICAL NO SCALE VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS 1. General a. The DDC panel shall index each unit between occupied and unoccupied modes. b. Provide all sensors with adjustable setpoint. 2. In the occupied mode, operation shall be as follows: a. On a rise in space temperature, modulate reheat coil valve closed and modulate supply air damper open. b. On a fall in space temperature, modulate supply air damper to the minimum position, modulate reheat valve open. c. The space temperature setpoint shall be adjustable at the sensor within a range as specified at the DDC panel (+1- 5 deg. F adj. from winter setpoint 70 deg. F, summer setpoint 75 deg. F). d. Monitor the discharge temperature at each zone damper. 3. In the unoccupied mode, operation shall be as follows: a. The reheat coil and supply air dampers shall be modulated as noted above as required to maintain unoccupied heating and cooling set points. POINTS LIST Analog Inputs 1. Supply air flow 2. Space temperature 3. Space set point 4. Discharge air temperature Binary Inputs None Analog Outputs 1. Supply air damper position 2. Reheat control valve position Binary Outputs None Alarms None INPUT OUTPUT ROOF MOUNTED VFD � DUCTWORK �il F M T P EXHAUST UNIT CONTROLLER W/ AXBACNET I IP R UST O RETURN Rbi INTERFACE OUTDOOR AIR DX COIL REPRESENTATIVE ZONE TEMPERATURE T VFD SUPPLY Or DX COMPRESSOR 75O/. nF COMMUNICATIONS TO FRONT END ROOF MOUNTED DUCTWORK RTU CONTROL SCHEMATIC (RTU -4) NO SCALE NOTES 1. MINIMUM POINTS AS INDICATED MAY BE PICKED UP FROM UNIT CONTROLLER BACNET INTERFACE WHERE POSSIBLE 2. ALL SENSORS AND UNIT CONTROLLER PROVIDED BY UNIT MANUFACTURER. UNIT IS CONTROLLED BY PACKAGED CONTROLS AND COMMUNICATES WITH BAS FRONT END OVER BACNET. 1 General: a. All HVAC systems shall be controlled with Direct Digital Control (DDC) according to the control sequences contained in this section. All points, software programming and hardware, etcetera which are required to meet the following sequences of operation, shall be provided. b. The units shall consist of supply fan, DX cooling, filters, powered exhaust, and outdoor air, return air, and relief air dampers. C. The units supply year round air to variable air volume terminal units in the North Court portion of City Hall. The units shall have a factory installed controller which shall monitor and control the unit in a stand-alone mode. The DDC contractor shall install network sensors and interface as required with factory mounted RTU controls. d. The RTU controller shall operate the compressor as required to maintain discharge air temperature. The unit controller shall modulate the economizer to maintain discharge air temperature when free cooling is available. The DDC system shall determine occupied / unoccupied modes according to the occupancy schedule set by the owner. e. Coordinate provision of all required items for complete control of unit as described with unit manufacturer. 2 In occupied mode, the sequence shall be as follows: a. The outdoor air damper shall be open to supply the minimum occupied outdoor airflow. The unit controller shall operate the return air damper and relief air damper as required. b. The supply fan shall be on. Supply fan speed shall modulate to maintain static pressure setpoint at sensor located in supply duct system. Setpoint to be determined during balancing and reset as follows: i. The controller shall poll the VAV terminal units to determine if they are able to maintain their required airflow. If any VAV terminal unit is unable to maintain its required airflow, the static pressure setpoint shall be gradually reset upward. ii. If all VAV terminal units are operating below maximum damper position, the static pressure setpoint shall be gradually reset downward. C. The unit controller shall gradually modulate the compressor and economizer to maintain discharge temperature setpoint utilizing staging of devices as available. d. The powered exhaust fan shall operate as required to maintain building pressure. Setpoint to be determined during balancing. e. The unit shall incorporate freeze protection within its internal controller programming. f. The system shall be provided with optimum start controls. 3. In unoccupied mode, the sequence shall be as follows: a. The outdoor air damper and relief air damper shall be closed and the return air damper shall be open. b. The supply fan shall be off unless there is a call for heating or cooling. C. The unit controller shall operate the compressor, and economizer to maintain unoccupied space temperature setpoint utilizing staging of devices as available. 4. Safeties and Interlocks: a• A high static pressure limit switch shall prevent the supply duct static pressure from rising above 3.9" wg (adjustable). This will be hardwired to de -energize the supply fan. A manual reset will be required. b. A high static pressure limit switch shall prevent the return duct static pressure from rising above 2" wg (adjustable). This will be hardwired to de -energize the exhaust fan. A manual reset will be required. C. If the return air temperature falls below 60 degrees F (adjustable), both the supply fan and the exhaust fan shall be disabled, the outdoor air damper and the exhaust air damper shall be completely closed and an alarm shall register. A. Analog Inputs 1. Discharge Air Temperature 0 2. Return Air Temperature N 3. Mixed Air Temperature U 4. Reference Space Temperature 5. Supply Duct Static Pressure B. Analog Outputs J 1. Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint 2. Space Temperature 3. Supply Duct Static Pressure Setpoint C. Binary Inputs \ 1. Supply Fan Status LLZ 2. Cooling System Status p 3. Economizer Status 4. Dirty Filter Status 5. Exhaust Fan Status D. Binary Outputs U 1. Occupied Mode Q 2. Unoccupied Mode E. Suggested Alarm Values � 1. RTU Alarm 2. Dirty Filter Alarm Q 3. Compressor Fault 4. VFD Fault 5. Discharge High Static Pressure 6. Return High Static Pressure Z O f� ~ H U O ry Ld N H D co > Z U W 00 0� U r-) 0 N N U � W J 0 Q�� W \ LLZ :�E p J W J Z Y U Q Q W U � � � Q U Z O f� ~ H U O ry Ld N H D co > Z U W 00 0� U r-) O U) Q LU 0 Q W 0 LL1 `0`^ vJ Z oCZz uW z W - U Z U< U LLJ V U ZJ w WZ Q U z x U ril 0w f JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET H500 C) N U � w 0 O Q�� O0w LLZ :�E p J w J U U w U � Q O U) Q LU 0 Q W 0 LL1 `0`^ vJ Z oCZz uW z W - U Z U< U LLJ V U ZJ w WZ Q U z x U ril 0w f JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET H500 SEALANT RUN FLASHING UP — UNDER FAN BASE. 2" MINIMUM OVERLAP. ROOFING MATERIAL X HOLE AND FLASHING BY ROOFING CONTR. CUP ANGLES NOTE: FAN TO BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO CURB - SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FAN TO BE MOUNTED LEVEL. AIR VENT WATER COIL PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST STATION. DOSTING NEW/REVISED NEW DUCT STRAINER SHUTOFF VALVE DUCT INSULATION EXHAUST FAN MOUNTED ON ROOF. ROOF CURB DAMPER DUCT TRANSITION TO DAMPER SIZE. CONTROL VALVE (NEW) BALANCING VALVE PIPE HANGER SHALL SUPPORT PIPING INDEPENDENT OF COIL. 3" OVERLAP FLASHING MINIMUM SII__ 12' NEW CURB NEW 6" SELF - ADHEARING SEMI -CURED EPDM NEW 60 MIL EPDM FLASHING FLASHING FULLY -ADHERED - UP AND OVER TOP EXISTING EPDM OF NEW CURB AND DUCT FLASHING MEMBRANE EXISTING STRUCTURAL SUPPORT DUCT CURB DETAIL NO SCALE W W R = 4.5" S = 3.25" MITERED ELBOW WITH i TURNING VANES /// W=W R W RADIUSED ELBOW �\ R? 1.OW I Rt = 0.10•W R2 = 0.25• R3 = 0.50• L ELBOW WITH FULL LENGTH AIR VANES DRAIN UNE SHALL BE AT LEAST THE SAME SIZE AS THE NIPPLE ON THE DRAIN PAN. CLEANOUT PITCH DOWN - TOWARD DRAIN A+1" 1" 1/2 A OPEN DRAIN NOTES: 1. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, THIS DETAIL DOES NOT APPLY FOR FAN COIL UNITS, HEAT PUMPS OR BLOW THROUGH UNITS. 2. "A"=SUCTION PRESSURE OF THE FAN (1-1/2' MINIMUM) 24 GA. GALVANIZED PLATES, CONTINUOUS OVER ALL PLYWOOD SEAMS IS,6. 11911 11 W 3 �I —� 31A (— PLAN VIEW —( r STRUCTURE TW 3•A I ELEVATION L=1 /4W (4 -MIN.) NOTE: DO NOT INSTALL DUCTWORK PLENUMS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DRAIN PAN UNIT A (INCHES) RTU -4 3.5 1" EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION MIN. (1.5 LB DENSITY) 1/2' PLYWOOD EXISTING ROOF MEMBRANE ONE OR TWO HOUR RATED GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLY 1/4' BEAD OF TO USE CHECK VALVE CP-25WB CAULK, 1-2' FIBERGLASS BOTH SIDES OF WALL INSULATION 12'6 MAX. D DUTY VALVE AND STEEL PIPE SOLATION VALVE �— THERMOMETER (SCH. 10 MIN.) CONNECTOR FS -195 WRAP/STRAP 1/2' MIN., 1-1/2" MAX. PRESSURE ANNULAR SPACE i" DEPTH CP-25WB CAULK WALL SECTION BACKEROD PACKING MATERIAL 1/4" TURN 28 GAUGE STEEL SLEEVE BALL VALVE WALL SLEEVE 1/2' (MIN.) 1/4" BEYOND WALL NOTE: VIBRATION ISOLATION 1. MATERIALS AND CONFIGURATION SHOWN BREACH SEALING DETAIL ARE FOR 3M SYSTEM JWL5010 ONE AND TWO HOUR FIRE -STOP AND SPECIFICATIONS) M -1420a 0Jw 2' DEPTH 3M FIRE BARRIER 1/2 ' TO 2' FIBERGLASS OR 25 N/S CAULK INSULA11ON 1" DEPTH MINERAL WOOL = Q W U M J 4-1/2' MIN. SOLID 4-1/2' MIN. SOLID J 1/2' MIN., 2-3/8' MAX. CONCRETE FLOOR ANNULAR SPACE 12'6 MAX. STEEL PIPE (SCH. 10 MIN.) NOTE: 1. MATERIALS AND CONFIGURATION SHOWN FLOOR SEALING DETAIL ARE FOR 3M SYSTEM $CAJ5001 TWO HOUR FIRE -STOP M -1420b 4-1/2' MIN. 1' THICK MINERAL WOOL CONCRETE WALL 1' DEPTH 3M FIRE STEEL SUPPORT ... BARRIER CP 25 CAULK CUPS 0 ---------- SHEET METAL 0 SCREW, TYP. RECTANGULAR 0STEEL HVACDUCT PFRONTVIEW I,. 00' MIN., 4' MAX.ANNULAR SPACE OPTIONAL ANGLEIRON SUPPORTWALL SECTION FRAME DUCTPORT CLIPSFASTENERS 6'X.D.C. MAX. STEEL NOTES: HVAC DUCT 1. MATERIALS AND CONFIGURATION SHOWN BASED ON 3M SYSTEM #CAJ7016 BREACH SEALING DETAIL 2. THIS DETAIL DOES NOT APPLY TO FIRE DAMPER TWO HOUR FIRE -STOP ASSEMBLIES. INSTALL FIRE DAMPERS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. M -1420c CS -195 COMPOSITE SHEET INSTALLED FOIL SIDE 2' MIN. OVERLAP DOWN AND SECURED BY 1/4' DIA. BY 1-1/2' LONG MIN. MASONRY 3M FIRE BARRIER CP 25 FASTENERS WITH CAULK OR MOLDABLE PUTTY WASHERS 4-1/2" MIN. CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB 36' MAX. LENGTH, 750 SO. IN. MAX. OPENING SIZE NOTES: 1. MATERIALS AND CONFIGURATION SHOWN ARE FOR 3M SYSIEMCAJ0004 FLOOR SEALING DETAIL 2. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS THREE HOUR FIRE -STOP FOR COMPOSITE SHEET SEAMING DETAILS M -1420d NOTES: 1. Individual details apply only to the 3. It is the Contractor s responsibility to materials, construction types, and install all fire stopping in strict accordance configurations shown. Refer to to the manufacturer instructions manufacturer s system and application to comply with the appropriate UL details for other materials, construction System assembly requirements. or configurations. 4. Model numbers and materials are based 2. Details shown are for typical applications on 3M products. and do not necessarily apply to any or all fire stopping requirements on the project. TYPICAL MECHANICAL FIRE -STOPPING DETAILS M-1420 SEALANT RUN FLASHING UP — UNDER FAN BASE. 2" MINIMUM OVERLAP. ROOFING MATERIAL X HOLE AND FLASHING BY ROOFING CONTR. CUP ANGLES NOTE: FAN TO BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO CURB - SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FAN TO BE MOUNTED LEVEL. AIR VENT WATER COIL PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST STATION. DOSTING NEW/REVISED NEW DUCT STRAINER SHUTOFF VALVE DUCT INSULATION EXHAUST FAN MOUNTED ON ROOF. ROOF CURB DAMPER DUCT TRANSITION TO DAMPER SIZE. CONTROL VALVE (NEW) BALANCING VALVE PIPE HANGER SHALL SUPPORT PIPING INDEPENDENT OF COIL. 3" OVERLAP FLASHING MINIMUM SII__ 12' NEW CURB NEW 6" SELF - ADHEARING SEMI -CURED EPDM NEW 60 MIL EPDM FLASHING FLASHING FULLY -ADHERED - UP AND OVER TOP EXISTING EPDM OF NEW CURB AND DUCT FLASHING MEMBRANE EXISTING STRUCTURAL SUPPORT DUCT CURB DETAIL NO SCALE W W R = 4.5" S = 3.25" MITERED ELBOW WITH i TURNING VANES /// W=W R W RADIUSED ELBOW �\ R? 1.OW I Rt = 0.10•W R2 = 0.25• R3 = 0.50• L ELBOW WITH FULL LENGTH AIR VANES DRAIN UNE SHALL BE AT LEAST THE SAME SIZE AS THE NIPPLE ON THE DRAIN PAN. CLEANOUT PITCH DOWN - TOWARD DRAIN A+1" 1" 1/2 A OPEN DRAIN NOTES: 1. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, THIS DETAIL DOES NOT APPLY FOR FAN COIL UNITS, HEAT PUMPS OR BLOW THROUGH UNITS. 2. "A"=SUCTION PRESSURE OF THE FAN (1-1/2' MINIMUM) 24 GA. GALVANIZED PLATES, CONTINUOUS OVER ALL PLYWOOD SEAMS IS,6. 11911 11 W 3 �I —� 31A (— PLAN VIEW —( r STRUCTURE TW 3•A I ELEVATION L=1 /4W (4 -MIN.) NOTE: DO NOT INSTALL DUCTWORK PLENUMS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DRAIN PAN UNIT A (INCHES) RTU -4 3.5 1" EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION MIN. (1.5 LB DENSITY) 1/2' PLYWOOD EXISTING ROOF MEMBRANE ROOFING NOTES: 1. PROVIDE FOR THE PROTECTION OF THE ROOF MEMBRANE DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS ARE AS SHOWN ON THE ROOF PROTECTION DETAIL 2. PROTECTION IS REQUIRED OVER FULL EXTENT OF WORK AREAS, TRAFFIC ROUTE AND STORAGE AREAS. FLASHING AT PERIMETER AND PENETRATIONS SHALL ALSO BE PROTECTED. 3. EXISTING ROOF MEMBRANE MANUFACTURER IS FIRESTONE. ANY REPAIRS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A MANUFACTURER APPROVED CONTRACTOR. IF REPAIRS ARE REQUIRED, THE MINIMUM PATCH SIZE SHALL BE 4' x 4'. ROOF PROTECTION DETAIL NO SCALE CONTRACTOR'S OPTION TO USE CHECK VALVE AND CIRCUIT SETTER TRIPLE DUTY VALVE LIEU TRIPLE D DUTY VALVE AND REDUCER, IF REQUIRED SOLATION VALVE �— THERMOMETER FLEXIBLE PUMP —\� CONNECTOR COMPOUND - PRESSURE ® GAUGE 1/4" TURN Q BALL VALVE 0- 1/4" PIPING VIBRATION ISOLATION M (SEE SCHEDULES SUCTION AND SPECIFICATIONS) DIFFUSER 0Jw ADJUSTABLE HOUSEKEEPING SUPPORT PAD U ROOFING NOTES: 1. PROVIDE FOR THE PROTECTION OF THE ROOF MEMBRANE DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS ARE AS SHOWN ON THE ROOF PROTECTION DETAIL 2. PROTECTION IS REQUIRED OVER FULL EXTENT OF WORK AREAS, TRAFFIC ROUTE AND STORAGE AREAS. FLASHING AT PERIMETER AND PENETRATIONS SHALL ALSO BE PROTECTED. 3. EXISTING ROOF MEMBRANE MANUFACTURER IS FIRESTONE. ANY REPAIRS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A MANUFACTURER APPROVED CONTRACTOR. IF REPAIRS ARE REQUIRED, THE MINIMUM PATCH SIZE SHALL BE 4' x 4'. ROOF PROTECTION DETAIL NO SCALE Z O F ~ U I- O W H Z U w 00 00 r C) 0 N U N W - Ow U J Q 0- OOW M LU 0Jw 0 U = Q W U M W Ld3:U U U Q 2 � � U Z O F ~ U I- O W H Z U w 00 00 r! air JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET H5.1 r C) N U W - U 6� Q 0- OOW LLz 0Jw U = Q U W U U r! air JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET H5.1 + 0 a E 0 I` LO I 0 N cl N 0 0 ME MECHANICAL SYMBOLS (NOTE ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY NOT BE REWIRED FOR THIS PROJECT.) ... SHEETMETAL "- MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS FIRE DAMPER - FD, SMOKE DAMPER - SO PCOMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER = F/SD (TRIANGLE - ACTUATOR LOCATION FOR SO AND F/SD. F/SD COORDINATE WITH FIELD CONDITIONS AS REWDED) A TRANSITION PIECE CK ELBOW WITH SINGLE THICKNESS E TURNING VANES RADIUSED ELBOW - Ra1.5 x W t RR IN �a-J GRILLE OR DIFFUSER ON SIDE OF DUCT. MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER I ISI DIFFUSER OR GRILLE BELOW DUCT L---I--�J PITCH DOWN IN DIRECTION of ARROW ;000.010 ®SUPPLY (CONDITIONED) AIR DUCT SOLID CROSS - UP/TOWARDS DASHED M. - DOWN/AWAY ® OR RECAP AIR DUCT. SOLID CROSS RO55 - UP/TOWARDS DASHEO CROSS -DOWN/AWAWA Y RETURN TRANSFER AIR DUCT. SOLID CROSS - UP/TOWARDS DASHED CROSS - DOWN/AWAY UNCONDITIONED OUTDOOR AIR DUCT. SOLID CROSS - UP/TOWARDS DASHED CROSS - DOWN/AWAY rn CONTROLS ... & THERMOSTAT Ho- HUMIDISTAT &0 THERMOSTAT - SURFACE MOUNT OH -Q HUMIDISTAT - SURFACE MOUNT CO2 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR NO2 NITROGEN DIOXIDE SENSOR COMBINATION THERMOSTAT T/H AND HUMIDISTAT a. PIPING SPECIALTIES .a 0 ELBOW TURNED UP OR TOWARDS C ELBOW TURNED DOWN OR AWAY Q TEE TURNED UP OR TOWARDS _ TEE TURNED DOWN OR AWAY ROP RISE DROP OR RISE on ARROW IN LINE INDICATES DIRECTION OF FLOW ] CAP OR PLUG -� STRAINER ® FLOOR DRAIN - FD UNION ---��-1�� SHUT-OFF VALVE �JIGF- BALANCING COCK FLOW CONTROL VALVE I� AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVE RELIEF OR SAFETY VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE --j4- CHECK VALVE \� BACKFLOW PREVENTER qQ VALVE IN RISER 3 -WAY AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVE Y Y PRESSURE -TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVE -o-- WATER METER PIPE ANCHOR PIPE GUIDE -o--- STEAM DRIP ASSEMBLY ..+ SHEETMETAL ABBREVIATIONS ..+ SA -- SUPPLY ADR RA -- RETURN AIR TA -- TRANSFER AIR EA -- EXHAUST AIR OA -- OUTDOOR AIR +.+ DUCT SIZE NOMENCLATURE +++ (ALL SIZES IN INCHES) x - RECTANGULAR e.g. 2402 / - OVAL e.g. 24/12 0 = ROUND e.g. 240) a. PIPING ABBREVIATIONS w. -CHS- SINGLE EXPANSION JOINT - CHR - CONCENTRIC REDUCER OR INCREASER e CONNECTION - NEW TO EXISTING 4 THERMOMETER - PRESSURE SENSOR ..+ SHEETMETAL ABBREVIATIONS ..+ SA -- SUPPLY ADR RA -- RETURN AIR TA -- TRANSFER AIR EA -- EXHAUST AIR OA -- OUTDOOR AIR +.+ DUCT SIZE NOMENCLATURE +++ (ALL SIZES IN INCHES) x - RECTANGULAR e.g. 2402 / - OVAL e.g. 24/12 0 = ROUND e.g. 240) a. PIPING ABBREVIATIONS w. -CHS- CHILLED WATER SUPPLY - CHR - CHT110 WATER RETURN -HWS- HEATING HOT WATER SUPPLY -HWR- HEATING HOT WATER RETURN -CHWs- CHTJIED & HOT WATER SUPPLY - CHWR- CHII l m t HOT WATER RETURN -D- CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE (Note 1) ROOF TOP UNIT AIR CONDITIONER SCHEDULE SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE SUPPLY FAN RETURN/EXHAUST FAN 7 SELF CONTAINED COOLING ELECTRICAL I ENCLOSURE NEMATYPE MTG. PLAN MANUFACTURER MODEL NO. MIN O.A. STATIC PRESS. 480/3 200 110 3R Surface STATIC PRESS. Square D #H363RB 1 Notes: 1. Provide Class R type fuses. CAP (MBH) # OF ENT AIR (F) AMB. and manual bypass. 3. The horsepower rating is for the motor, not the VFD. The VFD shall be rated MODEL NO. to carry the full load amps (FLA) of the motor without using the overload TOTAL EXT. TOTAL EXT. TOT MIN MARK CFM (CFM) RPM BHP HP CFM RPM BHP HP STAGES EER DB WB DB VOLTS PH MCA (NOTE1 NOTES RTU -4 120001 2000 1 4.75 3.5 1908 14.7 1 20 11990 1 1.79 1 1.0 11620 16.75 1 7.5 391.9 391 2 11 80 67 95 460 3 194.581 SXHLF30 2,3 - 21.4 4 NOTES: 1, DIL Rating) 1, Selections based on Trane. See specifications for other approved manufacturers. 7 2. Provide with the following options: Provide with 0 deg. F ambient operaton. 7.2 a. DB Economizer with power return/relief fan (coordinate power wiring with electrical contractor). 99.3 0.13 b. Condenser coil hail guards. 1,3,4 VAV-4-9 c. BACnet over IP compatible control card. Sound Attenuator 59 d. Variable air volume operation (multizone). 49 49 e. MERV 8 filters. 44 47 f. Powered convenience outlet. RTU -4 SA -1 g. Stainless steel drain pan. 1254 0.16 h. Motorized outdoor air, exhaust air, and return air dampers. 38x53x84 ERMX84/WD I. Supply and return fan 2" spring isolators. VCWD 03 Self Noise j. Clogged filter switch. 7 305 k. Fan failure switch. 0.02 8.3 I. Hinged access panels. 106 0.62 m. Through -the -base electric routing. 1,3,4 3. Provide with Inverter Duty Rated motor for use with variable frequency drive (refer to Section 23 0513) 300 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE (Note 1) DISCONNECT SCHEDULE SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE PLAN MARK VOLTS/ PHASE SIZE AMPS FUSE SIZE I ENCLOSURE NEMATYPE MTG. 'TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL NO. REMARKS DS -1 480/3 200 110 3R Surface HD Square D #H363RB 1 Notes: 1. Provide Class R type fuses. 2. For each unit, provide an EMI/RFI filter, AC line reactor (5%), DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE (Note 1) VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SCHEDULE SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE FULL LOAD VOLTS/ TOSHIBA/HOUSTON UNIT NO. HP AMPS LOCATION PHASE MODEL NO. P -1A 1-1/2 6.9 E024 208/3 Q9-2025 P-213 1-1/2 6.9 E024 208/3 Q9-2025 DISCHARGE SUCTION PLAN CFM NOTES: FLOW 1. Provide Toshiba/Houston or per specifications. 2. For each unit, provide an EMI/RFI filter, AC line reactor (5%), MODEL and manual bypass. 3. The horsepower rating is for the motor, not the VFD. The VFD shall be rated 500 to carry the full load amps (FLA) of the motor without using the overload 2K rating of VFD. DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE (Note 1) ACOUSTICAL RATINGS AND SOUND ATTENUATOR SCHEDULE SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE Construction PLAN MARK GPM BLOWER/EVAP. COIL IMPELLER WATER SIZE (IN) TEMP. AIR TERMINALS FOR RTU -4 TDV SIZE (NOTE 2) DUCT OUTSIDE ARI DISCHARGE SUCTION PLAN CFM ACOUSTIC RATINGS IN dB (NOTES 1 - 3) FLOW VELOCITY PRESSURE CONNECTION DIMENSIONS MODEL 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K SYSTEM MARK DESCRIPTION (CFM) FPM) DROP (IN.) SIZE (W x H) (W x H x L) (NOTE 4 PLAN ENT Supply Fan 100 96 91 89 88 84 81 1 78 & MODEL NO. MARK DB REFRIG. FLA I MCA I FUSE VOLTSPRASE NO. Sound Attenuator 10 12 17 31 30 28 23 19 R-0t0A 13 15 208 1 PUY-Al2NHA4 15.2 1.2, NOTES: - 21.4 4 134.1 1, DIL Rating) Slim -Line Outdoor Condensing Unit. VAV-4-7 7 2. Provide with MHKi controller (HVAC Contractor to install). Provide with 0 deg. F ambient operaton. 7.2 0.7 99.3 0.13 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-9 7 Sound Attenuator 59 55 49 49 48 44 47 39 RTU -4 SA -1 12000 1254 0.16 26x53 38x53x84 ERMX84/WD 0.49 VCWD 03 Self Noise VAV-4-11 7 305 1 150 0.02 8.3 2.3 106 0.62 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-13 7 300 System 90 84 74 58 58 56 58 59 10 265 150 0.02 7.2 0.7 99.3 0.13 VCWD 03 1,3,4 Net Rating 8 505 150 0.03 11.5 1.0 125.7 0.2 VCWD 06 1,3,4 VAV-4-16 5 150 150 NOTES: 6.1 0.4 92.5 0.08 1. Sound attenuator rated Dynamic Insertion Loss (DIL) in accordance with ASTM E 477-06. VAV-4-17 8 195 2, Sound attenuator self noise rating in accordance with ASTM E 477-06. 7.9 1.4 103.6 3. Supply fan is rated at discharge. 1,3,4 VAV-4-18 7 4. Model numbers based on Price. Refer to specifications for approved manufacturers. 0.02 6.7 0.5 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE (Note 1) CIRCULATING PUMP SCHEDULE SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE Construction PLAN MARK GPM BLOWER/EVAP. COIL IMPELLER WATER SIZE (IN) TEMP. CONDENSING UNIT TERMINALS FOR RTU -4 TDV SIZE (NOTE 2) TDV PD (FT) MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. ARI DISCHARGE SUCTION INLET SIZE CFM MIN CFM SP (IN. W.C.) NOTE 2) MBH COIL GPM LAT WPD MODEL NOTES TOTAL COOLING LINE LINE 100 40 7.4 0.5 123.7 POWER SUPPLY VCWD 03 1,3,4 PLAN CFM CAPACITY SIZE SIZE 1 6.25 190 MANUFACTURER PLAN ENT 2.4 VCWD 11 MODEL ARI MARK (NOTE 3) MBH INCHES INCHES 17.6 & MODEL NO. MARK DB REFRIG. FLA I MCA I FUSE VOLTSPRASE NO. SEER NOTES BEC -1 425 12 1/4 i/2 Mitsubishi PKA-Al2HA4 CU -1 95 R-0t0A 13 15 208 1 PUY-Al2NHA4 15.2 1.2, NOTES: - 21.4 4 134.1 1, Based on Mitsubishi PK Wall Mounted Air Conditioner and Slim -Line Outdoor Condensing Unit. VAV-4-7 7 2. Provide with MHKi controller (HVAC Contractor to install). Provide with 0 deg. F ambient operaton. 7.2 0.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE (Note 1) CIRCULATING PUMP SCHEDULE VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINALS WITH HOT WATER REHEAT Construction PLAN MARK GPM HEAD IMPELLER WATER SIZE (IN) TEMP. SIZE SUCT x DISCH TERMINALS FOR RTU -4 TDV SIZE (NOTE 2) TDV PD (FT) MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. NOTES PLAN MARK INLET SIZE CFM MIN CFM SP (IN. W.C.) NOTE 2) MBH COIL GPM LAT WPD MODEL NOTES VAV-4-1 6 165 100 40 7.4 0.5 123.7 0.1 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-2 8 735 250 1 6.25 190 21.4 4 134.1 2.4 VCWD 11 1,3,4 VAV-4-3 8 540 200 3. 17.6 2 136.1 0.7 VCWD 11 1,34 VAV-4-4 5 200 100 - 7.4 0.5 123.7 0.1 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-5 8 860 250 - 21.4 4 134.1 2.4 VCWD 11 1,3,4 VAV-4-7 7 1 240 150 0.02 7.2 0.7 99.3 0.13 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-9 7 305 150 0.02 8.4 2.7 106.6 0.82 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-10 7 300 150 0.02 8.2 2 105.4 0.49 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-11 7 305 1 150 0.02 8.3 2.3 106 0.62 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-13 7 300 150 0.02 7.8 1.2 102.9 0.24 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-14 10 265 150 0.02 7.2 0.7 99.3 0.13 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-15 8 505 150 0.03 11.5 1.0 125.7 0.2 VCWD 06 1,3,4 VAV-4-16 5 150 150 0.02 6.1 0.4 92.5 0.08 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-17 8 195 150 0.02 7.9 1.4 103.6 0.28 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-18 7 210 150 0.02 6.7 0.5 96.2 0.1 1 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-19 7 280 150 0.02 7.9 1.4. 103.6 0.28 1 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-20 1 6 205 150 0.02 7.2 0.7 99.3 0.13 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-21 8 460 150 1 0.03 9.2 0.5 111.6 0.09 VCWD 06 1,3,4 VAV-4-22 6 555 150 0.03 10.4 0.7 118.9 0.13 VCWD 06 1,3,4 VAV-4-23 7 240 150 0.02 8.3 2.3 106 0.62 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-24 5 255 150 0.02 1 7.5 0.9 101.1 0.17 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-25 6 675 150 0.03 12.7 1.8 133.1 0.43 VCWD 06 1,3,4 VAV-4-26 5 320 150 0.03 9.5 0.5 113.4 0.1 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-27 7 225 150 0.02 7.4 0.9 100.5 0.15 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-28 8 600 150 0.03 14.7 0.6 109.2 0.13 VCWD 11 1,3,4 VAV-4-29 10 500 250 0.03 18.2 1.1 122.1 0.28 VCWD 11 1,3,4 VAV-4-30 8 600 250 0.03 16.3 0.7 115.1 0.18 VCWD 11 1,3,4 VAV-4-31 6 185 150 0.02 6.3 0.4 93.7 0.08 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-32 8 515 150 0.03 1 10.8 0.8 121.4 1 0.15 VCWD 06 1,34 VAV-4-33 5 140 100 7.4 0.5 123.7 0.1 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-34 5 230 150 10.7 1.0 120.8 0.2 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-35 6 290 150 10.7 1.0 120.8 0.2 VCWD 06 1,3,4 VAV-4-36 5 100 100 - 7.4 0.5 123.7 0.1 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-46 5 350 175 0.33 16.2 1.6 105 0.6 1 1,3,5 VAV-4-47 7 530 265 0.38 24.2 2.4 105 1.7 1,3,5 VAV4 48 6 370 185 0.34 16.8 1.7 105 0.6 1,35 NOTES: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. All boxes are existing to remain. Values provided are for new controls and balancing purposes. Static pressure drop at listed airflow through VAV box including coil (damper 100% open). Replace old electric controls, room temperature sensor, valve and damper actuators with new digital electric controls and actuators. Existing balancing valves, strainers and air vents are to remain. Existing boxes provided during 1992 project. Basis of design is Trane. These boxes have electric controls. Existing boxes provided during 2000 project. Basis of design is Price These boxes have digital controls. DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE (Note 1) CIRCULATING PUMP SCHEDULE Service Construction PLAN MARK GPM HEAD IMPELLER WATER SIZE (IN) TEMP. SIZE SUCT x DISCH MOTOR TDV SIZE (NOTE 2) TDV PD (FT) MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. NOTES FT. WATER BHP HP VOLTS PH P-1 40.0 40 6.125 190 1 1 208 3 ROOF 1,2,3 B&G 1510 1-1/2AB 1 P -1A 40.0 40 6.25 190 1.5 x 1.25 0.8 1.5 208 3 ROOF 1,2,4 B&G 1510 1-1/4AC 2,3 P -11B 40.0 40 1 6.25 190 1.5 x 1.25 0.8 1.5 208 3 / Relief Air information from original installation. B&G 1510 1-1/4AC 2,3 NOTES: 1, 2. 3. Base Bid: Pump is existing Bell & Gossett 1510. Provide new DDC motor starter. Alternate 1: Based on Bell & Gossett, see specifications for other approved manufacturers. Alternate 1: Provide with Inverter Duty Rated motor for use with variable frequency drive (refer to Secton 23 0513) General 3' DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE (Note 1) EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE Service Construction PLAN with existing conditions and all other trades. Route all piping and ductwork as high as possible S.P. IN MOTOR FAN (Note 3) (Note 4) (Note 5) (Note 4) MARK CFM INCHES HP VOLTS PH # SPDS. RPM MOUNTING NOTES EF -1 520 0.75 1/4 120 1 1 1530 ROOF 1,2 EF -2 800 0.625 1/4 120 1 1 1187 ROOF 1,2,3 EF -3 600 0.625 1/4 120 1 1 1298 ROOF 1,2,3 EF -4 800 0.375 1/4 120 1 1 961 ROOF 1,2,4 NOTES: Rectangular General 1" are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. 1, All fans are existing. All schedule values are basis of design schedule elevator. Either reuse current electrical damper actuator or provide new damper actuator if / Relief Air information from original installation. General 1" Exterior 2_ Provide new DDC fan starters for all existing fans. General 3' (Note 8) 3. Fan will be relocated in the course of this project. General 3" - Upstream of VAVs / reheat coils 3" 4. Fan is interconnected with outdoor air gooseneck damper. DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE (Note 1) Space Type Service Construction Type Duct Liner Duct Covering Preinsulated Rigid Covering Uninsulated with existing conditions and all other trades. Route all piping and ductwork as high as possible (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 4) (Note 5) (Note 4) Conditioned Supply Air Round General Double wall, between layers 1-1/2" or H-4 Tempered n-< Rectangular General 1" (Note 6, 7) ern Upstream of VAVs / reheat coils Downstream of VAVs / reheat coils 1" � a H-5 2. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain piping or items such as unions, fittings, or valves Return Air Round General Uninsulated may not be shown, but where such items are required by code, the specifications, or where they Rectangular General 1" are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. Exhaust Round General Uninsulated elevator. Either reuse current electrical damper actuator or provide new damper actuator if / Relief Air Rectangular General 1" Exterior Supply AirRound General 3' (Note 8) Rectangular General 3" - Upstream of VAVs / reheat coils 3" Return AirRound General 3" 5. For all work required above ceilings outside of the project space, Contractor is responsible for the Rectangular General 3" NOTES: 1. Unless listed above as "None", all ductwork and accessories shall be either lined or covered. If type or thickness is not indicated, it shall be 1-1/2" covering. 2. Refer to plans for ductwork designations. 1 See Specification Section 23 3113 - HVAC Metal Ducts. 4_ See Specification Section 23 0700 - HVAC Insulation. 5. See Specification Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories and/or 23 3113 - HVAC Metal Ducts. 6. Conditioned Space: an area inside the building which is heated and/or cooled. 7. Tempered Space: an area inside the building which is not directly heated or cooled, but is adjacent to a heated or cooled space with no insulation separating the two spaces (e.g., ceiling plenums). 8. Exterior Space: an area outside the building which is exposed to the weather (e.g., roof). Exterior ductwork and insulation to be covered with Venture Tape VentureClad 1577CW multilayered, self adhesive jacketing system. Finish to be Natural Alumimum. GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES: 0 C1 w 1. Drawings are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work, and to indicate the w F - general locations of equipment, piping and ductwork. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions and Z o layout his own work according to the following guidelines: IL v H- a w a. Contractor shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough ins o o v and the exact routing of piping and ducts prior to construction so as to best fit the layout of the work. Space above ceilings is extremely limited; coordinate final layout with all trades. b. Where offsets in piping or ductwork are required to coordinate the work of other trades, with existing structure, piping, conduit, ductwork etc, or to maintain required ceiling heights, they shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. c. All existing piping and ductwork routing shown is intended to indicate approximate size, number and location of piping branches for bidding purposes only. Contractor to verify exact size and configuration prior to construction. d. Unless otherwise noted, all ductwork and piping to be routed concealed in walls, chases or above suspended ceiling. Water piping shall not be routed in exterior walls. Coordinate layout z U i- v) (n U H O � wLIJ " N � > z U w 00 U w o with existing conditions and all other trades. Route all piping and ductwork as high as possible o and along walls to maximize space available for other trades. e. Coordinate routing of piping and ductwork to maintain access to filters, motors, electrical H-4 equipment, and controls. In no case shall piping or ductwork pass directly over electrical n-< o panels or disconnects or restrict access to any electrical equipment including junction boxes. ern f. Coordinate exact ductwork connection sizes with equipment and transition as required. � a H-5 2. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain piping or items such as unions, fittings, or valves H-6 may not be shown, but where such items are required by code, the specifications, or where they cm It are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. IT- elevator. Either reuse current electrical damper actuator or provide new damper actuator if 3. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft O involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. w 5. For all work required above ceilings outside of the project space, Contractor is responsible for the removal and replacement of all ceiling tile as required to accomplish work. UJ 6. Mechanical Contractor shall provide all required support steel for piping, ductwork, and equipment.. �_ O Q U 7. Shutdown of existing water, steam, condensate, natural gas, or fire protection systems to be coordinated through Owner's representative a minimum of three days prior to shutdown. Q 8. Contractor shall note that in nearly all areas, space above existing ceilings is extremely limited, and�/ z coordination of new work with existing piping, ductwork, conduit, etc. is mandatory. O O LL1 9. Duct dimensions shown on drawings are net inside dimensions. Increase sheet metal size for lined ductwork to allow for internal insulation if applicable. LL G O W 10. All control wiring in finished spaces is to be routed concealed in walls or above ceilings unless J 0 specifically noted otherwise. Concealed control wiring where accessible may be installed without is be in Q Q conduit. All concealed control wiring which not accessible shall routed conduit. = Thermostats to be mounted at 46" AFF to center line. J U W t � U HVAC NOTES: U H-1 Existing to remain. Q H-2 Route condensate drain piping to nearest roof drain south of unit. Drain material shall be schedule 40 PVC. 11-3 Provide rooftop unit with raised structural stand. Stand shall include accessible 3' walkways on all o sides of unit requiring access. Walkway shall have OSHA hand rail along outer edge. Refer to o structural sheet S1.0 for more information.n H-4 Provide new digital controller, hot water reheat coil control valve, damper actuator, and space n-< o temperature sensor for this terminal box. Existing balancing valve, strainer and air vent are to�r--- ern remain. � a H-5 Connect condensate drain pipe from BEC -1 to existing copper drain pipe on some wall as unit. H-6 Provide new DDC controlled fan starter for existing exhaust fan. cm H-7 Outdoor air damper operation shall be interconnected with operation of west exhaust fan near elevator. Either reuse current electrical damper actuator or provide new damper actuator if necessary. H-8 Reinstall exhaust fans in new location. Reconnect to extended exhaust ductwork system. Provide exhaust fan motor with new DDC controlled fan starter. H-9 New external supply ductwork shall be 16 gauge minimum thickness. H-10 Externally wrap sound attenuator with 3 in. of insulation in accordance with exterior round ductwork line of insulation schedule. Taper insulation to meet dimensions of supply ductwork without hard transitions. H-11 Base Bid: Provide new DDC controlled pump motor starter for existing pump. Alternate 1: Provide two new parallel pumps with variable speed drives. ELECTRICAL NOTES: E-1 Electrical Contractor shall remove existing single pole breakers from Panel A3 for circuits 40, 42 serving the removed Leibert unit in the Police telecom space. Furnish and install a new GE 15A/2 breaker to serve the new CU -1 and BEC -1. Electrical Contractor shall reuse existing raceway to rooftop for unit with a new branch circuit wiring(3#12) to new CU -1. E-2 Electrical Contractor shall reuse raceway from rooftop into space. BEC -1 shall be served from CU -1 with power and control. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install power wiring between the two as required. Furnish and install a Hubbell #HBL1392D disconnect adjacent to unit. E-3 Electrical Contractor shall reuse existing raceway with new wiring and breaker to new CU -1. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install a new 30/2 NEMA 3R rated, heavy duty disconnect at CU -1. E-4 Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install new raceway from existing junction box to new exhaust fan location. The branch circuit shall be routed above ceiling on the 3rd floor to the new location. E-5 Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install a pullbox for intercepting existing RTU feeder. Splice new 3#1, 1#6GND feeder and route new raceway from pullbox through the above ceiling space on 3rd floor, up to RTU -4. Coordinate location with the Mechanical Contractor. Field verify existing feeder wire size before splicing. E-6 Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the location of the single point connection to DS -1 and RTU -4. Furnish and install fused disconnect per Disconnect Schedule. E-7 Electrical Contractor shall remove existing motor starter for pump P-1 and install new starter provided by Mechanical Contractor. Pumps P -1A and P -1B are alternate bid. Provide and install the following as part of alternate bid for P -1A and P -1B: 1. A new GE 20A/3 circuit breaker in existing space of existing distribution board within the space for P -1B. Provide new label "P -1B" for new breaker. 2. The existing 20A/3 breaker for P-1 and branch circuit wiring shall be reused for P -1A. Re -Label existing placard label for new equipment. 3. Furnish and install VFDs for P -1A and P-16 per Variable Frequency Drive Schedule and specifications. 4. 3/4" EMT conduit and 4#12 wires for branch circuit wiring to VFD for P-113. 5. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate location within room E024 with Mechanical Contractor as required. E-8 Electrical Contractor shall furnish and instoll a duct detector in the horizontal section RTU -4 Return duct. Furnish and install a control module with relay to shut down the unit when smoke is detected. Duct detector and control module shall be from the same manufacturer as the rest of the building Fire Alarm System. J UJ0 0 Q W 0 LU 'U'^^ vJ O c) P o n < N oo o O o a N � P z Q Q x 3 O w _ w > N Z w Q Z < W a z - (7 0C) w w m U o Z IJOB NO. I 14006A2 SHEET H502 MECHANICAL SYMBOLS (NOTE: ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY NOT BE REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT.) +++ SHEETMETAL +++ MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS FIRE DAMPER - FD, SMOKE DAMPER - SD COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER = F/SD (TRIANG'lE - ACTUATOR LOCATION FOR SD AND F/SD. F/SD COORDINATE WITH FIELD CONDITIONS AS REWIRED) A TRANSITION PIECE l7-�gt3`A�A--4 �-` MITERED ELBOW WITH SINGLE THICKNESS TURNING VANES RADIUSED ELBOW - Ra1.5 x W R W GRILLE OR DIFFUSER ON SIDE OF DUCT. M C MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER DIFFUSER OR GRILLE BELOW DUCT PITCH DOWN IN DIRECTION OF ARROW I 1 FLEX DUCTWORK ®SUPPLY (CONDITIONED)AIR DUCT. SOLID CROSS - UP/TO/TO WARDS DASHED CROSS - DOWN/AWAY ® EXHAUST OR RELIEF AIR SOLID CROSS - UP/TOWARDS DASHED CROSS - DOWN/AWAY RETURN OR TRANSFER AIR DUCT. D CROSS - UP/TOWARDS DASHED CROSS - DOWN/AWAY UNCONDITIONED OUTDOOR AIR DUCT. SOLID CROSS - UP/TOWARDS DASHED CROSS - DOWN/AWAY +++ CONTROLS +++ TO- THERMOSTAT Ha- HUMIDISTAT TO-Q THERMOSTAT - SURFACE MOUNT HUMIDISTAT - SURFACE MOUNT CARBON DIOXIDE CO2 SENSOR NITROGEN DIOXIDE NO2 SENSOR T/H COMBINATION THERMOSTAT AND HUMIDISTAT +r+ PIPING SPECIALTIES n+ 0- ELBOW TURNED UP OR TOWARDS 0 C ELBOW TURNED DOWN OR AWAY O TEE TURNED UP OR TOWARDS E TEE TURNED DOWN OR AWAY 0 vDROP RINSE DROP OR RISE _ ARROW IN LINE INDICATES DIRECTION OF FLOW 0 7 CAP OR PLUG N m� STRAINER N T ® FLOOR DRAIN - FD 0 -CIF- UNION c o SHUT-OFF VALVE a; BALANCING COCK o FLOW CONTROL VALVE IJ E rn -- AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVE VALVE CF-RELIEF OR SAFETY -- PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE o --{�- CHECK VALVE N BACKFLOW PREVENTER 07T N 0 VALVE IN RISER 3-WAY AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVE PRESSURE -TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVE 0 NI WATER METER 3E PIPE ANCHOR 3 PIPE GUIDE -�-- STEAM DRIP ASSEMBLY o W o -Ej� SINGLE EXPANSION JOINT -O o CONCENTRIC REDUCER OR INCREASER e CONNECTION - NEW TO EXISTING 7D a) NTHERMOMETER 0 "C PRESSURE SENSOR x i CD m SHEETMETAL ABBREVIATIONS +n co NI SA -- SUPPLY AIR s RA -- RETURN AIR TA -- TRANSFER AIR EA -- EXHAUST AIR a OA -- OUTDOOR AIR U Q +++ DUCT SIZE NOMENCLATURE +++ a (ALL SIZES IN INCHES) E • = RECTANGULAR (e.g. 24x12) % / - OVAL e.g. 24/12) 0 0 - ROUND e.g. 240) O % +u PIPING ABBREVIATIONS +n 0 -CHS- CHILLED WATER SUPPLY a CHR - CHBlED WATER RETURN 0 - C -HWS- HEATING HOT WATER SUPPLY > HWR- HEATING HOT WATER RETURN w -CHWS- CHILLED k HOT WATER SUPPLY -CHWR- CHILLED 8: HOT WATER RETURN j -D- CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE U a; E Z 3 0 0 ROOF TOP UNIT AIR CONDITIONER SCHEDULE SUPPLY FAN RETURN/EXHAUST FAN SELF CONTAINED COOLING ELECTRICAL PLAN Miiii N O.A. 'STATIC PRESS. STATIC PRESS.; CAP (MBH) I # OF ENT AIR (F) AMB. MODEL NO. MARK CFM FM) TOTAL1 EX RPMIBHP HP CFM TOTAL EXT.!RPM BHP HP TOT MIN 'STAGES EER DB WB DB VOLTS PH MCA (NOTED NOTES RTU-4 12000 2000 4.75 3.5 1908 14.7 20 111990 1 1.79 1.0 1620 6.75 7.5 1391.9 391 2 11 80 67 95 460 3 94.58 SXHLF30 2,3 1. Selections based on Trane. See specifications for other approved manufacturers. 2. Provide with the following options: a. DB Economizer with power return/relief fan (coordinate power wiring with electrical contractor). b. Condenser coil hail guards. c. BACnet over IP compatible control card. d. Variable air volume operation (multizone). e. MERV 8 filters. f. Powered convenience outlet. g. Stainless steel drain pan. h. Motorized outdoor air, exhaust air, and return air dampers. I. Supply and return fan 2" spring isolators. j. Clogged filter switch. k. Fan failure switch. I. Hinged access panels. m. Through -the -base electric routing. 3. Provide with Inverter Duty Rated motor for use with variable frequency drive (refer to Section 23 0513) DISCONNECT SCHEDULE PLAN VOLTS/ MARK PHASE SIZE AMPS FUSE ENCLOSURE' SIZE NEMATYPE MTG. TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL NO. REMARKS DS-1 480/3 200 110 3R Surface HD Square D #H363RB 1 Notes: 1. Provide Class R type fuses. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SCHEDULE FULL LOAD VOLTS/ TOSHIBA/HOUSTON UNIT NO. HP AMPS PHASE MODEL NO. P-1A _LOCATION 1-1/2 6.9 E024 09-2025 208/3 P-26 1-1/2 6.9 E024 208/3 Q9-2025 NOTES: 1. Provide Toshiba/Houston or per specifications. 2. For each unit, provide an EMI/RFI filter, AC line reactor (5%), and manual bypass. 3. The horsepower rating is for the motor, not the VFD. The VFD shall be rated to carry the full load amps (FLA) of the motor without using the overload rating of VFD. ACOUSTICAL RATINGS AND SOUND ATTENUATOR SCHEDULE AIR I DUCT OUTSIDE PLAN ENSIONS ACOUSTIC RATINGS IN dB (NOTES 1 - 3) FLOW VELOCITY PRESSURE CONNECTION DIMMODEL MARK DESCRIPTION 63 125 250 500 1 1K 2K 4K 8K (CFM) (FPM) DROP (IN.) SIZE (W x H (W x_H x L (NOTE 4 ) ) Supply Fan 100 96 91 89 88 84 81 78 So ndRat ing) uator 10 12 17 31 30 28 23 19 L RTU-4 SA-1 Sound Attenuator 59 55 1 49 49 48 44 47 39 112000 1254 0.16 26x53 38x53x84 (Self Noise)_ 90 84 74 58 58 56 58 59 1, Net Rating NOTES: 1. Sound attenuator rated Dynamic Insertion Loss (DIL) in accordance with ASTM E 477-06 2. Sound attenuator self noise rating in accordance with ASTM E 477-06. 3. Supply fan is rated at discharge. 4. Model numbers based on Price. Refer to specifications for approved manufacturers. SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE BLOR EVAP. COIL _ CONDENSING UNIT ARI DISCHARGE SUCTION 1 WER SIJ PLAN TOTAL CAPACITY TY SIZE SIZE MANUFACTURER PO' MODEL ARI i PLAN 'ENT MARK (NOTE 3) MBH 1 INCHES INCHES & MODEL N0. MARK DB REFRIG. FLA MCA FUSE VOLTS _PHASE _ NO. SEER NOTES BEC-1 425 12 114 112 I Mitsubishi PKA-Al2HA4 CU-1 95 R-41 OA 1 13 15 208 1 PUY-Al2NHA4 1 152 NOTES: 1. Based on Mitsubishi PK Wall Mounted Air Conditioner and Slim -Line Outdoor Condensing Unit. 2. Provide with MHK1 controller (HVAC Contractor to install). Provide with 0 dog. F ambient operation. VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINALS WITH HOT WATER REHEAT TERMINALS FOR RTU-4 PLAN INLET MIN SP (IN. W.C.) COIL MARK SIZE CFM CFM (NOTE 2) MBH GPM 1 LAT WPD MODEL NOTES VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-1 6 165 100 74 0.5 123.7 0.1 VCWD 11 134 -- 4 1 4 13 2.4 - 8 735 250 21.4 1 VAV 4 2 I VAV-4 3 8 540 II 200 17.6 2 136.1 0.7 VCWD 11 -- 1,3,4 - VAV-4-4 l .._ h--- 5 200 100 t - 7.4 0.5 123.7 -: 0.1 VCWD 03 1,3,4 21.4 4 VCWD 11 - 1,3,4 VAV-4-5 8 860 250 134.1 99.3 2.4 0.13 - s- VAV-4 7 7 240 150 0.02 0.02 7.2 8.4 0.7 2.7 VCWD 03 - 1,3,4 VAV-4 9 7 305 150 - 106.6 0.82 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4 10 300 150 _ 0.02 _ 8.2 _ 2 105.4_ 0.49 VCWD 03 _ 1,3,4 VAV-4-11 7 305 150 0.02 8.3 2.3 106 0.62 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-13 7 300 150 0.02 7.8 1.2 102.9 0.24 VCWD 03 1,3,4 1,3,4 VAV-4-14 10 265 150 0.02 7.2 0.7 99.3 0.13 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-15 8 505 150 0.03 11.5 1.0 1 125.7 1 0.2 1 VCWD 06 VAV-4-16 - 5 150 150 - 0.02 1 6.1 0.4 92.5 0.08 1 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-17 8 195 150 0.02 7.9 1.4 103.6 0.28 VCWD 03 1,3,4 1,3,4 VAV-4-18 7 I 210 150 0.02 6.7 0.5 96.2 0.1 VCWD 03 VAV-4-19 ... r 7 280 150 0.02 7.9 1.4. _ - _ 103.6 0.28 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-20 6 205 150 0.02 7.2 0.7 99.3 0.13 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4_21 VAV-4-22 8 460 150 6 555 150 0.03 0.03 9.2 0.5 10.4 0.7 111 6 _ _ 0.09 VCWD 06 118.9 _ 0.13 VCWD 06 1,3,4 1,3,4 VAV-4-23 _ 7 240 150 0.02 X0.02 _ 8.3 2.3 106 0.62 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-24 5 255 150 7.5 0.9 101.1 0.17 VCWD-03 _ 1,3,4 VAV-4-25 6 675 150 0.03 12.7 1.8 133.1 0.43 VCWD 06 134 1,3,4 VAV-4-26 5 320 150 0.03 9.5 0.5 113.4 0 1 VCWD 03 134 VAV-4-27 7 225 150 0.02 7.4 0.9 100.5 -_ 0.15 VCWD 03 VAV-4-28 VAV-4-29 8 _ _ 600 150 10 500 250 0.03 0.03 14.7 18.2 0.6 1.1 109.2 -122.1 0.13 0.28 VCWD 11 VCWD 11 1,3,4 1,3,4 VAV-4-30 8 600 250 0.03 16.3 0.7 115.1 0.18 VCWD 11 1,3,4 -- 1,3,4 VAV-4-31 - 6 185 150 0.02� - 0.4 93,.7 0.08 VCWD 03 0.8 121.4 0.15 X VCWD 06 1,3,4 ,4 VAV-4-32 8 1 515 1 150 0.03 10.8 VAV-4-33 VAV-4-34 100 _-_5_=230 5 1 150 7.4 10-'1 0.5 0 123.7 120.8 0.1 0.2 VCWD VCWD 03 1,3,4 1,3,4 VAV-4-35 6 290 150 10.7 '; 1.0 __120.8 0.2_ VCWD06 1,3,4 VAV-4-36 _ 5 100 100 7.4 0.5 123.7 0.1 VCWD 03 1,3,4 VAV-4-46 .-..___.. .. 5 350 175 0.33 16.2 1.6 105 0.6 1,3,5 VAV-4-47 7 530 265 0.38 24.2 2.4 105 1.7 1,3,5 VAV-4-48 6 370 185 0.34 16.8 1.7 105 0.6 �1,3,5 NOTES: 1. All boxes are existing to remain. Values provided are for new controls and balancing purposes. 2. Static pressure drop at listed airflow through VAV box including coil (damper 100% open). 3. Replace old electric controls, room temperature sensor, valve and damper actuators with new digital electric controls and actuators. Existing balancing valves, strainers and air vents are t0 remain. 4. Existing boxes provided during 1992 project. Basis of design is Trane. These boxes have electric controls. 5. Existing boxes provided during 2000 project. Basis of design is Price These boxes have digital controls. C L�-iLAKT-111 T1"I CIRCULATING PUMP SCHEDULE PLAN MARK GPM HEAD FT. IMPELLER WATER SIZE WATER SIZE (IN) TEMP. SUCT x DISCH MOTOR TDV SIZE TDV _(NOTE 2) PD (FT) MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. NOTES 1 BHP 1 HP VOLTS PH P-1 40.0 40 6.125 190 -- 1 1 208 3 B&G 1510 1-1/2AB P-1A 40.0 40 6.25 40 1 6.25 190 1.5 x 1.25 1.5 x 1.25 0.8 0.8 1.5 1.5 208 3 B&G 1510 1-1/4AC B&G 1510 1-1/4AC 2.3 P-1B 40.0 190 208 3 2,3 NOTES: 1. 2, 3. Base Bid: Pump i xistin Bell & Gossett 1510. Provide new DDC motor starter. s existing Alternate 1: Based on Bell & Gossett, see specifications for other approved manufacturers. Alternate 1: Provide with Inverter Duty Rated motor for use with variable frequency drive (refer to Section 23 0513) EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE PLAN S.P. IN MOTOR FAN CFM IN HP VOLTS! PH # SPDS. RPM MOUNTING NOTES - EFR< 1 - 520 0.75S 1/4 '._-1 1 1530 1 ROOF 1.2- EF-2 _ 800 0.625 l 1/4 1 120 1 1 1187 ROOF 1,2,3 1 ROOF 1,2,3 EF-4 800 0.375 1/4 120 _ 1_ _ _ 1 961 ROOF 12,4 NOTES: 1. All fans are existing. All schedule values are basis of design schedule information from original installation. 2. Provide new DDC fan starters for all existing fans. 3. Fan will be relocated in the course of this project. 4. Fan is interconnected with outdoor air gooseneck damper. DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE (Note 1) Space Type 1 Service I Construction Type Duct Liner Duct Covering '', Preinsulated Rigid Covering Uninsulated (Note 2) -I _ _ (Note 3) (Note 4) (Note 5) (Note 4) Conditioned Supply Air Round General 1-1/2" or Double wall between layers - - 1-1/2" - - Tempered Rectangular General 1" (Note 6, 7) Upstream of VAVs / reheat coils Downstream of VAVs / reheat coils 1" Return Air Round General Uninsulated Rectangular - General General - - Exhaust Round General = Uninsulated Relief Air Rectan9 ular I General 1" = Exterior -- 'Supply Air 1 Round General - - - -- 3„ (Note 8) _ - 'Rectangular 1 General 3" 'Return Up stream of VAVs / reheat coils 3" Air Round General - 3 Rectangular General 3" NOTES: 1. Unless listed above as "None", all ductwork and accessories shall be either lined or covered. If type or thickness is not indicated, it shall be 1-1/2" covering. nations. Refer to plans for ductwork designations. 2. e P 9 3, See Specification Section 23 3113 - HVAC Metal Ducts. 4. See Specification Section 23 0700 - HVAC Insulation. 5. See Specification Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories and/or 23 3113 - HVAC Metal Ducts. 6, Conditioned Space: an area inside the building which is heated and/or cooled. 7. Tempered Space: an area inside the building which is not directly heated or cooled, but is adjacent to a heated or cooled space with no insulation separating the two spaces (e.g., ceiling plenums). 8. Exterior Space: an area outside the building which is exposed to the weather (e.g., roof). Exterior ductwork and insulation to be covered with Venture Tape VentureClad 1577CW multilayered, self adhesive jacketing system. Finish to be Natural Alumimum. GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES: 1. Drawings are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work, and to indicate the general locations of equipment, piping and ductwork. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions and layout his own work according to the following guidelines: a. Contractor shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough ins and the exact routing of piping and ducts prior to construction so as to best fit the layout of the work. Space above ceilings is extremely limited; coordinate final layout with all trades. b. Where offsets in piping or ductwork are required to coordinate the work of other trades, with existing structure, piping, conduit, ductwork etc, or to maintain required ceiling heights, they shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. c. All existing piping and ductwork routing shown is intended to indicate approximate size, number and location of piping branches for bidding purposes only. Contractor to verify exact size and configuration prior to construction. d. Unless otherwise noted, all ductwork and piping to be routed concealed in walls, chases or above suspended ceiling. Water piping shall not be routed in exterior walls. Coordinate layout with existing conditions and all other trades. Route all piping and ductwork as high as possible and along walls to maximize space available for other trades. e. Coordinate routing of piping and ductwork to maintain access to filters, motors, electrical equipment, and controls. In no case shall piping or ductwork pass directly over electrical panels or disconnects or restrict access to any electrical equipment including junction boxes. f. Coordinate exact ductwork connection sizes with equipment and transition as required. 2. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain piping or items such as unions, fittings, or valves may not be shown, but where such items are required by code, the specifications, or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. 3. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 5. For all work required above ceilings outside of the project space, Contractor is responsible for removal and replacement of all ceiling tile as required to accomplish the work. 6. Mechanical Contractor shall provide all required support steel for piping, ductwork, and equipment.. 7. Shutdown of existing water, steam, condensate, natural gas, or fire protection systems to be coordinated through Owner's representative a minimum of three days prior to shutdown. 8. Contractor shall note that in nearly all areas, space above existing ceilings is extremely limited, and coordination of new work with existing piping, ductwork, conduit, etc. is mandatory. 9. Duct dimensions shown on drawings are net inside dimensions. Increase sheet metal size for lined ductwork to allow for internal insulation if applicable. 10. All control wiring in finished spaces is to be routed concealed in walls or above ceilings unless specifically noted otherwise. Concealed control wiring where accessible may be installed without conduit. All concealed control wiring which is not accessible shall be routed in conduit. Thermostats to be mounted at 46" AFF to center line. HVAC NOTES: H-1 Existing to remain. H-2 Route condensate drain piping to nearest roof drain south of unit. Drain material shall be schedule 40 PVC. 1-1-3 Provide rooftop unit with raised structural stand. Stand shall include accessible 3' walkways on all sides of unit requiring access. Walkway shall have OSHA hand rail along outer edge. Refer to structural sheet S1.0 for more information. H-4 Provide new digital controller, hot water reheat coil control valve, damper actuator, and space temperature sensor for this terminal box. Existing balancing valve, strainer and air vent are to remain. H-5 Connect condensate drain pipe from BEC-1 to existing copper drain pipe on same wall as unit. H-6 Provide new DDC controlled fan starter for existing exhaust fan. H-7 Outdoor air damper operation shall be interconnected with operation of west exhaust fan near elevator. Either reuse current electrical damper actuator or provide new damper actuator if necessary. H-8 Reinstall exhaust fans in new location. Reconnect to extended exhaust ductwork system. Provide exhaust fan motor with new DDC controlled fan starter. H-9 New external supply ductwork shall be 16 gauge minimum thickness. H-10 Externally wrap sound attenuator with 3 in. of insulation in accordance with exterior round ductwork line of insulation schedule. Taper insulation to meet dimensions of supply ductwork without hard transitions. H-11 Base Bid: Provide new DDC controlled pump motor starter for existing pump. Alternate 1: Provide two new parallel pumps with variable speed drives. ELECTRICAL NOTES: E-1 Electrical Contractor shall remove existing single pole breakers from Panel A3 for circuits 40, 42 serving the removed Leibert unit in the Police telecom space. Furnish and install a new GE 15A/2 breaker to serve the new CU-1 and BEC-1. Electrical Contractor shall reuse existing raceway to rooftop for unit with a new branch circuit wiring(3#12) to new CU-1. E-2 Electrical Contractor shall reuse raceway from rooftop into space. BEC-1 shall be served from CU-1 with power and control. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install power wiring between the two as required. Furnish and install a Hubbell #HBL1392D disconnect adjacent to unit. E-3 Electrical Contractor shall reuse existing raceway with new wiring and breaker to new CU-1. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install a new 30/2 NEMA 3R rated, heavy duty disconnect at CU-1. I Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install new raceway from existing junction box to new exhaust fan location. The branch circuit 9 shall be routed above ceiling on the 3rd floor to the new location. E-5 Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install a pullbox for intercepting existing RTU feeder. Splice new 3#1, 1#6GND feeder and route new raceway from pullbox through the above ceiling space on 3rd floor, up to RTU-4. Coordinate location with the Mechanical Contractor. Field verify existing feeder wire size before splicing. E-6 Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the location of the single point connection to DS-1 and RTU-4. 9 Furnish and install fused disconnect per Disconnect Schedule. E-7 Electrical Contractor shall remove existing motor starter for pump P-1 and install new starter provided by Mechanical Contractor. Pumps P-tA and P-1B are alternate bid. Provide and install the following as part of alternate bid for P-1A and P-1B: 1. A new GE 20A/3 circuit breaker in existing space of existing distribution board within the space for P-1B. Provide new label "P-16" for new breaker. 2. The existing 21 breaker for P-1 and branch circuit wiring shall be reused for P-1A. Re -Label existing placard label for new equipment. 3. Furnish and install VFDs for P-1A and P-1B per Variable Frequency Drive Schedule and specifications. 4. 3/4" EMT conduit and 4#12 wires for branch circuit wiring to VFD for P-1B. 5. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate location within room E024 with Mechanical Contractor as required. E-8 Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install a duct detector in the horizontal section RTU-4 Return duct. Furnish and install a control module with relay to shut down the unit when smoke is detected. Duct detector and control module shall be from the some manufacturer as the rest of the building Fire Alarm System. 0 N M W H 0 w U-) z Y Q W � O U Z o_ n ~LO U Z : Z O LL co D N co D > Z U w 00 00� U C� O CN U � O LLJ O U Q (^� LL O -z O LU LL 0_JLL1 U Q U W � U U U) Q LU Q LU ZD 0 LLI U) W IN z W 0 7 U a U V ~ W w Zo W a riloa U i JOB NO. 140D6A2 SHEET H512 4 0 E co I 0 N N T 0 0 E 0 0 0 cl N 0 J 3 N i N Q 0 I a- S U I N 0 0 0 I o, U Q S CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 410 E WAS H I N GTO N ST IOWA CITY, IOWA CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ISSUE DATE: 30 MAY 2014 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. Dwight Clopton Schumm Date Iowa Registration No. 13694 My license renewal date is December 31, 2014. Pages or sheets covered by this seal: T1.0, HD1.0, HD1.1, HD1.2, HD1.3, HD1.4, 1­11.0, 1­11.1, H1.2, H1.3, H1.4, H5.0, H5.1, H5.2 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. Lynn A Boettcher Date Iowa Registration No. 7600 My license renewal date is December 31, 2014. Pages or sheets covered by this seal: S1.0 MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: DESIGN ENGINEERS 8801 PRAIRIE VIEW LANE SW SUITE 200 CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA 52404 PHONE: 319.841.1944 CONTACT: TIM LENTZ (TIML@DESIGNENGINEERS.COM) - MECHANICAL BRAD DESERANO (BRADD@DESIGNENGINEERS.COM) - ELECTRICAL JOSH PEARCE (JPEARCE@M2BENGINEERS.COM) - STRUCTUAL INDEX OF DRAWINGS: T1.0 TITLE SHEET H1.0 LOWER LEVEL HVAC PLAN S1.0 STRUCTURAL PLAN H1.1 FIRST FLOOR HVAC PLAN HD1.0 LOWER LEVEL HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN H1.2 SECOND FLOOR HVAC PLAN HD1.1 FIRST FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN H1.3 THIRD FLOOR HVAC PLAN HD1.2 SECOND FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN H1.4 ROOF HVAC PLAN HD1.3 THIRD FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN H5.0 HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS HD1.4 ROOF HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN H5.1 HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS H5.2 HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS Id St 0 )I 11 Kinnick Siadlum Blood Comet ,-- f . m Luxury Monies of H nd f Tl ia,;incf .,vt CITY HALL Envr,i Ctty tnva ;:ay to I CtS IngtiK14e � f e L, W Benton S1 4 Benton 1-fill Park W Vefcv Io ya Ay c;(eyl „i;,,d Lious Oak Grove Park westwinc,s Real Estate Servi es.:nc V-artt�ton rn fosva Kiikv: rr, d Ave _ i i[-1.'=ir:i iersity Area _ F Plum Grove SITE MAP NOT TO SCALE PROJECT NOTES: i�rnc; Sireef Kirkivc,cd A,,e _ G��r�H rfChrrst SCOPE OF WORK: 1. In general, the existing rooftop unit, curb and associated exterior ductwork are to be removed which serve the City of Iowa City City Hall basement, first and second floors. New rooftop unit, structural stand, and associated exterior ductwork are to be provided as specified per plans. Controls for 36 VAV with hot water boxes will be replaced with direct digital controls. 2 exhaust fans will be relocated and 4 existing exhaust fans will be added to the BAS. One existing pump will be added to the BAS. A server room cooling unit will be replaced with a mini —split cooling unit. Alternate 1: Demo existing hot water pump. Install two new pumps as listed in pump schedule. Provide variable frequency drives for both new pumps. Control pumps for variable flow as listed on the plans. Alternate 2: Provide new circuit setters, air vents, strainers and interconnecting piping for VAV reheat coils. 2. It is anticipated that the existing units can be removed and new units can be lifted into location by setting a crane on the northeast side of the building, in a parking lot. 3. Existing roof membrane shall be protected completely from all construction activities and is not intended to be modified in any way except where noted at specific curbs. Scope of roof protection shall include any surface intended to be walked upon more than once. Any equipment, storage boxes, or demolished materials that are to remain on the roof longer than one day shall be placed on roof protection. All roof protection shall be constructed as shown in Roof Protection Detail on sheet H5.1. 4. The third floor roof where the rooftop unit is located was originally installed by Firestone. All roof work materials shall be compatible with Firestone roofing system. SCHEDULE OF WORK: 1. Schedule of work is to be coordinated through the Owner's representative and to be performed at the convenience of the Owner. In general, all work at site shall be limited in duration. The facility will be occupied by the Owner during the work period. Timing for shutdown to be coordinated through the Owner's representative a minimum of 10 days in advance, and shall be dependent on actual weather conditions: a. Substantial completion shall be no later than November 26, 2014. b. Final completion shall be no later than December 19, 2014. 2. Shutdown of existing rooftop unit shall be for a single period of no more than 10 consecutive days. Shutdown period may take place between October 13, 2014 and November 26, 2014. Final approval of shutdown period to be coordinated with Owner's representative. a. Suggested schedule for shutdown • Day 1: Disconnect exhaust fans, extend ducts to new fan location. Disconnect existing RTU electrical and ductwork. Set crane, construct structural support stand, place roofing materials / ducts on roof, remove old RTU, remove crane. • Day 2: Construct structural support stand. Demo old ductwork and rooftop curbs. Patch roofing as required. • Day 3: Construct structural support stand. Install exhaust fans in new locations. • Day 4: Set crane, set new rooftop unit on stand, remove crane. • Day 5: Start up exhaust fans. • Day 6: Extend ducts to new unit. • Day 7: Connect RTU ductwork. • Day 8: Connect RTU electrical. • Day 9: Start up new rooftop unit. • Day 10: Float day b. Contractor to perform work inside the building prior to or during the rooftop unit shutdown period. C. Contractor to have all required materials onsite prior to commencing work. d. Work inside or on roof shall be continuous once started. 0 N Q o Q Q ~ o w z Y H U Q W Q ch: S 0 C) U Z 0 V) U O W H w 00 EY-1 U U 0 U � W 0 O � W O O w U) LL z 2 w O J J QU U W U � U Q :-5 —. GJ zr L W W Z 0 � 7 L a (� U V u LuZ rilV z a U JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET T100 T FIRST FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8 1) = 1'-0" REFER TO SHEET HD1.4 FOR DEMOLITION NOTES DeMounONKEY TO BE REMOVED/FIEVISED ----- SINGLE LINE �7 7 7 7 DOUBLE LINE L C111 TO REMAIN SINGLE LINE S U Z 0 H U Z Z O W 10 H H D > Z U W 00 cy, U p IZI- r CV U r �w O o U r1r, Q OOw LL z � O J W J U = Q U w U cl� U Q Z cC z n z O O u1 U Irtolo O LL H Cn ry H LW W 7 L Q u /l ^f� V u W Ow u rilli IJOB NO. I 14006A2 EQUIPMENT DOUBLE LINE EQUIPMENT SHEET HD1 A I GENERAL HVAC DEMOLITION NOTES: 1. Refer to demolition key for items to be removed versus items to remain. 2. All penetrations to be patched and fire stopped to match the fire rating of the surrounding structure. Refer to architectural plans for required fire ratings. Coordinate patching and fire stopping requirements of existing structure with General Contractor. 3. Where ductwork or piping through a floor or a wall is removed, patch all remaining holes to match existing. 4. All asbestos to be abated under a separate contract. 5. Notify the owner's representative prior to creating any smoke, heat, moisture, vapors or dust around any fire alarm equipment. 6. Shut down of existing water, steam, condensate, natural gas or other systems to be requested through Owner's representative a minimum of seven working days prior to shutdown. Actual shutdown to be scheduled at Owner's convenience. 7. Contractor to be responsible for the removal and replacement of all existing ceilings outside of the new project area as needed for associated work. 8. Schedule for all work impacting adjacent occupied areas shall be coordinated with the Owner's representative. Work to be performed in a manner that minimizes the interruptions and inconvenience to the Owner's occupancy of these spaces. 9. For all work required above existing ceilings to remain, Contractor is responsible for removal and replacement of all ceiling tile as required to accomplish work. Refer architectural reflected ceiling plans for types and extent of both existing and new ceilings throughout project. HVAC DEMOLITION NOTES: HD-1 Existing to remain. HD-2 Remove rooftop unit serving City Hall basement, first floor, and second floor completely. Remove Trane Tracer controls wiring back to indoor Tracer panel. Disconnect electrical service to unit for reconnection to new unit. Remove roof curb entirely. Patch roof accordingly to match existing roof. Ductwork within building to remain. HD-3 Remove entire Liebert Computer room unit including condenser, blower evaporator coil, thermostat controller, and refrigerant piping. Leave copper condensate drain piping along south wall for use with new split system cooling unit. HD-4 Remove condensate drain from rooftop unit which extends to nearest roof drain. HD-5 Remove direct digital controller, hot water reheat coil control valve, damper actuator, room temperature sensor, and any other DDC controls associated with terminal unit. HD-6 Remove exhaust fans for reinstallation in new location. Salvage electrical disconnect for reinstallation. Demo motor starter for replacement with new DDC motor starter. HD-7 Remove motor starter on exhaust fan for replacement with new DDC motor starter. HD-8 Once rooftop unit is removed, cover ducts openings securely against weather until new ductwork installation begins. HD-9 Remove Trane control head end unit located in maintenance room south of E020. HD-10 Remove Trane control head end units located in mechanical room E024. Verify that all controlled devices are disconnected prior to removal of control units. HD-11 Base bid: Existing pump to remain. Remove pump motor control panel. Alternate 1: Remove pump and motor control panel. ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTES: ED-1 Disconnect and remove disconnect from Leibert unit. Mechanical Contractor shall remove existing Leibert unit as part of demolition. Existing raceway and wiring shall be reused in new work. ED-2 Disconnect and remove power from existing condensing unit on roof. Existing raceway to roof from 1st floor shall be reused in new work. Unit shall be removed by Mechanical Contractor. ED-3 Disconnect power from exhaust fans. Exhaust fans with integral disconnect shall be reused in new work. Remove branch circuit from roof to nearest accessible junction box above ceiling on 3rd floor. ED-4 Rooftop Unit shall be removed. Electrical Contractor shall disconnect power to unit for removal by Mechanical Contractor. Electrical Contractor shall remove existing feeder back to Panel M3 on the 3rd floor. Existing raceway to be reused in new work, refer to new work drawings for additional information. ROOF PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" W 01 DEMOL ON KEY TO BE REMOVED/REVBM — — — — — SINGLE LINE Z7 7 DOUBLE LINE 11 • :!;„ - T SINGLE LINE 0 N O W J L \ W Q � LO Z W H U a W a of _ Z O F- 0 �w � �� > Z U W 00 � U � CD r CV Z Q u.1 0 p O U H Q 2 o OOw w O J C) LU J U U U } n _ LU LL. Uv O CD `j ZoG JOB NO. 14006A2 EQUIPMENT DOUBLE LINE EQUIPMENT SHEET HD1 04 0 N 67 FIRST FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" REFER TO SHEET H5.2 FOR NOTES NEW WORK KEY NEW/REVISED SINGLE LINE m SINGLE LINE Z 0 N U 0 Z W N D > Z U W 00 0:: U U L� > W r 0 N U W z w w U Q J w U Q z Q J U Q 2 O LL 1_. W 0 _ W z a � V Wo �w a z a u ril I I JOB NO. 14006A2 DOUBLE LINE EQUIPMENT DOUBLE LINE EQUIPMENT SHEET Hl 41 BASE BID MS � �-�HWS HWS ALTERNATE BID CIRCULATING PUMP CONTROL SCHEMATIC NO SCALE HEATING WATER CIRCULATION PUMPS P-1 Base bid sequence: 1. The pump shall operate continuously based on an on/off signal from the DDC system. 2. If the pump fails to prove operation, an alarm shall sound. If the pump is returned to operation, the alarm shall be silenced. POINTS LIST: BASE BID HEATING WATER CIRCULATION PUMP P-1 A. Analog Inputs 1. None B. Binary Inputs 1. P-1 status 2. Pump fail / reset C. Analog Outputs 1. None D. Binary Outputs 1. P-1 start / stop E. Suggested Alarms 1. Low space temperature HEATING WATER CIRCULATION PUMPS P-1A&1B Alternate 1 sequence: 1. The pump shall operate continuously with one running as lead pump and the other as a backup. Every 30 days, the backup pump shall operate as the lead pump for one day. 2. If the pump fails to prove operation, the backup pump shall start after a 30 second delay and an alarm shall sound. If the lead pump is returned to operation, the backup pump shall automatically stop and the alarm shall be silenced. 3. The pump speed shall be controlled to maintain a constant differential pressure in the heating hot water system at a location representative of system demand. POINTS LIST: ALTERNATE 1 HEATING WATER CIRCULATION PUMPS P-1A&1B A. Analog Inputs 1. Heating supply water differential pressure B. Binary Inputs 1. P-1A status 2. P-113 status 3. Pump fail / reset C. Analog Outputs 1. P-1A speed 2. P-1B speed D. Binary Outputs 1. P-1A start / stop 2. P-18 start / stop E. Suggested Alarms 1. Low space temperature CONTROLS SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS (NOTE: ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY NOT BE REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT.) SPACE SENSOR CO2 T = TEMPERATURE OCC = OCCUPANCY CIA = OUTDOOR AIR H = HUMIDITY CO2 = CARBON DIOXIDE LS�Ln n n AVERAGING/LOW POINT SENSORS T = TEMPERATURE (AVERAGING) F = FREEZE STAT (LOW POINT) } n _ SENSOR P =PRESSURE T = TEMPERATURE H = HUMIDITY i=CURRENT n vT MOTORIZED DAMPER vT SMOKE DAMPER DP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR ECM ELECTRICALLY COMMUTATED MOTOR VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MS MOTOR STARTER LR LINE VOLTAGE RELAY EXHAUST FAN EXHAUST O RETURN SUPPLY RELIEF OUTPUT FROM DDC CONTROLLER INPUT TO DDC CONTROLLER N.C. NORMALLY CLOSED N.O. NORMALLY OPEN D4 TWO WAY CONTROL VALVE THREE WAY CONTROL VALVE ® PUMP ® FILTER AIMS AFMS = AIR FLOW MEASURING STATION WFMS = WATER FLOW MEASURING STATION COMPRESSOR THIRD PARTY CONTROLLER HUMIDIFIER DISPERSION TUBE D COIL, ENERGY RECOVERY WHEEL, ETC. DUCTWORK EXHAUST FAN CONTROL SCHEMATIC (EF-1, EF- 2, EF- 3, EF- 4) NO SCALE EXHAUST SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 1. General: a All existing and relocated exhaust fans shall be controlled with Direct Digital Control (DDC) according to the control' -sequences contained in this section. All points, software programming and hardware, etcetera which are required to meet the following sequences of operation, shall be provided. b. The exhaust fan shall be turned on or off based on the occupancy schedule of the building. Coordinate occupancy schedule with Owner. 2. In occupied mode, the sequence shall be as follows: a. The fan shall be on. b. The damper in the outdoor air gooseneck shall be interlocked with operation of exhaust fan. (EF-4 only) 3. In unoccupied mode, the sequence shall be as follows: a. The fan shall be off. b. The damper in the outdoor air gooseneck shall be interlocked with operation of exhaust fan. (EF-4 only) O POINTS LIST A. Binary Inputs 1. Occupied Mode 2. Unoccupied Mode 3. Fan Status B. Binary Outputs 1. Fan Start/Stop C. Suggested Alarm Values 1. Fan Start Failure VAV CONTROL SCHEMATIC (TYPICAL) NO SCALE VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS 1. General a. The DDC panel shall index each unit between occupied and unoccupied modes. b. Provide all sensors with adjustable setpoint. 2. In the occupied mode, operation shall be as follows: a. On a rise in space temperature, modulate reheat coil valve closed and modulate supply air damper open. b. On a fall ins ace temperature, modulate supply air damper to the minimum position, modulate reheat valve open. c. The space temperature setpoint shall be adjustable at the sensor within a range as specified at the DDC panel (+/- 5 deg. F adj. from winter setpoint 70 deg. F, summer setpoint 75 deg. F). d. Monitor the discharge temperature at each zone damper. 3. In the unoccupied mode, operation shall be as follows: a. The reheat coil and supply air dampers shall be modulated as noted above as required to maintain unoccupied heating and cooling set points. POINTS LIST Analog Inputs 1. Supply air flow 2. Space temperature 3. Space set point 4. Discharge air temperature Binary Inputs None Analog Outputs 1. Supply air damper position 2. Reheat control valve position Binary Outputs None Alarms None HAUS EXOT EXHAUST / R OUTDOOR AIR REPRESENTATIVE ZONE TEMPERATURE T INPUT OUTPUT ROOF MOUNTED �Tj F DUCTWORK P UNIT CONTROLLER W/ RETURN BACNET IIP AIR INTERFACE DX COIL VFD SUPPLY OF DX COMPRESSOR 75% OF RTU CONTROL SCHEMATIC (RTU-4) NO SCALE NOTES 1. MINIMUM POINTS AS INDICATED MAY BE PICKED UP FROM UNIT CONTROLLER BACNET INTERFACE WHERE POSSIBLE 2. ALL SENSORS AND UNIT CONTROLLER PROVIDED BY UNIT MANUFACTURER. UNIT IS CONTROLLED BY PACKAGED CONTROLS AND COMMUNICATES WITH BAS FRONT END OVER BACNET. 1. General: a All HVAC systems shall be controlled with Direct Digital Control (DDC) according to the control sequences contained in this section. All points, software programming and hardware, etcetera which are required to meet the following sequences of operation, shall be provided. b. The units shall consist of supply fan, DX cooling, filters, powered exhaust, and outdoor air, return air, and relief air dampers. C. The units supply year round air to variable air volume terminal units in the North Court portion of City Hall. The units shall have a factory installed controller which shall monitor and control the unit in a stand-alone mode. The DDC contractor shall install network sensors and interface as required with factory mounted RTU controls. d. The RTU controller shall operate the compressor as required to maintain discharge air temperature. The unit controller shall modulate the economizer to maintain discharge air temperature when free cooling is available. The DDC system shall determine occupied / unoccupied modes according to the occupancy schedule set by the owner. e. Coordinate provision of all required items for complete control of unit as described with unit manufacturer. 2. In occupied mode, the sequence shall be as follows: a. The outdoor air damper shall be open to supply the minimum occupied outdoor airflow. The unit controller shall operate the return air damper and relief air damper as required. b. The supply fan shall be on. Supply fan speed shall modulate to maintain static pressure setpoint at sensor located in supply duct system. Setpoint to be determined during balancing and reset as follows: I. The controller shall poll the VAV terminal units to determine if they are able to maintain their required airflow. If any VAV terminal unit is unable to maintain its required airflow, the static pressure setpoint shall be gradually reset upward. ii. If all VAV terminal units are operating below maximum damper position, the static pressure setpoint shall be gradually reset downward. C. The unit controller shall gradually modulate the compressor and economizer to maintain discharge temperature setpoint utilizing staging of devices as available. d. The powered exhaust fan shall operate as required to maintain building pressure. Setpoint to be determined during balancing. e. The unit shall incorporate freeze protection within its internal controller programming. f. The system shall be provided with optimum start controls. 3. In unoccupied mode, the sequence shall be as follows: a. The outdoor air damper and relief air damper shall be closed and the return air damper shall be open. b. The supply fan shall be off unless there is a call for heating or cooling. C. The unit controller shall operate the compressor, and economizer to maintain unoccupied space temperature setpoint utilizing staging of devices as available. 4. Safeties and Interlocks: a A high static pressure limit switch shall prevent the supply duct static pressure from rising above 3.9" wg (adjustable). This will be hardwired to de -energize the supply fan. A manual reset will be required. b. A high static pressure limit switch shall prevent the return duct static pressure from rising above 2" wg (adjustable). This will be hardwired to de -energize the exhaust fan. A manual reset will be required. C. If the return air temperature falls below 60 degrees F (adjustable), both the supply fan and the exhaust fan shall be disabled, the outdoor air damper and the exhaust air damper shall be completely closed and an alarm shall register. L COMMUNICATIONS TO FRONT END ROOF MOUNTED DUCTWORK A. Analog Inputs 1. Discharge Air Temperature 2. Return Air Temperature 3. Mixed Air Temperature 4. Reference Space Temperature 5. Supply Duct Static Pressure B. Analog Outputs 1. Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint 2. Space Temperature 3. Supply Duct Static Pressure Setpoint C. Binary Inputs 1. Supply Fan Status 2. Cooling System Status 3. Economizer Status 4. Dirty Filter Status 5. Exhaust Fan Status D. Binary Outputs 1. Occupied Mode 2. Unoccupied Mode E. Suggested Alarm Values 1. RTU Alarm 2. Dirty Filter Alarm 3. Compressor Fault 4. VFD Fault 5. Discharge High Static Pressure 6. Return High Static Pressure 0 N J J C O > � WLC) H \ 0 w Z H U Q o- _ o n c) Z O (71 U H U z (yz o (yw N H N D > Z U W O O Q� U O r U � w �OUO Q�� 00LLJ LL Z 2E 0JW U U w U U Z ce LLJ 0 0 Q W ZD 0 LU 0'^ vJ JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET H550 ONE OR TWO HOUR RATED 1/4' BEAD OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLY CP-25W8 CAULK, 1-2" FIBERGLASS BOTH SIDES OF WALL INSULATION 12'0 MAX. STEEL PIPE (SCH. 10 MIN.) FS-195 WRAP/STRAP 1/2" MIN., 1-1/2' MAX. ANNULAR SPACE 1' DEPTH CP-25WE CAULK WALL SECTION BACKEROD PACKING MATERIAL 28 GAUGE STEEL SLEEVE WALL SLEEVE 1/2" (MIN.) BEYOND WALL NOTE: 1. MATERIALS AND CONFIGURATION SHOWN BREACH SEALING DETAIL ARE FOR 3M SYSTEM #WL5010 ONE AND TWO HOUR FIRE -STOP M-1420a 3M FIRE BARRIER 1/2 " TO 2" FIBERGLASSN/S CAULK INSULATION PTH MINERAL WOOL $2*TH .• 4-1/2' MIN. SOLID J 2-3/8" MAX. CONCRETE FLOOR ANNULAR SPACE 12"0 MAX. STEEL PIPE (SCH. 10 MIN.) NOTE: 1. MATERIALS AND CONFIGURATION SHOWN FLOOR SEALING DETAIL ARE FOR 3M SYSTEM #CAJ5001 TWO HOUR FIRE -STOP M-1420b 4-1/2" MIN. 1' THICK MINERAL WOOL CONCRETE WALL ,.'.: 1" DEPTH 3M FIRE STEEL SUPPORT ,"' BARRIER CP 25 CAULK CUPS 0 ---------- SHEET SHEET METAL 0 SCREW, TYP. RECTANGULAR 0 STEEL HVACDUCT PFRONTVIEW 00" MIN., 4' MAX.ANNULAR SPACE OPTIONAL ANGLEWIRON SUPPORTWALL SECTION FRAME DUCTPORT CUPS FASTENERS 6"AX.O.C. MAX. STEEL NOTES: HVAC DUCT 1. MATERIALS AND CONFIGURATION SHOWN BASED ON 3M SYSTEM #CAJ7016 BREACH SEALING DETAIL 2. THIS DETAIL DOES NOT APPLY TO FIRE DAMPER TWO HOUR FIRE —STOP ASSEMBLIES. INSTALL FIRE DAMPERS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. M-1420c CS-195 COMPOSITE SHEET INSTALLED FOIL SIDE DOWN AND SECURED BY 2" MIN. OVERLAP 1/4' DIA. BY 1-1/2' LONG MIN. MASONRY FASTENERS WITH 3M FIRE BARRIER CP 25 CAULK OR MOLDABLE PUTTY WASHERS 4-1/2" MIN. CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB 36" MAX. LENGTH, 750 SQ. IN. MAX. OPENING SIZE NOTES: 1. MATERIALS AND CONFIGURATION SHOWN ARE FOR 3M SYSTEM #CAJ0004 FLOOR SEALING DETAIL 2. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS THREE HOUR FIRE —STOP FOR COMPOSITE SHEET SEAMING DETAILS M-1420d NOTES: 1. Individual details apply only to the 3. It is the Contractor s responsibility to materials, construction types, and install all fire stopping in strict accordance configurations shown. Refer to to the manufacturer' instructions manufacturer s system and application to comply with the appropriate UL details for other materials, construction System assembly requirements. or configurations. 4. Model numbers and materials are based 2. Details shown are for typical applications on 3M products. and do not necessarily apply to any or all fire stopping requirements on the project. TYPICAL MECHANICAL FIRE —STOPPING DETAILS M-1420 SEALA RUN FLASHING UP UNDER FAN BASE. 2" MINIMUM OVERLA ROOFING MATERIAL AND FLASHING BY ROOFING CONTR. CLIP ANGL_ 'AN )N ROOF. MSCREEN )F CURB MPER CT TRANSITION DAMPER SIZE. NOTE: FAN TO BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO CURB — SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FAN TO BE MOUNTED LEVEL. AIR VENT WATER COIL PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST STATION. EXISTING NEW/REVISED NEW DUCT CONTROL VALVE (NEW) BALANCING VALVE STRAINER J SHUTOFF VALVE DUCT INSULATION 3" OVERLAP FLASHING MINIMUM i NEW CURB NEW 60 MIL EPDM FLASHING FULLY -ADHERED - UP AND OVER TOP OF NEW CURB AND DUCT FLASHING EXISTING STRUCTURAL SUPPORT PIPE HANGER SHALL SUPPORT PIPING INDEPENDENT OF COIL. DUCT CURB DETAIL NO SCALE 12" NEW 6" SELF- ADHEARING SEMI -CURED EPDM FLASHING EXISTING EPDM MEMBRANE W r-R2 �i R = 4.5" S = 3.25" MITERED ELBOW WITH .00/ TURNING VANES / W=W Qa R W RADIUSED ELBOW R?1.OW R1 R1 = 0.10"W R2 = 0.25• ELBOW WITH FULL LENGTH AIR VANES DRAIN LINE SHALL BE AT LEAST THE SAME SIZE AS THE NIPPLE ON THE DRAIN PAN. CLEANOUT PITCH DOWN — TOWARD DRAIN 1" U 01 NOTES: 1. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, THIS DETAIL DOES NOT APPLY FOR FAN COIL UNITS, HEAT PUMPS OR BLOW THROUGH UNITS. 2. "A"=SUCTION PRESSURE OF THE FAN (1-1/2" MINIMUM) 24 GA. GALVANIZED PLATES, CONTINUOUS OVER ALL PLYWOOD SEAMS 1r� PLAN VIEW 'ram ,1911 W3=W1+W2 PLAN VIEW A 3 �II —� 3*A F� PLAN VIEW j^L STRUCTURE W 3*A F—� kTlON 221/) ®N NOTE: DO NOT INSTALL DUCTWORK PLENUMS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWSE 1" EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION MIN. (1.5 LB DENSITY) 1/2" PLYWOOD EXISTING ROOF MEMBRANE CONTRACTOR'S OPTION TO USE CHECK VALVE AND CIRCUIT SETTER TRIPLE DUTY VALVE IN LIEU TRIPLE DUTY VALVE AND REDUCER, IF REQUIRED 1 ISOLATION VALVE _— THERMOMETER FLEXIBLE PUMP li CONNECTOR COMPOUND PRESSURE ® GAUGE 1/4" TURN BALL VALVE 1/4" PIPING VIBRATION ISOLATION (SEE SCHEDULES SUCTION AND SPECIFICATIONS) DIFFUSER ADJUSTABLE HOUSEKEEPING SUPPORT PAD ROOFING NOTES: 1. PROVIDE FOR THE PROTECTION OF THE ROOF MEMBRANE DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS ARE AS SHOWN ON THE ROOF PROTECTION DETAIL. 2. PROTECTION IS REQUIRED OVER FULL EXTENT OF WORK AREAS, TRAFFIC ROUTE AND STORAGE AREAS. FLASHING AT PERIMETER AND PENETRATIONS SHALL ALSO BE PROTECTED. 3. EXISTING ROOF MEMBRANE MANUFACTURER IS FIRESTONE. ANY REPAIRS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A MANUFACTURER APPROVED CONTRACTOR. IF REPAIRS ARE REQUIRED, THE MINIMUM PATCH SIZE SHALL BE 4' x 4'. ROOF PROTECTION DETAIL NO SCALE w W r 0 CV W O Q = 0�z O W LL Z O ---) LL1 J U J U w U U 2 J K H J 0 0 0 o a 0 w U v U Q P N � W z < < x 3 < 3 0 w _ w � w > N a z o — w < z < w z — U U o JOB NO. 14006A2 SHEET H581